Nikon Digital Camera 25468 User Manual
DIGITAL CAMERA  
User's Manual  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Where to Find It  
Find what you’re looking for from:  
➜
➜
0 iv–xi  
The Table of Contents  
Find items by function or menu name.  
i
i
0 ii–iii  
The Q&A Index  
Know what you want to do but don’t know the function name? Find it from  
the “question and answer” index.  
➜
0 322–325  
0 305–308  
0 299–304  
The Index  
Search by key word.  
i
i
i
➜
Error Messages  
If the camera displays a warning, find the solution here.  
➜
Troubleshooting  
Camera behaving unexpectedly? Find the solution here.  
A For Your Safety  
Before using the camera for the first time, read the safety instructions in “For Your Safety”  
(0 xii–xvii).  
Help  
Use the camera’s on-board help feature for help on menu items and other topics. See page 18  
for details.  
Digitutor  
“Digitutor”, a series of “watch and learn” manuals in movie form, is available from the following  
website: http://www.nikondigitutor.com/index_eng.html  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Q&A Index  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
ii  
iv  
Table of Contents  
XIntroduction  
sBasic Photography and Playback  
xLive View  
1
35  
49  
57  
67  
75  
77  
85  
91  
yRecording and Viewing Movies  
P, S, A, and M Modes  
#
User Settings: U1 and U2 Modes  
$
kRelease Mode  
dImage Recording Options  
NFocus  
0 101  
0 105  
0 117  
0 131  
0 143  
0 151  
0 163  
0 179  
0 195  
0 269  
SISO Sensitivity  
ZExposure/Bracketing  
rWhite Balance  
JImage Enhancement  
lFlash Photography  
tOther Shooting Options  
IMore on Playback  
QConnections  
UMenu Guide  
nTechnical Notes  
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Q&A Index  
Find what you’re looking for using this “question and answer” index.  
0
Taking Photographs  
Shooting Modes and Framing Options  
i
Is there a quick and easy way to take snapshots (i mode)?  
How do I quickly adjust settings for different scenes?  
Can I choose a shutter speed (mode S)?  
Can I choose an aperture (mode A)?  
35–39  
40–45  
69  
70  
How do I make long (“time”) exposures (mode M)?  
Can I frame photos in the monitor?  
73  
49–55  
57–61  
Can I shoot movies?  
Release Modes  
i
Can I take photos one at a time or in quick succession?  
How do I take pictures with the self-timer or a remote control?  
Can I reduce shutter noise in quiet surroundings?  
7, 77  
80  
7, 77  
Focus  
i
Can I choose how the camera focuses?  
Can I choose the focus point?  
91–95  
96  
Image Quality and Size  
i
How do I take pictures for printing at large sizes?  
How can I get more pictures on the memory card?  
85–88  
Exposure  
i
Can I make photos brighter or darker?  
107  
139  
How do I preserve details in shadows and highlights?  
Using the Flash  
i
Can I set the flash to fire automatically when needed?  
How do I keep the flash from firing?  
How do I avoid “red-eye”?  
143–145  
0
Viewing Photographs  
Playback  
i
How do I view photographs on the camera?  
How do I view more information about a photo?  
Can I view photos in an automatic slide show?  
Can I view photos on a TV?  
46, 163  
165–170  
201  
191–194  
174  
Can I protect photos from accidental deletion?  
Deletion  
i
How do I delete unwanted photos?  
47, 175–177  
ii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
0
Retouching Photographs  
How do I create retouched copies of photos?  
248–264  
251  
How do I remove “red-eye”?  
How do I make JPEG copies of RAW (NEF) photos?  
Can I overlay two NEF (RAW) photos to make a single image?  
Can I create a copy of a photo that looks like a painting?  
Can I trim movie footage on the camera?  
258  
256–257  
262  
63–66  
0
Menus and Settings  
How do I use the menus?  
18–20  
27, 238  
13–16  
How do I display menus in another language?  
How do I use the command dials?  
How do I keep the displays from turning off?  
How do I focus the viewfinder?  
215  
34  
Can I display a framing grid in the viewfinder or the monitor?  
How do I tell if the camera is level?  
How do I set the camera clock?  
53, 216  
245  
27, 237  
32, 236  
151, 202, 207  
18, 305  
How do I format memory cards?  
How do I restore default settings?  
How do I get help for a menu or message?  
0
Connections  
How do I copy photos to a computer?  
179–181  
182–190  
184, 190  
How do I print photos?  
Can I print the date of recording on my photos?  
0
Maintenance and Optional Accessories  
What memory cards can I use?  
319  
269  
275  
What lenses can I use?  
What optional flash units (Speedlights) can I use?  
What other accessories are available for my camera?  
What software is available for my camera?  
What do I do with the supplied eyepiece cap?  
How do I clean the camera?  
280–281  
81  
283  
Where should I take my camera for servicing and repairs?  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Q&A Index .................................................................................................................................... ii  
For Your Safety ......................................................................................................................... xii  
Notices........................................................................................................................................xiv  
Introduction  
1
Overview....................................................................................................................................... 1  
Getting to Know the Camera................................................................................................. 2  
The Camera Body ......................................................................................................................2  
The Mode Dial.............................................................................................................................6  
The Release-Mode Dial............................................................................................................7  
The Control Panel......................................................................................................................8  
The Viewfinder............................................................................................................................9  
The Information Display....................................................................................................... 10  
The Command Dials .............................................................................................................. 13  
The BM-11 Monitor Cover ................................................................................................... 17  
Camera Menus..........................................................................................................................18  
Using Camera Menus ............................................................................................................ 19  
First Steps ...................................................................................................................................21  
Charge the Battery................................................................................................................. 21  
Insert the Battery .................................................................................................................... 24  
Attach a Lens............................................................................................................................ 25  
Basic Setup................................................................................................................................ 27  
Insert a Memory Card............................................................................................................ 29  
Format the Memory Card .................................................................................................... 32  
Adjust Viewfinder Focus ...................................................................................................... 34  
Basic Photography and Playback  
35  
“Point-and-Shoot” Photography (i and j Modes)...................................................35  
Step 1: Turn the Camera On................................................................................................ 35  
Step 2: Select i or j Mode ............................................................................................... 36  
Step 3: Frame the Photograph .......................................................................................... 37  
Step 4: Focus ............................................................................................................................ 38  
Step 5: Shoot ............................................................................................................................ 38  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Creative Photography (Scene Modes) .............................................................................40  
k Portrait...............................................................................................................................41  
l Landscape........................................................................................................................41  
p Child...................................................................................................................................41  
m Sports.................................................................................................................................41  
n Close Up............................................................................................................................42  
o Night Portrait ..................................................................................................................42  
r Night Landscape............................................................................................................42  
s Party/Indoor....................................................................................................................42  
t Beach/Snow ....................................................................................................................43  
u Sunset................................................................................................................................43  
v Dusk/Dawn......................................................................................................................43  
w Pet Portrait.......................................................................................................................43  
x Candlelight........................................................................................................................44  
y Blossom.............................................................................................................................44  
z Autumn Colors ...............................................................................................................44  
0 Food....................................................................................................................................44  
1 Silhouette.........................................................................................................................45  
2 High Key............................................................................................................................45  
3 Low Key.............................................................................................................................45  
Basic Playback...........................................................................................................................46  
Deleting Unwanted Photographs.....................................................................................47  
Live View  
49  
Framing Photographs in the Monitor ..............................................................................49  
Recording and Viewing Movies  
57  
Recording Movies....................................................................................................................57  
Viewing Movies ........................................................................................................................62  
Editing Movies ..........................................................................................................................63  
Trimming Movies ....................................................................................................................63  
Saving Selected Frames........................................................................................................66  
P, S, A, and M Modes  
67  
Mode P (Programmed Auto) ..............................................................................................68  
Mode S (Shutter-Priority Auto) ..........................................................................................69  
Mode A (Aperture-Priority Auto).......................................................................................70  
Mode M (Manual)....................................................................................................................71  
Long Time-Exposures (M Mode Only) ........................................................................73  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User Settings: U1 and U2 Modes  
75  
Saving User Settings.............................................................................................................. 75  
Recalling User Settings......................................................................................................... 76  
Resetting User Settings ........................................................................................................ 76  
Release Mode  
77  
Choosing a Release Mode ....................................................................................................77  
Continuous Mode (CH/CL).......................................................................................................78  
Self-Timer and Remote Modes ...........................................................................................80  
Mirror up Mode ........................................................................................................................83  
Image Recording Options  
85  
Image Quality and Size..........................................................................................................85  
Image Quality........................................................................................................................... 85  
Image Size................................................................................................................................. 88  
Using Two Memory Cards ....................................................................................................89  
Focus  
91  
Autofocus ...................................................................................................................................91  
Autofocus Mode ..................................................................................................................... 91  
AF-Area Mode.......................................................................................................................... 94  
Focus Point Selection............................................................................................................ 96  
Focus Lock................................................................................................................................. 97  
Manual Focus............................................................................................................................99  
ISO Sensitivity  
101  
Auto ISO Sensitivity Control ............................................................................................. 103  
Exposure/Bracketing  
105  
Metering .................................................................................................................................. 105  
Autoexposure Lock.............................................................................................................. 106  
Exposure Compensation.................................................................................................... 107  
Bracketing ............................................................................................................................... 109  
vi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
White Balance  
117  
Fine-Tuning White Balance............................................................................................... 119  
Choosing a Color Temperature ....................................................................................... 122  
Preset Manual ........................................................................................................................ 123  
Image Enhancement  
131  
Picture Controls..................................................................................................................... 131  
Selecting a Picture Control............................................................................................... 131  
Modifying Picture Controls .............................................................................................. 133  
Creating Custom Picture Controls................................................................................. 136  
Sharing Custom Picture Controls................................................................................... 138  
Active D-Lighting.................................................................................................................. 139  
Color Space ............................................................................................................................. 141  
Flash Photography  
143  
Using the Built-in Flash....................................................................................................... 143  
Flash Mode............................................................................................................................. 144  
Flash Compensation............................................................................................................ 148  
FV Lock...................................................................................................................................... 149  
Other Shooting Options  
151  
Restoring Default Settings ................................................................................................ 151  
Multiple Exposure................................................................................................................. 152  
Interval Timer Photography.............................................................................................. 155  
Non-CPU Lenses.................................................................................................................... 159  
The GP-1 GPS Unit ................................................................................................................ 162  
More on Playback  
163  
Full-Frame Playback............................................................................................................. 163  
Photo Information............................................................................................................... 165  
Thumbnail Playback ............................................................................................................ 171  
Calendar Playback ................................................................................................................ 172  
Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom........................................................................... 173  
Protecting Photographs from Deletion........................................................................ 174  
Deleting Photographs......................................................................................................... 175  
Full-Frame, Thumbnail, and Calendar Playback ....................................................... 175  
The Playback Menu ............................................................................................................. 176  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connections  
179  
Connecting to a Computer ............................................................................................... 179  
Before Connecting the Camera.......................................................................................179  
Connecting the Camera.....................................................................................................180  
Wireless and Ethernet Networks.....................................................................................181  
Printing Photographs.......................................................................................................... 182  
Connecting the Printer.......................................................................................................182  
Printing Pictures One at a Time.......................................................................................183  
Printing Multiple Pictures..................................................................................................185  
Creating Index Prints...........................................................................................................188  
Creating a DPOF Print Order: Print Set .........................................................................189  
Viewing Photographs on TV............................................................................................. 191  
Standard Definition Devices.............................................................................................191  
High-Definition Devices.....................................................................................................193  
Menu Guide  
195  
D The Playback Menu: ManagingImages............................................................................ 195  
Playback Folder.................................................................................................................195  
Hide Image.........................................................................................................................196  
Display Mode.....................................................................................................................197  
Copy Image(s) ...................................................................................................................197  
Image Review....................................................................................................................200  
After Delete........................................................................................................................200  
Rotate Tall...........................................................................................................................200  
Slide Show..........................................................................................................................201  
C The Shooting Menu: ShootingOptions ............................................................................ 202  
Reset Shooting Menu.....................................................................................................202  
Storage Folder...................................................................................................................203  
File Naming........................................................................................................................204  
Auto Distortion Control.................................................................................................205  
Long Exp. NR (Long Exposure Noise Reduction)..................................................205  
High ISO NR........................................................................................................................205  
A Custom Settings: Fine-TuningCameraSettings.................................................................. 206  
A: Reset Custom Settings.............................................................................................207  
a: Autofocus............................................................................................................................208  
a1: AF-C Priority Selection.............................................................................................208  
a2: AF-S Priority Selection.............................................................................................208  
a3: Focus Tracking with Lock-On ...............................................................................209  
a4: AF Point Illumination...............................................................................................209  
a5: Focus Point Wrap-Around .....................................................................................209  
a6: Number of Focus Points .........................................................................................210  
a7: Built-in AF-assist Illuminator .................................................................................210  
a8: Live View/Movie AF..................................................................................................211  
viii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
b: Metering/Exposure......................................................................................................... 211  
b1: ISO Sensitivity Step Value ..................................................................................... 211  
b2: EV Steps for Exposure Cntrl.................................................................................. 211  
b3: Easy Exposure Compensation ............................................................................. 212  
b4: Center-Weighted Area ........................................................................................... 213  
b5: Fine Tune Optimal Exposure................................................................................ 213  
c: Timers/AE Lock................................................................................................................. 213  
c1: Shutter-Release Button AE-L ................................................................................ 213  
c2: Auto Meter-off Delay............................................................................................... 214  
c3: Self-Timer..................................................................................................................... 214  
c4: Monitor off Delay...................................................................................................... 215  
c5: Remote on Duration................................................................................................ 215  
d: Shooting/Display............................................................................................................. 215  
d1: Beep .............................................................................................................................. 215  
d2: Viewfinder Grid Display ......................................................................................... 216  
d3: ISO Display and Adjustment ................................................................................ 216  
d4: Viewfinder Warning Display................................................................................. 216  
d5: Screen Tips.................................................................................................................. 216  
d6: CL Mode Shooting Speed ..................................................................................... 217  
d7: Max. Continuous Release ...................................................................................... 217  
d8: File Number Sequence........................................................................................... 218  
d9: Information Display................................................................................................. 219  
d10: LCD Illumination .................................................................................................... 219  
d11: Exposure Delay Mode .......................................................................................... 219  
d12: Flash Warning ......................................................................................................... 219  
d13: MB-D11 Battery Type ........................................................................................... 220  
d14: Battery Order........................................................................................................... 221  
e: Bracketing/Flash .............................................................................................................. 222  
e1: Flash Sync Speed...................................................................................................... 222  
e2: Flash Shutter Speed................................................................................................. 223  
e3: Flash Cntrl for Built-in Flash.................................................................................. 223  
e4: Modeling Flash.......................................................................................................... 228  
e5: Auto Bracketing Set................................................................................................. 229  
e6: Bracketing Order....................................................................................................... 229  
f: Controls................................................................................................................................ 229  
f1: D Switch....................................................................................................................... 229  
f2: OK Button (Shooting Mode).................................................................................. 229  
f3: Assign Fn Button ....................................................................................................... 230  
f4: Assign Preview Button............................................................................................. 232  
f5: Assign AE-L/AF-L Button......................................................................................... 232  
f6: Customize Command Dials ................................................................................... 233  
f7: Release Button to Use Dial..................................................................................... 234  
f8: Slot Empty Release Lock ......................................................................................... 234  
f9: Reverse Indicators..................................................................................................... 234  
f10: Assign MB-D11 4 Button..................................................................................... 235  
ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup.......................................................................................... 236  
Format Memory Card .....................................................................................................236  
LCD Brightness..................................................................................................................237  
Video Mode........................................................................................................................237  
Flicker Reduction..............................................................................................................237  
Time Zone and Date .......................................................................................................237  
Language............................................................................................................................238  
Image Comment ..............................................................................................................238  
Auto Image Rotation ......................................................................................................239  
Image Dust Off Ref Photo .............................................................................................240  
Battery Info.........................................................................................................................242  
Copyright Information ...................................................................................................243  
Save/Load Settings..........................................................................................................244  
Virtual Horizon ..................................................................................................................245  
AF Fine Tune......................................................................................................................246  
Eye-Fi Upload ....................................................................................................................247  
Firmware Version .............................................................................................................247  
N The Retouch Menu: CreatingRetouchedCopies ................................................................. 248  
Creating Retouched Copies..............................................................................................249  
D-Lighting...........................................................................................................................251  
Red-Eye Correction..........................................................................................................251  
Trim.......................................................................................................................................252  
Monochrome.....................................................................................................................253  
Filter Effects........................................................................................................................254  
Color Balance.....................................................................................................................255  
Image Overlay ...................................................................................................................256  
NEF (RAW) Processing ....................................................................................................258  
Resize....................................................................................................................................259  
Quick Retouch...................................................................................................................260  
Straighten...........................................................................................................................261  
Distortion Control............................................................................................................261  
Fisheye.................................................................................................................................261  
Color Outline .....................................................................................................................262  
Color Sketch.......................................................................................................................262  
Perspective Control.........................................................................................................263  
Miniature Effect ................................................................................................................263  
Side-by-side Comparison..............................................................................................264  
O My Menu/m Recent Settings ...................................................................................... 265  
Recent Settings .....................................................................................................................268  
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Technical Notes  
269  
Compatible Lenses............................................................................................................... 269  
Optional Flash Units (Speedlights)................................................................................. 275  
The Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS) ................................................................. 276  
Other Accessories ................................................................................................................. 280  
Attaching a Power Connector and AC Adapter........................................................ 282  
Caring for the Camera......................................................................................................... 283  
Storage..................................................................................................................................... 283  
Cleaning .................................................................................................................................. 283  
The Low-Pass Filter.............................................................................................................. 284  
“Clean Now” ...................................................................................................................... 284  
“Clean at Startup/Shutdown” ..................................................................................... 285  
“Manual Cleaning” .......................................................................................................... 286  
Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions............................................................. 289  
Available Settings................................................................................................................. 292  
Defaults .................................................................................................................................... 295  
Exposure Program (Mode P)............................................................................................. 298  
Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................... 299  
Display ..................................................................................................................................... 299  
Shooting (All Modes).......................................................................................................... 300  
Shooting (P, S, A, M)........................................................................................................... 302  
Playback .................................................................................................................................. 303  
Miscellaneous........................................................................................................................ 304  
Error Messages....................................................................................................................... 305  
Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 309  
Approved Memory Cards................................................................................................... 319  
Memory Card Capacity ....................................................................................................... 320  
Battery Life .............................................................................................................................. 321  
Index.......................................................................................................................................... 322  
xi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
For Your Safety  
To prevent damage to your Nikon product or injury to yourself or to others, read the following  
safety precautions in their entirety before using this equipment. Keep these safety instructions  
where all those who use the product will read them.  
The consequences that could result from failure to observe the precautions listed in this  
section are indicated by the following symbol:  
This icon marks warnings. To prevent possible injury, read all warnings before using this  
Nikon product.  
A
❚❚WARNINGS  
Keep the sun out of the frame  
Do not disassemble  
A
A
Keep the sun well out of the frame when  
shooting backlit subjects. Sunlight  
focused into the camera when the sun is in  
or close to the frame could cause a fire.  
Touching the product’s internal parts  
could result in injury. In the event of  
malfunction, the product should be  
repaired only by a qualified technician.  
Should the product break open as the  
result of a fall or other accident, remove  
the battery and/or AC adapter and then  
take the product to a Nikon-authorized  
service center for inspection.  
Do not look at the sun through the viewfinder  
Viewing the sun or other strong light  
source through the viewfinder could  
cause permanent visual impairment.  
A
A
Using the viewfinder diopter adjustment control  
When operating the viewfinder diopter  
adjustment control with your eye to the  
viewfinder, care should be taken not to  
put your finger in your eye accidentally.  
Do not place the strap around the neck of an infant  
or child  
Placing the camera strap around the neck  
of an infant or child could result in  
strangulation.  
A
A
Turn off immediately in the event of malfunction  
Should you notice smoke or an unusual  
smell coming from the equipment or AC  
adapter (available separately), unplug the  
AC adapter and remove the battery  
immediately, taking care to avoid burns.  
Continued operation could result in injury.  
After removing the battery, take the  
equipment to a Nikon-authorized service  
center for inspection.  
A
Observe caution when using the flash  
• Using the camera with the flash in close  
contact with the skin or other objects  
could cause burns.  
• Using the flash close to the subject’s eyes  
could cause temporary visual  
impairment. Particular care should be  
observed when photographing infants,  
when the flash should be no less than  
one meter (39 in.) from the subject.  
Do not use in the presence of flammable gas  
Do not use electronic equipment in the  
presence of flammable gas, as this could  
result in explosion or fire.  
A
A
Avoid contact with liquid crystal  
A
Should the monitor break, care should be  
taken to avoid injury due to broken glass  
and to prevent the liquid crystal from the  
monitor touching the skin or entering the  
eyes or mouth.  
Keep out of reach of children  
Failure to observe this precaution could  
result in injury.  
xii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Observe proper precautions when handling  
batteries  
Observe proper precautions when handling the  
charger  
A
A
Batteries may leak or explode if  
improperly handled. Observe the  
following precautions when handling  
batteries for use in this product:  
• Use only batteries approved for use in  
this equipment.  
• Do not short or disassemble the battery.  
• Be sure the product is off before  
replacing the battery. If you are using an  
AC adapter, be sure it is unplugged.  
• Do not attempt to insert the battery  
upside down or backwards.  
• Keep dry. Failure to observe this  
precaution could result in fire or electric  
shock.  
• Do not short the charger terminals.  
Failure to observe this precaution could  
result in overheating and damage to the  
charger.  
• Dust on or near the metal parts of the  
plug should be removed with a dry cloth.  
Continued use could result in fire.  
• Do not handle the power cable or go  
near the charger during thunderstorms.  
Failure to observe this precaution could  
result in electric shock.  
• Do not expose the battery to flame or to  
excessive heat.  
• Do not immerse in or expose to water.  
• Replace the terminal cover when  
transporting the battery. Do not  
transport or store the battery with metal  
objects such as necklaces or hairpins.  
• Batteries are prone to leakage when fully  
discharged. To avoid damage to the  
product, be sure to remove the battery  
when no charge remains.  
• When the battery is not in use, attach the  
terminal cover and store in a cool, dry  
place.  
• The battery may be hot immediately  
after use or when the product has been  
used on battery power for an extended  
period. Before removing the battery turn  
the camera off and allow the battery to  
cool.  
• Do not damage, modify, or forcibly tug or  
bend the power cable. Do not place it  
under heavy objects or expose it to heat  
or flame. Should the insulation be  
damaged and the wires become  
exposed, take the power cable to a  
Nikon-authorized service representative  
for inspection. Failure to observe this  
precaution could result in fire or electric  
shock.  
• Do not handle the plug or charger with  
wet hands. Failure to observe this  
precaution could result in electric shock.  
• Do not use with travel converters or  
adapters designed to convert from one  
voltage to another or with DC-to-AC  
inverters. Failure to observe this  
precaution could damage the product or  
cause overheating or fire.  
• Discontinue use immediately should you  
notice any changes in the battery, such  
as discoloration or deformation.  
Use appropriate cables  
A
A
When connecting cables to the input and  
output jacks, use only the cables provided  
or sold by Nikon for the purpose to  
maintain compliance with product  
regulations.  
CD-ROMs  
CD-ROMs containing software or manuals  
should not be played back on audio CD  
equipment. Playing CD-ROMs on an audio  
CD player could cause hearing loss or  
damage the equipment.  
xiii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notices  
• No part of the manuals included with this • Nikon will not be held liable for any  
product may be reproduced, transmitted,  
transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or  
damages resulting from the use of this  
product.  
translated into any language in any form, by • While every effort has been made to ensure  
any means, without Nikon’s prior written  
permission.  
• Nikon reserves the right to change the  
specifications of the hardware and software  
described in these manuals at any time and  
without prior notice.  
that the information in these manuals is  
accurate and complete, we would  
appreciate it were you to bring any errors or  
omissions to the attention of the Nikon  
representative in your area (address  
provided separately).  
Notices for Customers in Canada  
CAUTION  
ATTENTION  
This Class B digital apparatus complies with  
Canadian ICES-003.  
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est  
conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.  
Notices for Customers in Europe  
CAUTION  
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED  
BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.  
This symbol indicates that this  
product is to be collected  
separately.  
This symbol on the battery indicates  
that the battery is to be collected  
separately.  
The following apply only to users in  
European countries:  
The following apply only to users in  
European countries:  
• This product is designated for separate  
collection at an appropriate collection  
point. Do not dispose of as household  
waste.  
• For more information, contact the retailer or  
the local authorities in charge of waste  
management.  
• All batteries, whether marked with this  
symbol or not, are designated for separate  
collection at an appropriate collection  
point. Do not dispose of as household  
waste.  
• For more information, contact the retailer or  
the local authorities in charge of waste  
management.  
xiv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notices for Customers in the U.S.A.  
Power Cable  
At voltages over AC 125 V (U.S.A. only): The power cable must be rated for the voltage in use, be at  
least AWG no. 18 gauge, and have SVG insulation or better with a NEMA 6P-15 plug rated for  
AC 250 V 15 A.  
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Radio Frequency Interference Statement  
This equipment has been tested and found to  
comply with the limits for a Class B digital  
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules.  
These limits are designed to provide  
reasonable protection against harmful  
interference in a residential installation. This  
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate  
radio frequency energy and, if not installed  
and used in accordance with the instructions,  
may cause harmful interference to radio  
communications. However, there is no  
guarantee that interference will not occur in a  
particular installation. If this equipment does  
cause harmful interference to radio or  
television reception, which can be determined  
by turning the equipment off and on, the user  
is encouraged to try to correct the  
D7000  
CAUTIONS  
Modifications  
The FCC requires the user be notified that any  
changes or modifications made to this device  
that are not expressly approved by Nikon  
Corporation may void the user’s authority to  
operate the equipment.  
Interface Cables  
Use the interface cables sold or provided by  
Nikon for your equipment. Using other  
interface cables may exceed the limits of Class  
B Part 15 of the FCC rules.  
interference by one or more of the following  
measures:  
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
• Increase the separation between the  
equipment and receiver.  
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a  
circuit different from that to which the  
receiver is connected.  
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/  
television technician for help.  
Notice for Customers in the State of California  
WARNING: Handling the cord on this product  
may expose you to lead, a chemical known to  
the State of California to cause birth defects or  
other reproductive harm. Wash hands after  
handling.  
Nikon Inc., 1300 Walt Whitman Road, Melville,  
New York 11747-3064, U.S.A.  
Tel.: 631-547-4200  
xv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notice Concerning Prohibition of Copying or Reproduction  
Note that simply being in possession of material that has been digitally copied or reproduced  
by means of a scanner, digital camera, or other device may be punishable by law.  
• Items prohibited by law from being copied or  
reproduced  
Do not copy or reproduce paper money,  
• Cautions on certain copies and reproductions  
The government has issued cautions on  
copies or reproductions of securities issued  
coins, securities, government bonds, or local by private companies (shares, bills, checks,  
government bonds, even if such copies or  
reproductions are stamped “Sample.”  
gift certificates, etc.), commuter passes, or  
coupon tickets, except when a minimum of  
necessary copies are to be provided for  
business use by a company. Also, do not  
copy or reproduce passports issued by the  
government, licenses issued by public  
agencies and private groups, ID cards, and  
The copying or reproduction of paper  
money, coins, or securities which are  
circulated in a foreign country is prohibited.  
Unless the prior permission of the  
government has been obtained, the copying tickets, such as passes and meal coupons.  
or reproduction of unused postage stamps  
or post cards issued by the government is  
The copying or reproduction of copyrighted  
prohibited.  
• Comply with copyright notices  
creative works such as books, music,  
The copying or reproduction of stamps  
issued by the government and of certified  
documents stipulated by law is prohibited.  
paintings, woodcuts, prints, maps, drawings,  
movies, and photographs is governed by  
national and international copyright laws.  
Do not use this product for the purpose of  
making illegal copies or to infringe copyright  
laws.  
Disposing of Data Storage Devices  
Please note that deleting images or formatting memory cards or other data storage devices  
does not completely erase the original image data. Deleted files can sometimes be recovered  
from discarded storage devices using commercially available software, potentially resulting in  
the malicious use of personal image data. Ensuring the privacy of such data is the user’s  
responsibility.  
Before discarding a data storage device or transferring ownership to another person, erase all  
data using commercial deletion software, or format the device and then completely refill it  
with images containing no private information (for example, pictures of empty sky). Be sure to  
also replace any pictures selected for preset manual (0 123). Care should be taken to avoid  
injury when physically destroying data storage devices.  
xvi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Use Only Nikon Brand Electronic Accessories  
Nikon cameras are designed to the highest standards and include complex electronic circuitry.  
Only Nikon brand electronic accessories (including chargers, batteries, AC adapters, and flash  
accessories) certified by Nikon specifically for use with this Nikon digital camera are  
engineered and proven to operate within the operational and safety requirements of this  
electronic circuitry.  
The use of non-Nikon electronic accessories could damage the camera and may  
void your Nikon warranty. The use of third-party rechargeable Li-ion batteries not  
bearing the Nikon holographic seal shown at right could interfere with normal  
operation of the camera or result in the batteries overheating, igniting, rupturing, or leaking.  
For more information about Nikon brand accessories, contact a local authorized Nikon dealer.  
AVC Patent Portfolio License  
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON-  
COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC  
VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND  
NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC  
VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE  
OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE http://www.mpegla.com  
A Before Taking Important Pictures  
Before taking pictures on important occasions (such as at weddings or before taking the  
camera on a trip), take a test shot to ensure that the camera is functioning normally. Nikon  
will not be held liable for damages or lost profits that may result from product malfunction.  
A Life-Long Learning  
As part of Nikon’s “Life-Long Learning” commitment to ongoing product support and  
education, continually-updated information is available on-line at the following sites:  
•
•
•
For users in the U.S.A.: http://www.nikonusa.com/  
For users in Europe and Africa: http://www.europe-nikon.com/support/  
For users in Asia, Oceania, and the Middle East: http://www.nikon-asia.com/  
Visit these sites to keep up-to-date with the latest product information, tips, answers to  
frequently-asked questions (FAQs), and general advice on digital imaging and photography.  
Additional information may be available from the Nikon representative in your area. See the  
following URL for contact information: http://imaging.nikon.com/  
xvii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xviii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
X
Overview  
X
Thank you for your purchase of a Nikon single-lens reflex (SLR) digital camera. To get  
the most from your camera, please be sure to read all instructions thoroughly and  
keep them where they will be read by all who use the product.  
❚❚Symbols and Conventions  
To make it easier to find the information you need, the following symbols and  
conventions are used:  
This icon marks cautions; information that should be read before use to  
prevent damage to the camera.  
D
A
0
This icon marks notes; information that should be read before using the  
camera.  
This icon marks references to other pages in this manual.  
D Use Only Nikon Brand Accessories  
Only Nikon brand accessories certified by Nikon specifically for use with your Nikon digital  
camera are engineered and proven to operate within its operational and safety  
requirements. THE USE OF NON-NIKON ACCESSORIES COULD DAMAGE YOUR CAMERA AND MAY VOID YOUR  
NIKON WARRANTY.  
D Servicing the Camera and Accessories  
The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing. Nikon recommends that the  
camera be inspected by the original retailer or a Nikon-authorized service representative  
once every one to two years, and that it be serviced once every three to five years (note that  
fees apply to these services). Frequent inspection and servicing are particularly  
recommended if the camera is used professionally. Any accessories regularly used with the  
camera, such as lenses or optional flash units, should be included when the camera is  
inspected or serviced.  
A Camera Settings  
The explanations in this manual assume that default settings are used.  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting to Know the Camera  
Take a few moments to familiarize yourself with camera controls and displays. You  
may find it helpful to bookmark this section and refer to it as you read through the  
rest of the manual.  
The Camera Body  
X
1 Release mode dial............................................... 7, 77 9 E (exposure compensation) button ................107  
Two-button reset button.....................................151  
10 Z (metering) button...........................................105  
Q (format) button................................................. 32  
11 Eyelet for camera strap  
12 Focal plane mark (E)..........................................100  
13 Control panel...............................................................8  
2 Mode dial.....................................................................6  
3 Eyelet for camera strap  
4 Release mode dial lock release........................ 7, 77  
5 Accessory shoe (for optional flash unit).......... 275  
6 Accessory shoe cover........................................... 275  
7 Power switch...............................................................2  
8 Shutter-release button ....................................38, 39  
A The Power Switch  
Rotate the power switch as shown to turn  
the camera on.  
Rotate the power switch as shown to turn  
the camera off.  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Camera Body (Continued)  
X
1 Built-in flash............................................................143 10 AF-mode button......................................... 50, 92, 95  
2 M (flash mode) button ..........................................143 11 Focus-mode selector........................................91, 99  
Y (flash compensation) button.......................148  
3 D (bracketing) button.............................109, 164  
4 Infrared receiver (front)..........................................81  
5 Mounting mark ........................................................25  
6 Built-in microphone......................................... 58, 60  
7 Lens release button.................................................26  
8 Connector cover..........................180, 182, 191, 193  
9 Cover for accessory terminal and external  
12 Meter coupling lever............................................ 310  
13 Mirror .................................................................83, 286  
14 USB connector  
Connecting to a computer .............................. 180  
Connecting to a printer.................................... 182  
15 A/V connector........................................................ 191  
16 HDMI mini-pin connector ................................... 193  
17 Accessory terminal ...................................... 162, 281  
microphone connectors .....................................57 18 Connector for external microphone....................57  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Camera Body (Continued)  
X
1 AF-assist illuminator............................................. 210 7 Contact cover for optional MB-D11 battery pack  
Self-timer lamp.........................................................81  
Red-eye reduction lamp ..................................... 145  
2 Sub-command dial.........................................13, 233  
................................................................................280  
8 Power connector cover........................................282  
9 CPU contacts  
3
Fn button........................................................ 149, 230  
10 Lens mount...................................................... 25, 100  
11 Tripod socket  
12 Body cap........................................................... 25, 281  
4 Depth-of-field preview button....................72, 232  
5 Battery-chamber cover...........................................24  
6 Battery-chamber cover latch ................................24  
D The Microphone and Speaker  
Do not place the microphone or speaker in close proximity to magnetic devices. Failure to  
observe this precaution could affect the data recorded on the magnetic devices.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Camera Body (Continued)  
X
1 Viewfinder eyepiece................................................81 9 X (playback zoom in) button ............................. 173  
QUAL (image quality/size) button..................86, 88  
Two-button reset button .................................... 151  
10 Diopter adjustment control...................................34  
2 Rubber eyecup .........................................................81  
3 O (delete) button  
Deleting pictures..................................................47  
Deleting pictures during playback.................175 11 A (AE-L/AF-L) button ...........................97, 106, 232  
Q (format) button .................................................32  
4 K (playback) button .....................................46, 163  
5 Monitor  
12 Speaker.......................................................................62  
13 Main command dial .......................................13, 233  
14 Live view switch ................................................49, 57  
15 Movie-record button...............................................58  
16 Multi selector ............................................................19  
17 Memory card slot cover..........................................29  
18 J (OK) button..........................................................19  
19 Infrared receiver (rear) ............................................81  
20 Focus selector lock...................................................96  
21 Memory card access lamp ..............................29, 38  
22 R (info) button.......................................... 10, 12, 53  
Viewing settings ...................................................10  
Live view.......................................................... 49, 57  
Viewing pictures...................................................46  
Full-frame playback ...........................................163  
6 G (menu) button .......................................18, 195  
7 L (help/protect) button............................18, 174  
WB (white balance) button..................................117  
8 W (thumbnail/playback zoom out) button  
.......................................................................171, 172  
ISO (ISO sensitivity) button ..................................101  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Mode Dial  
The camera offers a choice of the following modes:  
Mode dial  
X
P, S, A, and M Modes  
Select these modes for full control over camera settings.  
•
•
•
•
P—Programmed auto (0 68)  
S —Shutter-priority auto (0 69)  
A—Aperture-priority auto (0 70)  
M—Manual (0 71)  
Auto Modes  
Select these modes for simple, point-and-shoot  
photography.  
• i Auto (0 35)  
• j Auto (flash off) (0 35)  
Scene Modes (0 40)  
The camera automatically optimizes settings to suit  
the selected scene. Match your selection to the  
scene being photographed.  
U1 and U2 Modes (0 75)  
Store and recall customized shooting settings.  
A Non-CPU Lenses  
Non-CPU (0 270) lenses can be used only in modes A and M. Selecting another mode when  
a non-CPU lens is attached disables the shutter release.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Release-Mode Dial  
To choose a release mode, press the release mode dial  
lock release and turn the release mode dial to the  
desired setting (0 77).  
Release mode dial lock release  
X
Release mode dial  
Mode  
Description  
One photograph is taken each time the shutter-  
release button is pressed.  
Single frame  
S
CL  
The camera takes photographs at about 1 to 5  
Continuous low speed frames per second while the shutter-release  
button is pressed.  
The camera takes photographs at up to 6 frames  
Continuous high speed per second while the shutter-release button is  
pressed.  
CH  
As for single-frame, except that camera noise is  
reduced.  
Quiet shutter-release  
J
Self-timer  
Take pictures with the self-timer.  
E
4
MUP  
Take pictures with an optional ML-L3 remote  
control.  
Remote control  
Mirror up  
Raise the mirror before taking photographs.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Control Panel  
3 MB-D11 battery indicator ...................................221  
4 Battery indicator...................................................... 35  
5 Flash mode .............................................................144  
6 Image size ................................................................. 88  
7 Image quality ........................................................... 85  
8 White balance fine-tuning indicator................120  
9 White balance ........................................................117  
10 Aperture stop indicator ................................ 70, 270  
11 Aperture (f-number).........................................70, 71  
Aperture (number of stops)......................... 70, 270  
Bracketing increment..................................110, 112  
Number of shots per interval .............................156  
Maximum aperture (non-CPU lenses) .............159  
PC mode indicator ................................................181  
12 Flexible program indicator ................................... 68  
13 Memory card indicator (Slot 1)......................30, 89  
14 Memory card indicator (Slot 2)......................30, 89  
15 ISO sensitivity indicator.......................................101  
Auto ISO sensitivity indicator.............................104  
16 “K” (appears when memory remains for over  
1000 exposures)................................................... 36  
X
1 Color temperature indicator .............................. 122  
2 Shutter speed ....................................................69, 71  
Exposure compensation value .......................... 107  
Flash compensation value.................................. 148  
White balance fine-tuning.................................. 120  
Color temperature ................................................ 122  
White balance preset number.................. 123, 128  
Number of shots in bracketing sequence  
.............................................................. 109, 112, 114  
Number of intervals for interval timer  
photography....................................................... 156  
Focal length (non-CPU lenses) .......................... 159  
23 “Clock not set” indicator............................... 28, 237  
24 Interval timer indicator........................................157  
25 Multiple exposure indicator ...............................153  
26 Exposure and flash bracketing indicator.........109  
WB bracketing indicator......................................112  
ADL bracketing indicator ....................................114  
27 Bracketing progress indicator.......... 109, 112, 115  
28 GPS connection indicator....................................162  
29 Metering..................................................................105  
30 Number of exposures remaining ........................ 36  
Number of shots remaining before memory  
17 “Beep” indicator .................................................... 215  
18 Exposure compensation indicator.................... 107  
19 Flash sync indicator.............................................. 222  
20 Flash compensation indicator ........................... 148  
21 Auto-area AF indicator ...........................................95  
AF-area mode indicator..........................................95  
3D-tracking indicator..............................................94  
22 Autofocus mode.......................................................91  
buffer fills .........................................................38, 79  
Capture mode indicator ......................................181  
ISO sensitivity.........................................................101  
Preset white balance recording indicator .......124  
Active D-Lighting amount ..................................139  
Manual lens number ............................................161  
HDMI-CEC connection indicator........................194  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Viewfinder  
X
1 Framing grid (displayed when On is selected for 15 Flash-ready indicator .....................................39, 219  
Custom Setting d2)............................................216  
2 Focus points....................................................... 38, 96  
AF-area mode ...........................................................94  
3 AF area brackets..............................................37, 165  
4 Battery indicator * ...........................................35, 216  
5 Black-and-white indicator * .................................216  
16 FV lock indicator.................................................... 149  
17 Flash sync indicator .............................................. 222  
18 Aperture stop indicator.................................70, 270  
19 Exposure indicator...................................................72  
Exposure compensation display ....................... 107  
Tilt indicator ........................................................... 231  
6 “No memory card” indicator *......................30, 216 20 Flash compensation indicator ........................... 148  
7 Focus indicator ......................................... 38, 97, 100 21 Exposure compensation indicator.................... 107  
8 Autoexposure (AE) lock........................................106 22 Auto ISO sensitivity indicator............................. 104  
9 Shutter speed .................................................... 69, 71 23 Number of exposures remaining .........................36  
AF mode.....................................................................91  
10 Aperture (f-number) ........................................ 70, 71  
Aperture (number of stops) .........................70, 270  
11 Low battery warning ..............................................35  
12 Exposure and flash bracketing indicator .........109  
WB bracketing indicator ......................................112  
ADL bracketing indicator.....................................114  
13 ISO sensitivity indicator........................................101  
14 “K” (appears when memory remains for over  
1000 exposures)....................................................36  
Number of shots remaining before memory  
buffer fills.........................................................38, 79  
ISO sensitivity......................................................... 101  
Preset white balance recording indicator....... 124  
Exposure compensation value .......................... 107  
Flash compensation value.................................. 148  
Active D-Lighting amount.................................. 139  
AF-area mode ...........................................................94  
* Display can be turned off with Custom Setting d4.  
D No Battery  
When the battery is totally exhausted or no battery is inserted, the display in the viewfinder  
will dim. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. The viewfinder display will  
return to normal when a fully-charged battery is inserted.  
D The Control Panel and Viewfinder Displays  
The brightness of the control panel and viewfinder displays varies with temperature, and the  
response times of the displays may drop at low temperatures. This is normal and does not  
indicate a malfunction.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Information Display  
Press the R button to display shutter speed, aperture, the  
number of exposures remaining, AF-area mode, and other  
shooting information in the monitor.  
X
R button  
8 Exposure indicator .................................................. 72  
Exposure compensation display........................107  
Bracketing progress indicator  
Exposure and flash bracketing .......................109  
WB bracketing ....................................................112  
9 Auto-area AF indicator........................................... 95  
Focus points indicator......................................37, 96  
AF-area mode indicator......................................... 95  
3D-tracking indicator ............................................. 94  
10 ISO sensitivity indicator.......................................101  
Auto ISO sensitivity indicator.............................104  
11 “K” (appears when memory remains for over  
1000 exposures)................................................... 36  
12 Number of exposures remaining ....................... 36  
Manual lens number ............................................161  
13 Fn button assignment ..........................................230  
14 AE-L/AF-L button assignment ..............................232  
15 Picture Control indicator .....................................132  
16 Long exposure noise reduction indicator .......205  
17 Auto distortion control ........................................205  
18 White balance ........................................................117  
White balance fine-tuning indicator................120  
19 Image quality ........................................................... 85  
Role played by card in slot 2................................. 89  
20 Image size ................................................................. 88  
21 Flash mode .............................................................144  
1 Shooting mode...........................................................6  
2 Flexible program indicator ....................................68  
3 Flash sync indicator.............................................. 222  
4 Shutter speed ....................................................69, 71  
Exposure compensation value .......................... 107  
Flash compensation value.................................. 148  
Number of shots in bracketing sequence  
.............................................................. 109, 112, 114  
Focal length (non-CPU lenses) .......................... 159  
Color temperature ................................................ 122  
5 Color temperature indicator .............................. 122  
6 Aperture stop indicator.................................70, 270  
7 Aperture (f-number) ........................................70, 71  
Aperture (number of stops) .........................70, 270  
Bracketing increment ................................. 110, 112  
Maximum aperture (non-CPU lenses) ............. 159  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
X
28 MB-D11 battery type display ............................. 220  
MB-D11 battery indicator ................................... 221  
29 GPS connection indicator ................................... 162  
30 Metering.................................................................. 105  
31 Depth-of-field preview button assignment... 232  
32 Color space ............................................................. 141  
33 Active D-Lighting indicator ................................ 139  
34 High ISO noise reduction indicator .................. 205  
35 Movie quality ............................................................60  
36 Autofocus mode.......................................................91  
37 Copyright information......................................... 243  
38 “Clock not set” indicator................................28, 237  
39 Image comment indicator.................................. 238  
40 Release mode....................................................... 7, 77  
Continuous shooting speed.........................78, 217  
41 Eye-Fi connection indicator................................ 247  
42 FV lock indicator.................................................... 149  
43 Flash compensation indicator ........................... 148  
44 Exposure compensation indicator.................... 107  
22 “Beep” indicator.....................................................215  
23 Multiple exposure indicator................................153  
24 Exposure and flash bracketing indicator .........109  
WB bracketing indicator ......................................112  
ADL bracketing indicator.....................................114  
25 ADL bracketing amount.......................................114  
26 Interval timer indicator ........................................157  
27 Camera battery indicator.......................................35  
A Turning the Monitor Off  
To clear shooting information from the monitor, press the  
R
button twice more or press the  
shutter-release button halfway. The monitor will turn off automatically if no operations are  
performed for about 10 seconds.  
A See Also  
For information on choosing how long the monitor stays on, see Custom Setting c4  
(Monitor off delay, 0 215). For information on changing the color of the lettering in the  
information display, see Custom Setting d9 (Information display, 0 219).  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚Changing Settings in the Information Display  
To change settings for the items listed below, press the R  
button in the information display. Highlight items using the  
multi selector and press J to view options for the highlighted  
item.  
X
R button  
1 Movie quality............................................................ 60  
2 High ISO noise reduction ....................................205  
3 Active D-Lighting ..................................................139  
4 Color space .............................................................141  
5 Depth-of-field preview button assignment ...232  
6
7
Fn button assignment ..........................................230  
AE-L/AF-L button assignment ..............................232  
8 Picture Control .......................................................132  
9 Long exposure noise reduction.........................205  
10 Auto distortion control ........................................205  
A Tool Tips  
A tool tip giving the name of the selected item appears in the information display. Tool tips  
can be turned off using Custom Setting d5 (Screen Tips; 0 216).  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Command Dials  
The main- and sub-command dials are used alone or in combination with other  
controls to adjust a variety of settings.  
M/Y button  
Flash mode  
Flash compensation  
X
D button  
AF-mode button  
Bracketing  
Autofocus mode  
AF-area mode  
Sub-command dial  
E button  
Exposure compensation  
Mode dial  
Main command dial  
Z button  
Metering  
WB /L button  
White balance  
ISO/W button  
ISO sensitivity  
QUAL/X button  
Image quality/size  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚Scene Mode  
Choose a scene (h; 0 41).  
h mode Main command dial  
Monitor  
X
❚❚Image Quality and Size  
Set image quality (0 86).  
+
QUAL button Main command dial  
Control panel  
Control panel  
Choose an image size (0 88).  
+
QUAL button Sub-command dial  
❚❚Autofocus  
Choose an autofocus mode  
(0 92).  
+
AF-mode button Main command dial  
Control panel  
Control panel  
Choose an AF-area mode  
(0 95).  
+
AF-mode button Sub-command dial  
❚❚ISO Sensitivity  
Set ISO sensitivity (0 101).  
+
ISO button Main command dial  
Control panel  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚Exposure  
Choose a combination of  
aperture and shutter speed  
(mode P; 0 68).  
Mode P  
Main command dial  
Control panel  
Control panel  
Control panel  
Control panel  
Control panel  
Control panel  
X
Choose a shutter speed (mode S  
or M; 0 69, 71).  
Mode S or M Main command dial  
Choose an aperture (mode A or  
M; 0 70, 71).  
Mode A or M Sub-command dial  
Choose a metering option  
(mode P, S, A, or M; 0 105).  
+
Z button Main command dial  
Set exposure compensation  
(mode P, S, A, or M; 0 107).  
+
E button  
Main command dial  
Activate or cancel bracketing/  
select number of shots in  
bracketing sequence (mode P, S,  
A, or M; 0 109, 112, 114).  
+
D button Main command dial  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Select bracketing increment  
(mode P, S, A, or M; 0 110, 112).  
+
D button Sub-command dial  
Control panel  
X
❚❚White Balance  
Choose a white balance option  
(mode P, S, A, or M; 0 117).  
+
WB button Main command dial  
Control panel  
Control panel  
Fine-tune white balance  
(0 120), set color temperature  
(0 122), or choose a white  
balance preset (0 128) in mode  
P, S, A, or M.  
+
WB button  
Sub-command dial  
❚❚Flash Settings  
Choose a flash mode (0 144).  
+
M button  
Main command dial  
Control panel  
Control panel  
Set flash compensation (mode P,  
S, A, or M; 0 148).  
+
Y button Sub-command dial  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The BM-11 Monitor Cover  
A clear plastic cover is provided with the camera to keep the  
monitor clean and protect it when the camera is not in use. To  
attach the cover, insert the projection on the top of the cover  
into the matching indentation above the camera monitor (q)  
and press the bottom of the cover until it clicks into place (w).  
X
To remove the cover, hold the camera firmly and pull the  
bottom of the cover gently outwards as shown at right.  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Camera Menus  
Most shooting, playback, and setup options can be accessed  
from the camera menus. To view the menus, press the G  
button.  
G button  
X
Tabs  
Choose from the following menus:  
• D: Playback (0 195)  
• C: Shooting (0 202)  
• A: Custom Settings (0 206)  
• B: Setup (0 236)  
• N: Retouch (0 248)  
• O/m: My Menu or Recent settings (defaults to  
My Menu; 0 265)  
Slider shows position in current menu.  
Current settings are shown by icons.  
Menu options  
Options in current menu.  
d
If a d icon is displayed at the bottom left corner of the  
monitor, help can be displayed by pressing the L  
button. A description of the currently selected option or  
menu will be displayed while the button is pressed. Press  
1 or 3 to scroll through the display.  
L button  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Camera Menus  
The multi selector and J button are used to navigate the camera menus.  
Move cursor up  
J button: select highlighted item  
Select highlighted item or  
Cancel and return to  
previous menu  
display sub-menu  
X
Move cursor down  
Follow the steps below to navigate the menus.  
G button  
1 Display the menus.  
Press the G button to display the menus.  
2 Highlight the icon for the current menu.  
Press 4 to highlight the icon for the current  
menu.  
3 Select a menu.  
Press 1 or 3 to select the desired menu.  
4 Position the cursor in the selected menu.  
Press 2 to position the cursor in the selected  
menu.  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 Highlight a menu item.  
Press 1 or 3 to highlight a menu item.  
X
6 Display options.  
Press 2 to display options for the selected menu  
item.  
7 Highlight an option.  
Press 1 or 3 to highlight an option.  
8 Select the highlighted item.  
Press J to select the highlighted item. To exit  
without making a selection, press the G  
button.  
Note the following:  
• Menu items that are displayed in gray are not currently available.  
• While pressing 2 generally has the same effect as pressing J, there are some  
cases in which selection can only be made by pressing J.  
• To exit the menus and return to shooting mode, press the shutter-release button  
halfway (0 39).  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
First Steps  
Charge the Battery  
The camera is powered by an EN-EL15 rechargeable Li-ion battery (supplied). To  
maximize shooting time, charge the battery in the supplied MH-25 battery charger  
before use. About 2 hours and 35 minutes are required to fully recharge the battery  
when no charge remains.  
X
1 Connect the AC power cable or wall adapter.  
Connect the power cable as shown at right. Use the AC  
adapter plug in the position shown; do not rotate.  
Depending on the country or region of purchase, an AC  
wall adapter may also be supplied with the charger. To use  
the adapter, insert it into the charger AC inlet (q). Slide  
the AC wall adapter latch in the direction shown (w) and  
rotate the adapter 90 ° to fix it in the position shown (e).  
Reverse these steps to remove the adapter.  
AC wall adapter latch  
90 °  
2 Remove the terminal cover.  
Remove the terminal cover from the battery.  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Insert the battery.  
Place the battery in the battery bay as shown in the  
illustration on the charger.  
X
Battery Charging  
charging complete  
4 Plug the charger in.  
The CHARGE lamp will blink while the battery charges.  
D Charging the Battery  
Charge the battery indoors at ambient temperatures between  
5–35°C (41–95°F). The battery will not charge if its  
temperature is below 0°C (32°F) or above 60°C (140°F).  
5 Remove the battery when charging is complete.  
Charging is complete when the CHARGE lamp stops  
blinking. Unplug the charger and remove the battery.  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D The Battery and Charger  
Read and follow the warnings and cautions on pages xii–xiii and 289–291 of this manual. Do  
not use the battery at ambient temperatures below 0°C/32°F or above 40°C/104°F; failure to  
observe this precaution could damage the battery or impair its performance. Capacity may  
be reduced and charging times may increase at battery temperatures from 0°C/32°F to  
15°C/59°F and from 45°C/113°F to 60°C/140°F.  
Do not move the charger or touch the battery during charging. Failure to observe this  
precaution could in very rare instances result in the charger showing that charging is  
complete when the battery is only partially charged. Remove and reinsert the battery to  
begin charging again.  
X
If the CHARGE lamp flickers (i.e., flashes about eight times a second) during charging, confirm  
that the temperature is in the correct range and then unplug the charger and remove and  
reinsert the battery. If the problem persists, cease use immediately and take battery and  
charger to your retailer or a Nikon-authorized service representative.  
The supplied power cable and AC wall adapter are for use with the MH-25 only. Use the  
charger with compatible batteries only. Unplug when not in use.  
A EN-EL15 Rechargeable Li-ion Batteries  
The supplied EN-EL15 shares information with compatible devices, enabling the camera to  
show battery charge state in six levels (0 35). The Battery info option in the setup menu  
details battery charge, battery life, and the number of pictures taken since the battery was  
last charged (0 242).  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Insert the Battery  
1 Turn the camera off.  
D Inserting and Removing Batteries  
Always turn the camera off before inserting or removing batteries.  
X
2 Open the battery-chamber cover.  
Unlatch (q) and open (w) the battery-chamber cover.  
3 Insert the battery.  
Insert the battery in the orientation shown (q), using the  
battery to keep the orange battery latch pressed to one  
side. The latch locks the battery in place when the battery  
is fully inserted (w).  
Battery latch  
4 Close the battery-chamber cover.  
A Removing the Battery  
Turn the camera off and open the battery-chamber cover. Press the  
battery latch in the direction shown by the arrow to release the  
battery and then remove the battery by hand.  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Attach a Lens  
Care should be taken to prevent dust from entering the camera when the lens is  
removed. The lens generally used in this manual for illustrative purposes is an AF-S  
DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR.  
Mounting mark  
Focal length scale  
Focal length mark  
X
Lens hood (0 317)  
CPU contacts (0 269)  
Lens cap  
Rear lens cap  
A-M switch (see below)  
VR (vibration reduction) switch (0 26)  
Zoom ring  
Focus ring (0 55, 99)  
1 Turn the camera off.  
2 Remove the rear lens cap and the  
q
w
camera body cap.  
3 Attach the lens.  
Keeping the mounting mark on the  
lens aligned with the mounting mark  
on the camera body, position the lens  
in the camera’s bayonet mount (q).  
Being careful not to press the lens-  
release button, rotate the lens  
counter-clockwise until it clicks into  
place (w).  
Slide the A-M switch to A (autofocus; if  
the lens has an M/A-M switch, select M/A  
for autofocus with manual override).  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚Vibration Reduction (VR)  
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR lenses support vibration reduction  
(VR), which reduces blur caused by camera shake even when the camera is panned,  
allowing shutter speeds to be slowed by approximately 3 EV (Nikon measurements;  
effects vary with the user and shooting conditions).  
To use vibration reduction, slide the VR switch to ON. Vibration  
reduction is activated when the shutter-release button is  
pressed halfway, reducing the effects of camera shake on the  
image in the viewfinder and simplifying the process of framing  
the subject and focusing in both autofocus and manual focus  
modes. When the camera is panned, vibration reduction applies  
only to motion that is not part of the pan (if the camera is  
panned horizontally, for example, vibration reduction will be  
applied only to vertical shake), making it much easier to pan the  
camera smoothly in a wide arc.  
X
Vibration reduction can be turned off by sliding the VR switch to OFF. Turn vibration  
reduction off when the camera is securely mounted on a tripod, but leave it on if the  
tripod head is not secured or when using a monopod.  
A Detaching the Lens  
Be sure the camera is off when removing or exchanging lenses. To  
remove the lens, press and hold the lens release button (q) while  
turning the lens clockwise (w). After removing the lens, replace the  
lens caps and camera body cap.  
D CPU Lenses with Aperture Rings  
In the case of CPU lenses equipped with an aperture ring (0 269), lock aperture at the  
minimum setting (highest f-number).  
D Vibration Reduction  
Do not turn the camera off or remove the lens while vibration reduction is in effect. If power  
to the lens is cut while vibration reduction is on, the lens may rattle when shaken. This is not  
a malfunction, and can be corrected by reattaching the lens and turning the camera on.  
Vibration reduction is disabled while the built-in flash is charging. When vibration reduction  
is active, the image in the viewfinder may be blurred after the shutter is released. This does  
not indicate a malfunction.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Setup  
A language-selection dialog will be displayed the first time the camera is turned on.  
Choose a language and set the time and date. Photographs can not be taken until  
you have set the time and date.  
1 Turn the camera on.  
X
A language-selection dialog will be displayed.  
2 Select a language.  
Press 1 or 3 to highlight the desired language  
and press J.  
3 Choose a time zone.  
A time-zone selection dialog will be displayed.  
Press 4 or 2 to highlight the local time zone (the  
UTC field shows the difference between the  
selected time zone and Coordinated Universal  
Time, or UTC, in hours) and press J.  
4 Choose a date format.  
Press 1 or 3 to choose the order in which the  
year, month, and day will be displayed. Press J  
to proceed to the next step.  
5 Turn daylight saving time on or off.  
Daylight saving time options will be displayed.  
Daylight saving time is off by default; if daylight  
saving time is in effect in the local time zone,  
press 1 to highlight On and press J.  
6 Set the date and time.  
The dialog shown at right will be displayed. Press  
4 or 2 to select an item, 1 or 3 to change. Press  
J to set the clock and exit to shooting mode.  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A Setting the Clock  
Language and date/time settings can be changed at any time using the Language (0 238)  
and Time zone and date (0 237) options in the setup menu. The camera clock can also be  
synchronized with GPS devices (0 162).  
A The Clock Battery  
The camera clock is powered by an independent, rechargeable power source, which is  
charged as necessary when the main battery is installed or the camera is powered by an  
optional EP-5B power connector and EH-5a AC adapter (0 280). Two days of charging will  
X
power the clock for about three months. If the  
icon flashes in the control panel, the  
B
clock battery is exhausted and the clock has been reset. Set the clock to the correct time and  
date.  
A The Camera Clock  
The camera clock is less accurate than most watches and household clocks. Check the clock  
regularly against more accurate time pieces and reset as necessary.  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Insert a Memory Card  
The camera stores pictures on Secure Digital (SD) memory cards (available separately;  
0 319). The camera has two memory card slots (Slot 1 and Slot 2); if you will be using  
only one memory card, insert it in Slot 1 (0 30).  
1 Turn the camera off.  
X
A Inserting and Removing Memory Cards  
Always turn the camera off before inserting or removing memory cards.  
2 Open the card slot cover.  
Slide the card slot cover out (q) and open the card slot  
(w).  
3 Insert the memory card.  
Holding the memory card as shown at right, slide it in until  
GB  
it clicks into place. The memory card access lamp will light  
4
for a few seconds.  
D Inserting Memory Cards  
Inserting memory cards upside down or backwards could  
damage the camera or the card. Check to be sure the card is in  
Front  
Access lamp  
the correct orientation.  
Close the memory card slot cover. If this is the first time  
the memory card will be used in the camera or the card has  
been formatted in another device, format the card as  
described on page 32.  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A No Memory Card  
If no memory card is inserted, the displays in the control panel and at  
the bottom of the viewfinder will show S and a “no memory card”  
icon will be displayed in the viewfinder screen while the battery has  
charge remaining, even when the camera is off.  
X
A Removing Memory Cards  
After confirming that the access lamp is off, turn the camera off, open  
the memory card slot cover, and press the card in to eject it (q). The  
card can then be removed by hand (w).  
GB  
4
A Using Two Memory Cards  
Slot 1 is for the main card; the card in slot 2 plays a backup or  
secondary role. If the default setting of Overflow is selected for Role  
played by card in Slot 2 (0 89) when two memory cards are inserted,  
the card in slot 2 will only be used when the card in slot 1 is full.  
Slot 1  
Slot 2  
The control panel shows the slot or slots that currently hold a memory  
card (the example at right shows the icons displayed when a card is  
inserted in each slot). If the memory card is full or locked or an error  
has occurred, the icon for the affected card will blink (0 307).  
Control panel  
Information display  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D Memory Cards  
• Memory cards may be hot after use. Observe due caution when removing memory cards  
from the camera.  
• Do not remove memory cards from the camera, turn the camera off, or remove or  
disconnect the power source during formatting or while data are being recorded, deleted,  
or copied to a computer. Failure to observe these precautions could result in loss of data  
or in damage to the camera or card.  
• Do not touch the card terminals with your fingers or metal objects.  
• Do not bend, drop, or subject to strong physical shocks.  
• Do not apply force to the card casing. Failure to observe this precaution could damage  
the card.  
X
• Do not expose to water, heat, high levels of humidity, or direct sunlight.  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Format the Memory Card  
Memory cards must be formatted before first use or after being used or formatted in  
other devices.  
D Formatting Memory Cards  
Formatting memory cards permanently deletes any data they may contain. Be sure to copy any  
photographs and other data you wish to keep to a computer before proceeding (0 179).  
X
1 Turn the camera on.  
2 Press the Q buttons.  
O button Z button  
Hold the Q (O and Z) buttons down  
simultaneously until a blinking C appears in  
the shutter-speed displays in the control panel  
and viewfinder. If two memory cards are  
inserted, the card in Slot 1 (0 30) will be  
selected; you can choose the card in Slot 2 by  
rotating the main command dial. To exit  
without formatting the memory card, wait until  
C stops blinking (about six seconds) or press  
any button other than the Q (O and Z)  
buttons.  
3 Press the Q buttons again.  
Press the Q (O and Z) buttons together a second time while C is blinking  
to format the memory card. Do not remove the memory card or remove or  
disconnect the power source during formatting. When formatting is complete,  
the control panel and viewfinder will show the number of photographs that can  
be recorded at current settings.  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A The Write Protect Switch  
Memory cards are equipped with a write protect switch to  
prevent accidental loss of data. When this switch is in the  
“lock” position, the memory card can not be formatted  
and photos can not be deleted or recorded (a warning will  
be displayed in the monitor if you attempt to release the  
shutter). To unlock the memory card, slide the switch to  
the “write” position.  
G B  
4
Write-protect switch  
X
A See Also  
See page 236 for information on formatting memory cards using the Format memory card  
option in the setup menu.  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjust Viewfinder Focus  
The camera is equipped with diopter adjustment to accommodate individual  
differences in vision. Check that the display in the viewfinder is in focus before  
framing pictures in the viewfinder.  
1 Remove the lens cap.  
X
2 Turn the camera on.  
3 Focus the viewfinder.  
Rotate the diopter adjustment control until  
the AF area brackets are in sharp focus. When  
operating the diopter adjustment control with  
your eye to the viewfinder, be careful not to  
put your fingers or fingernails in your eye.  
AF area brackets  
A Adjusting Viewfinder Focus  
If you are unable to focus the viewfinder as described above, select single-servo autofocus  
(AF-S; 0 91), single-point AF (0 94), and the center focus point (0 96), and then frame a  
high-contrast subject in the center focus point and press the shutter-release button halfway  
to focus the camera. With the camera in focus, use the diopter adjustment control to bring  
the subject into clear focus in the viewfinder. If necessary, viewfinder focus can be further  
adjusted using optional corrective lenses (0 281).  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Photography and Playback  
s
“Point-and-Shoot” Photography  
(i and j Modes)  
s
This section describes how to take photographs in i (auto) mode, an  
automatic “point-and-shoot” mode in which the majority of settings  
are controlled by the camera in response to shooting conditions, and  
in which the flash will fire automatically if the subject is poorly lit. To  
take photographs with the flash off while leaving the camera in  
control of other settings, rotate the mode dial to j to select auto (flash off) mode.  
Step 1: Turn the Camera On  
1 Turn the camera on.  
Remove the lens cap and turn the camera on. The control panel will turn on and  
the display in the viewfinder will light.  
2 Check the battery level.  
Check the battery level in the control panel or viewfinder.  
Control panel * Viewfinder *  
Description  
L
—
—
Battery fully charged.  
K
J
—
Battery partially discharged.  
I
—
H
d
d
(blinks)  
Low battery. Charge battery or ready spare battery.  
Shutter release disabled. Charge or exchange battery.  
H
(blinks)  
* No icon displayed when camera is powered by optional EP-5B power connector and  
EH-5a AC adapter. V appears in information display.  
A Image Sensor Cleaning  
The camera vibrates the low-pass filter covering the image sensor to remove dust when the  
camera is turned on or off (0 284).  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Check the number of exposures  
remaining.  
The control panel and viewfinder show the  
number of photographs that can be taken at  
current settings (values over 1,000 are rounded  
down to the nearest hundred; e.g., values  
between 1,200 and 1,299 are shown as 1.2 K). If two memory cards are inserted,  
the displays show the space available on the card in Slot 1 (0 30). When the  
number of exposures remaining reaches A, the number will flash, n or j  
will blink in the shutter-speed displays, and the icon for the affected card will  
blink. Insert another memory card (0 29) or delete some photos (0 47, 175).  
s
A Camera Off Display  
If the camera is turned off with a battery and memory  
card inserted, the memory card icon and number of  
exposures remaining will be displayed (some  
memory cards may in rare cases only display this  
information when the camera is on).  
Control panel  
Step 2: Select i or j Mode  
To shoot where use of a flash is prohibited,  
photograph infants, or capture natural lighting under  
low light conditions, rotate the mode dial to j.  
Otherwise, rotate the mode dial to i.  
Mode dial  
j mode  
i mode  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Step 3: Frame the Photograph  
1 Ready the camera.  
When framing photographs in the viewfinder,  
hold the handgrip in your right hand and cradle  
the camera body or lens with your left. Keep  
your elbows propped lightly against your torso  
for support and place one foot half a pace ahead  
of the other to keep your upper body stable.  
s
Hold the camera as shown at right when framing  
photographs in portrait (tall) orientation.  
In j mode, shutter speeds slow when lighting is  
poor; use of a tripod is recommended.  
2 Frame the photograph.  
Frame a photograph in the viewfinder with the  
main subject in the AF area brackets.  
AF area brackets  
Zoom ring  
A Using a Zoom Lens  
Use the zoom ring to zoom in on the subject so that it fills a  
larger area of the frame, or zoom out to increase the area  
visible in the final photograph (select longer focal lengths  
on the lens focal length scale to zoom in, shorter focal  
lengths to zoom out).  
Zoom in  
A The AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR  
In the case of the AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED  
VR (0 315, 316), changes to zoom can alter maximum  
aperture by up to 11/3 EV. The camera however  
automatically takes this into account when setting  
exposure, and no modifications to camera settings are  
required following adjustments to zoom.  
Zoom out  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Step 4: Focus  
1 Press the shutter-release button halfway.  
Press the shutter-release button halfway to  
focus. The active focus point will be displayed. If  
the subject is poorly lit, the flash may pop up and  
the AF-assist illuminator may light.  
s
2 Check the indicators in the viewfinder.  
When the focus operation is complete, the in-  
focus indicator (I) will appear in the viewfinder.  
Focus point  
In-focus  
indicator  
I
Description  
Subject in focus.  
2 4 Focus point is between camera and subject.  
2 4 Focus point is behind subject.  
2 4 Camera unable to focus using autofocus.  
(blinks) See page 93.  
In-focus  
indicator  
Buffer  
capacity  
While the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, the number of exposures  
that can be stored in the memory buffer (“t”; 0 79) will be displayed in the  
viewfinder.  
Step 5: Shoot  
Smoothly press the shutter-release button the rest of  
the way down to release the shutter and record the  
photograph. The access lamp next to the memory  
card slot cover will light while the photograph is being  
recorded to the memory card. Do not eject the memory  
card or remove or disconnect the power source until the  
lamp has gone out and recording is complete.  
Access lamp  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A The Shutter-Release Button  
The camera has a two-stage shutter-release button. The camera focuses when the shutter-  
release button is pressed halfway. To take the photograph, press the shutter-release button  
the rest of the way down.  
Focus: press halfway  
Shoot: press all the way down  
s
A Auto-Meter Off  
The viewfinder and the control panel shutter speed and aperture displays will turn off if no  
operations are performed for about 6 seconds (auto meter off), reducing the drain on the  
battery. Press the shutter-release button halfway to reactivate the display. The auto-meter  
off delay can be selected using Custom Setting c2 (Auto meter-off delay, 0 214).  
6 s  
Exposure meters on  
Exposure meters off  
Exposure meters on  
A The Built-in Flash  
If additional lighting is required for correct exposure in i mode, the  
built-in flash will pop up automatically when the shutter-release  
button is pressed halfway. If the flash is raised, photographs can only  
be taken when the flash-ready indicator (M) is displayed. If the flash-  
ready indicator is not displayed, the flash is charging; remove your  
finger briefly from the shutter-release button and try again.  
To save battery power when the flash is not in use, return it to its  
closed position by pressing it gently downward till the latch clicks  
into place.  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Creative Photography (Scene Modes)  
The camera offers a choice of “scene” modes. Choosing a scene mode  
automatically optimizes settings to suit the selected scene, making  
creative photography as simple as selecting a mode, framing a picture,  
and shooting as described on pages 35–39.  
❚❚hMode  
To select a scene, rotate the mode dial to h and then rotate the main command  
dial until the desired scene is displayed in the monitor. The monitor turns on  
automatically when the dial is rotated.  
s
Mode dial  
Main command dial  
Monitor  
Night  
Night  
Portrait  
Landscape  
Child  
p
Sports  
Close up  
portrait  
landscape  
k
l
m
n
o
r
Blossom  
y
Party/indoor Beach/snow  
Sunset  
Dusk/dawn Pet portrait Candlelight  
s
t
u
v
w
x
Autumn  
colors  
Food  
Silhouette  
High key  
Low key  
z
0
1
2
3
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚Scene Modes  
kPortrait  
pChild  
s
Use for portraits with soft, natural-  
looking skin tones. If the subject is far  
Use for snapshots of children. Clothing  
and background details are vividly  
from the background or a telephoto lens rendered, while skin tones remain soft  
is used, background details will be  
softened to lend the composition a  
sense of depth.  
and natural.  
lLandscape  
mSports  
Use for vivid landscape shots in daylight.  
The built-in flash and AF-assist  
illuminator turn off; use of a tripod is  
recommended to prevent blur when  
lighting is poor.  
Fast shutter speeds freeze motion for  
dynamic sports shots in which the main  
subject stands out clearly. The built-in  
flash and AF-assist illuminator turn off.  
To take a sequence of shots, select  
continuous release mode (0 7, 77, 78).  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
nClose Up  
rNight Landscape  
s
Use for close-up shots of flowers, insects, Reduce noise and unnatural colors when  
and other small objects (a macro lens can photographing night landscapes,  
be used to focus at very close ranges).  
Use of a tripod is recommended to  
prevent blur.  
including street lighting and neon signs.  
The built-in flash and AF-assist  
illuminator turn off; use of a tripod is  
recommended to prevent blur.  
oNight Portrait  
sParty/Indoor  
Use for a natural balance between the  
main subject and the background in  
Capture the effects of indoor  
background lighting. Use for parties and  
portraits taken under low light. Use of a other indoor scenes.  
tripod is recommended to prevent blur  
when lighting is poor.  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
tBeach/Snow  
vDusk/Dawn  
s
Capture the brightness of sunlight  
expanses of water, snow, or sand. The  
built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator  
turn off.  
Preserves the colors seen in the weak  
natural light before dawn or after sunset.  
The built-in flash and AF-assist  
illuminator turn off; use of a tripod is  
recommended to prevent blur when  
lighting is poor.  
uSunset  
wPet Portrait  
Preserves the deep hues seen in sunsets Use for portraits of active pets. The AF-  
and sunrises. The built-in flash and AF-  
assist illuminator turn off; use of a tripod  
is recommended to prevent blur when  
lighting is poor.  
assist illuminator turns off.  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xCandlelight  
zAutumn Colors  
s
For photographs taken by candlelight.  
Captures the brilliant reds and yellows in  
The built-in flash turns off; use of a tripod autumn leaves. The built-in flash turns  
is recommended to prevent blur when  
lighting is poor.  
off; use of a tripod is recommended to  
prevent blur when lighting is poor.  
yBlossom  
0Food  
Use for fields of flowers, orchards in  
bloom, and other landscapes featuring  
Use for vivid photographs of food. Use of  
a tripod is recommended to prevent  
expanses of blossoms. The built-in flash blur; the flash can also be used (0 143).  
turns off; use of a tripod is  
recommended to prevent blur when  
lighting is poor.  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1Silhouette  
3Low Key  
s
Silhouette subjects against bright  
Use when shooting dark scenes to create  
backgrounds. The built-in flash turns off; dark, somber images that bring out  
use of a tripod is recommended to  
prevent blur when lighting is poor.  
highlights. The built-in flash turns off;  
use of a tripod is recommended to  
prevent blur when lighting is poor.  
2High Key  
Use when shooting bright scenes to  
create bright images that seem filled  
with light. The built-in flash turns off.  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Playback  
K button  
1 Press the K button.  
A photograph will be displayed in the  
monitor. The memory card containing the  
picture currently displayed is shown by an  
icon.  
s
2 View additional pictures.  
Additional pictures can be displayed by  
pressing 4 or 2.  
To view additional information on the  
current photograph, press 1 and 3 (0 165).  
1/12  
N
I
KO  
N
D7000  
.
1
125 F5  
6
100  
35mm  
AUTO1 0,  
0
20100D7000 DSC_0001. JPG  
N
OR AL  
15 04 2010 10 : 02 : 27  
/
/
4928×3M264  
To end playback and return to shooting  
mode, press the shutter-release button  
halfway.  
A Image Review  
When On is selected for Image review in the playback menu (0 200), photographs are  
automatically displayed in the monitor for about 4 s after shooting.  
A See Also  
See page 164 for information on choosing a memory card slot.  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Deleting Unwanted Photographs  
To delete the photograph currently displayed in the monitor, press the O button.  
Note that photographs can not be recovered once deleted.  
1 Display the photograph.  
Display the photograph you wish to delete  
as described on the preceding page.  
s
O button  
2 Delete the photograph.  
Press the O button. A confirmation dialog  
will be displayed with an icon at bottom left  
showing the location of the current picture;  
press the O button again to delete the image  
and return to playback (to exit without  
deleting the picture, press K).  
A Delete  
To delete selected images (0 176), all images taken on a selected date (0 177), or all images  
in a chosen location on a selected memory card (0 176), use the Delete option in the  
playback menu.  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
s
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Live View  
x
Framing Photographs in the Monitor  
Follow the steps below to take photographs in live view.  
1 Rotate the live view switch.  
x
The mirror will be raised and the view through the lens will  
be displayed in the camera monitor. The subject will no  
longer be visible in the viewfinder.  
Live view switch  
Note: For illustrative purposes,  
monitor is shown with all  
indicators displayed.  
Item  
Description  
0
6
Shooting mode The mode currently selected with the mode dial.  
q
w
“No movie” icon Indicates that movies can not be recorded.  
57  
Audio recording  
indicator  
Indicates whether sound is being recorded with movies.  
60  
e
r
The amount of time remaining before live view ends  
automatically. Displayed if shooting will end in 30 s or less.  
Time remaining  
54, 59  
AF mode  
The current autofocus mode.  
50  
50  
t
y
AF-area mode The current AF-area mode.  
The current focus point. The display varies with the option  
selected for AF-area mode (0 50).  
Focus point  
51  
58  
u
Time remaining  
(movie mode)  
The recording time remaining in movie mode.  
i
o
Movie quality The frame size and quality of movies recorded in movie mode. 60  
Displayed while the L button is pressed; keep the button  
pressed and press 1 or 3 to adjust brightness (this applies to  
the monitor only; exposure is not affected).  
Monitor  
brightness  
—
!
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Choose a focus mode.  
Focus-mode selector  
To choose an autofocus mode, rotate the focus-  
mode selector to AF, and then press the AF-mode  
button and rotate the main command dial until  
the desired mode is displayed in the monitor.  
Mode  
AF-S  
Description  
AF-mode Main command dial  
button  
Single-servo AF: For stationary subjects. Focus locks  
when shutter-release button is pressed halfway.  
Full time-servo AF: For moving subjects. Camera  
focuses continuously until shutter-release button  
is pressed. Focus locks when shutter-release  
button is pressed halfway.  
x
AF-F  
Monitor  
To use manual focus, rotate the focus-mode selector to M and proceed to Step 6  
after focusing as described on page 55.  
3 Choose an AF-area mode.  
To choose an AF-area mode, press the AF-mode  
button and rotate the sub-command dial until  
the desired mode is displayed in the monitor.  
Mode  
Description  
AF-mode  
button  
Sub-command dial  
Face-priority AF: The camera automatically detects  
and focuses on portrait subjects facing the  
camera. Use for portraits.  
!
Wide-area AF: Use for hand-held shots of  
landscapes and other non-portrait subjects. Use  
the multi selector to select the focus point.  
Normal-area AF: Use for pin-point focus on a  
selected spot in the frame. A tripod is  
recommended.  
$
%
Monitor  
Subject-tracking AF: Track a selected subject as it  
moves through the frame.  
&
A Live View AF and AF-Area Modes  
The AF and AF-area modes for live view can also be  
chosen using Custom Setting a8 (Live view/movie  
AF; 0 211).  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Choose the focus point.  
! (face-priority AF): A double yellow border will be  
displayed when the camera detects a portrait  
subject facing the camera (if multiple faces, up to  
a maximum of 35, are detected, the camera will  
focus on the closest subject; to choose a different  
subject, press the multi selector up, down, left, or  
right).  
Focus  
point  
$/% (wide- and normal-area AF): Use the multi  
selector to move the focus point anywhere in the  
frame, or press J to position the focus point in  
the center of the frame.  
x
Focus point  
Focus point  
& (subject-tracking AF): Position the focus point  
over your subject and press J. The focus point  
will track the selected subject as it moves through  
the frame.  
D Using Autofocus in Live View  
Use an AF-S lens. The desired results may not be achieved with other lenses or  
teleconverters. Note that in live view, autofocus is slower and the monitor may  
brighten or darken while the camera focuses. The focus point may sometimes be  
displayed in green when the camera is unable to focus. The camera may be unable to  
focus in the following situations:  
• The subject contains lines parallel to the long edge of the frame  
• The subject lacks contrast  
• The subject in the focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting brightness, or  
the subject is lit by spot lighting or by a neon sign or other light source that changes  
in brightness  
• Flicker or banding appears under fluorescent, mercury-vapor, sodium-vapor, or  
similar lighting  
• A cross (star) filter or other special filter is used  
• The subject appears smaller than the focus point  
• The subject is dominated by regular geometric patterns (e.g., blinds or a row of  
windows in a skyscraper)  
• The subject is moving  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 Focus.  
Press the shutter-release button halfway to focus.  
! (face-priority AF): The camera sets focus for the face in the  
double yellow border while the shutter-release button is  
pressed halfway; if the camera can no longer detect the  
subject (because, for example, the subject has looked  
away), borders will no longer be displayed.  
$/% (wide- and normal-area AF): The camera focuses on the  
subject in the selected focus point while the shutter-  
release button is pressed halfway.  
x
& (subject-tracking AF): The camera focuses on the current  
subject. To end tracking, press J.  
D Subject Tracking  
The camera may be unable to track subjects if they are small,  
moving quickly, or a similar color to the background, or if both the  
subject and the background are very bright or very dark, the  
brightness and color of the subject or background varies greatly,  
the subject leaves the frame, or the subject visibly changes size.  
The focus point will blink green while the camera focuses. If the camera is able  
to focus, the focus point will be displayed in green; if the camera is unable to  
focus, the focus point will blink red (note that pictures can be taken even when  
the focus point blinks red; check focus in the monitor before shooting).  
Exposure can be locked by pressing the AE-L/AF-L button (0 106). Focus can be  
locked by pressing the shutter-release button halfway.  
6 Take the picture.  
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down  
to shoot. The monitor will turn off.  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 Exit live view mode.  
Rotate the live view switch to exit live view mode.  
Live view switch  
A Live View/Movie Recording Display Options  
Press the R button to cycle through display options as shown below.  
Show movie indicators *  
Hide all indicators *  
x
Show photo indicators  
Virtual horizon *  
Framing grid *  
* A crop showing the area recorded is displayed during movie recording when frame sizes  
other than 640 × 424 are selected for Movie settings > Movie quality in the shooting  
menu (0 60; when movie indicators are displayed, the area outside the crop is greyed  
out).  
A Flicker  
You may notice flicker or banding in the monitor during live view or when shooting movies  
under certain types of lighting, such as fluorescent or mercury-vapor lamps. Flicker and  
banding can be reduced by choosing a Flicker reduction option that matches the  
frequency of the local AC power supply (0 237).  
A Exposure  
Depending on the scene, exposure may differ from that which would be obtained when live  
view is not used. Metering in live view is adjusted to suit the live view display, producing  
photographs with exposure close to what is seen in the monitor. In P, S, A, and M modes,  
exposure can be adjusted by 5 EV (0 107). Note that the effects of values over +3 EV or  
under –3 EV can not be previewed in the monitor.  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A HDMI  
When the camera is attached to an HDMI video device, the  
camera monitor will turn off and the video device will display  
the view through the lens as shown at right. If the device  
supports HDMI-CEC, select Off for the HDMI > Device control  
option in the setup menu (0 194) before shooting in live view.  
D Shooting in Live View Mode  
To prevent light entering via the viewfinder from interfering with exposure, remove the  
rubber eyecup and cover the viewfinder with the supplied DK-5 eyepiece cap before  
shooting (0 81).  
x
Although they will not appear in the final picture, flicker, banding, or distortion may be  
visible in the monitor under fluorescent, mercury vapor, or sodium lamps or if the camera is  
panned horizontally or an object moves at high speed through frame. Bright light sources  
may leave after-images in the monitor when the camera is panned. When shooting in live  
view mode, avoid pointing the camera at the sun or other strong light sources. Failure to  
observe this precaution could result in damage to the camera’s internal circuitry.  
Live view ends automatically if the lens is removed.  
Live view may end automatically to prevent damage to the camera’s internal circuits; exit live  
view when the camera is not use. Note that the temperature of the camera’s internal circuits  
may rise and noise (bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels, or fog) may be displayed in  
the following instances (the camera may also become noticeably warm, but this does not  
indicate a malfunction):  
• The ambient temperature is high  
• The camera has been used for extended periods in live view or to record movies  
• The camera has been used in continuous release mode for extended periods  
If a warning is displayed when you attempt to start live view, wait for the internal circuits to  
cool and then try again.  
D The Count Down Display  
A count down will be displayed 30 s before live view ends automatically (0 49; the timer  
turns red 5 s before the expiry of the time selected Monitor off delay > Live view—  
0 215—or if live view is about to end to protect the internal circuits). Depending on  
shooting conditions, the timer may appear immediately when live view is selected. Note that  
although the count down does not appear during playback, live view will still end  
automatically when the timer expires.  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A Manual Focus  
To focus in manual focus mode (0 99), rotate the  
lens focus ring until the subject is in focus.  
To magnify the view in the monitor up to about 6.7 ×  
for precise focus, press the X button. While the view  
through the lens is zoomed in, a navigation window  
will appear in a gray frame at the bottom right corner  
of the display. Use the multi selector to scroll to  
areas of the frame not visible in the monitor  
x
(available only if wide- or normal-area AF is selected  
for AF-area mode), or press W to zoom out.  
X button  
Navigation window  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
x
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording and Viewing Movies  
y
Recording Movies  
Movies can be recorded in live view mode. If desired, choose a Picture Control  
(0 131) and color space (0 141) before recording.  
1 Rotate the live view switch.  
The mirror is raised and the view through the lens is  
displayed in the monitor instead of the viewfinder.  
y
D The 0 Icon  
A 0 icon (0 49) indicates that movies can not be recorded.  
Live view switch  
A Before Recording  
Set aperture before recording in mode A or M. Note that movies  
may be over- or under-exposed at some aperture settings.  
Before shooting, check the brightness of the scene in the  
monitor; if the picture is too bright or too dark, end live view  
and adjust aperture as necessary.  
2 Choose a focus mode.  
Choose a focus mode as described in Step 2 of “Live View“ (0 50).  
A Using an External Microphone  
The built-in microphone may record lens noise during autofocus or vibration  
reduction. This can be prevented by using a commercially-available external  
microphone with a stereo mini-pin jack (3.5 mm diameter). External microphones can  
also be used to record in stereo.  
3 Choose an AF-area mode.  
See Step 3 on page 50 for more information.  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Focus.  
Frame the opening shot and focus as described in Steps 4  
and 5 of “Live View” (0 51–52). Note that the number of  
subjects that can be detected in face-priority AF drops  
during movie recording.  
5 Start recording.  
Press the movie-record button to start recording (the  
camera can record both video and sound; do not cover the  
microphone on the front of the camera during recording).  
A recording indicator and the time available are displayed  
in the monitor. Exposure can be locked by pressing the  
AE-L/AF-L button (0 106) or (in modes P, S, A, and M) altered  
by up to 3 EV in steps of 1/3 EV using exposure  
compensation (0 107; note that depending on the  
brightness of the subject, changes to exposure may have  
no visible effect), and that exposure compensation is not  
available when On is selected for Manual movie settings  
in mode M as described on page 60. In autofocus mode,  
focus can be locked by pressing the shutter-release button  
halfway.  
y
Movie-record button  
Recording indicator  
Time remaining  
A See Also  
The behavior of the AE-L/AF-L button can be adjusted using  
Custom Setting f5 (Assign AE-L/AF-L button; 0 232).  
6 End recording.  
Press the movie-record button again to end recording (to  
end recording, return to live view, and take a photograph,  
press the shutter-release button all the way down).  
Recording will end automatically when the maximum  
length is reached, or the memory card is full.  
A Maximum Length  
Each movie file can be up to 4 GB in size and 20 minutes long; note that depending on  
memory card write speed, shooting may end before this length is reached (0 319).  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D Recording Movies  
Flicker, banding, or distortion may be visible in the monitor and in the final movie under  
fluorescent, mercury vapor, or sodium lamps or if the camera is panned horizontally or an  
object moves at high speed through frame (flicker and banding can be reduced by choosing  
a Flicker reduction option that matches the frequency of the local AC power supply;  
0 237). Bright light sources may leave after-images when the camera is panned. Jagged  
edges, false colors, and moiré may also appear. When recording movies, avoid pointing the  
camera at the sun or other strong light sources. Failure to observe this precaution could  
result in damage to the camera’s internal circuitry.  
Recording ends automatically if the lens is removed or when the mode dial is rotated.  
Live view may end automatically to prevent damage to the camera’s internal circuits; exit live  
view when the camera is not use. Note that the temperature of the camera’s internal circuits  
may rise and noise (bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels, or fog) may be displayed in  
the following instances (the camera may also become noticeably warm, but this does not  
indicate a malfunction):  
y
• The ambient temperature is high  
• The camera has been used for extended periods in live view or to record movies  
• The camera has been used in continuous release mode for extended periods  
If a warning is displayed when you attempt to start live view or movie recording, wait for the  
internal circuits to cool and then try again.  
Shutter speed and ISO sensitivity are adjusted automatically unless On is selected for  
Manual movie settings (0 60) and the camera is in mode M.  
D The Count-Down Display  
A count down will be displayed 30 s before movie recording ends automatically (0 49).  
Depending on shooting conditions, the timer may appear immediately when movie  
recording begins. Note that regardless of the amount of recording time available, live view  
will still end automatically when the timer expires. Wait for the internal circuits to cool before  
resuming movie recording.  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚Movie Settings  
Use the Movie settings option in the shooting menu to choose movie quality,  
sound, destination, and manual movie settings options.  
• Movie quality: Choose from frame sizes of q 1920 × 1080, a 1280 × 720, and  
b 640 × 424 and from ★ high and normal quality. The frame rate depends on the  
option currently selected for Video mode in the setup menu (0 237):  
NTSC  
PAL  
Frame size (pixels)  
1920 × 1080  
Frame rate  
24 fps *  
Maximum length  
Frame rate  
24 fps *  
Maximum length  
Choose from 24 *  
and 30 fps †  
30 fps †  
Choose from 24 *  
and 25 fps  
25 fps  
1280 × 720  
20 min.  
20 min.  
640 × 424  
* Listed value. Actual rate is 23.976 fps.  
† Listed value. Actual rate is 29.97 fps.  
y
• Microphone: Turn the built-in or external microphone on or off or to adjust  
microphone sensitivity. Selecting Microphone off turns sound recording off;  
selecting any other option turns recording on and sets the microphone to the  
selected sensitivity.  
• Destination: To record movies to the memory  
card in Slot 1, select Slot 1. Select Slot 2 to  
record movies to the card in Slot 2. The menu  
shows the time available on each card;  
recording ends automatically when no time  
remains.  
• Manual movie settings: Choose On to allow manual adjustments to shutter  
speed and ISO sensitivity when the camera is in mode M. Shutter speed can be  
chosen from values between 1/8,000 s and 1/30 s, ISO sensitivity from values between  
ISO 100 and Hi 2 (0 101). Note that ISO sensitivity is fixed at the value selected; the  
camera does not adjust ISO sensitivity automatically when On is selected for ISO  
sensitivity settings > Auto ISO sensitivity control in the shooting menu  
(0 103). Exposure compensation is not available.  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 Select Movie settings.  
G button  
Press the G button to display the menus.  
Highlight Movie settings in the shooting  
menu and press 2.  
2 Choose movie options.  
Highlight the desired item and press 2, then  
highlight an option and press J.  
y
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Viewing Movies  
Movies are indicated by a 1 icon in full-frame playback (0 163). Press J to start  
playback.  
1 icon  
Length  
Current position/total length  
Volume  
Guide  
The following operations can be performed:  
y
To  
Use  
Description  
Pause  
Pause playback.  
Resume playback when movie is paused or during rewind/  
advance.  
Play  
J
Speed doubles with each press, from 2×  
to 4× to 8× to 16×; keep pressed to skip  
to beginning or end of movie. If playback is paused, movie  
rewinds or advances one frame at a time; keep pressed for  
continuous rewind or advance.  
Advance/  
rewind  
Adjust volume  
Edit movie  
/W  
X
L
Press to increase volume, W to decrease.  
To edit movie, press L while movie is paused (0 63).  
X
Return to full-  
frame playback  
/K Press 1 or K to exit to full-frame playback.  
Exittoshooting  
mode  
Press shutter-release button halfway. Monitor will turn off;  
photographs can be taken immediately.  
Display menus  
G
See page 195 for more information.  
A The 2 Icon  
2 is displayed in full-frame and movie playback if the movie was  
recorded without sound.  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing Movies  
Trim footage to create edited copies of movies or save selected frames as JPEG stills.  
Option  
Description  
Choose start point Create a copy from which the opening footage has been removed.  
Choose end point Create a copy from which the ending footage has been removed.  
Save selected frame Save a selected frame as a JPEG still.  
Trimming Movies  
To create trimmed copies of movies:  
1 Display a movie full frame.  
K button  
y
Press the K button to display pictures full  
frame in the monitor and press 4 and 2 to  
scroll through pictures until the movie you  
wish to edit is displayed.  
2 Choose a starting or end point.  
Play the movie back as described on page  
62, pressing J to start and resume playback  
and 3 to pause. If you intend to trim the  
opening footage from the copy, pause on  
the first frame you wish to keep; if you will be  
editing out the ending footage pause on the  
last frame you wish to keep.  
A Starting and Ending Frames  
The first frame is shown by a h, the final frame by  
a i icon.  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Display the retouch menu.  
Press L to display the retouch menu.  
L button  
4 Choose an option.  
To create a copy that includes the current  
frame and all following frames, highlight  
Choose start point in the edit movie menu  
and press J. Select Choose end point to  
create a copy that includes the current frame  
and all preceding frames.  
y
5 Delete frames.  
Press 1 to delete all frames before (Choose  
start point) or after (Choose end point) the  
current frame.  
6 Save the copy.  
Highlight Yes and press J to save the edited  
copy. If necessary, the copy can be trimmed  
as described above to remove additional  
footage. Edited copies are indicated by a 9  
icon in full-frame playback.  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D Trimming Movies  
Movies must be at least two seconds long. If a copy can not be created at the current  
playback position, the current position will be displayed in red in Step 5 and no copy will be  
created. The copy will not be saved if there is insufficient space available on the memory  
card.  
To prevent the camera from turning off unexpectedly, use a fully-charged battery when  
editing movies.  
A The Retouch Menu  
Movies can also be edited using the Edit movie option  
in the retouch menu (0 248).  
y
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Saving Selected Frames  
To save a copy of a selected frame as a JPEG still:  
1 View the movie and choose a frame.  
Play the movie back as described on page  
62. Pause the movie at the frame you intend  
to copy.  
2 Display the retouch menu.  
Press L to display the retouch menu.  
y
L button  
3 Choose Save selected frame.  
Highlight Save selected frame and press J.  
4 Create a still copy.  
Press 1 to create a still copy of the current  
frame.  
5 Save the copy.  
Highlight Yes and press J to create a JPEG  
copy of the selected frame. Movie stills are  
indicated by a 9 icon in full-frame playback.  
A Save Selected Frame  
JPEG movie stills created with the Save selected frame option can not be retouched. JPEG  
movie stills lack some categories of photo information (0 165).  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
P, S, A, and M Modes  
#
P, S, A, and M modes offer different degrees of control over shutter  
speed and aperture:  
Mode  
Description  
Programmed auto (0 68): Camera sets shutter speed and aperture for  
optimal exposure. Recommended for snapshots and in other  
situations in which there is little time to adjust camera settings.  
Shutter-priority auto (0 69): User chooses shutter speed; camera selects  
aperture for best results. Use to freeze or blur motion.  
Aperture-priority auto (0 70): User chooses aperture; camera selects  
shutter speed for best results. Use to blur background or bring both  
foreground and background into focus.  
P
S
A
#
Manual (0 71): User controls both shutter speed and aperture. Set  
shutter speed to “bulb” or “time” for long time-exposures.  
M
A Lens Types  
When using a CPU lens equipped with an aperture ring (0 269), lock the aperture ring at the  
minimum aperture (highest f-number). Type G lenses are not equipped with an aperture  
ring.  
Non-CPU lenses can only be used in modes A (aperture-priority auto) and M (manual), when  
aperture can only be adjusted using the lens aperture ring. Selecting any other mode  
disables the shutter release.  
A Shutter Speed and Aperture  
The same exposure can be achieved with different combinations of shutter speed and  
aperture. Fast shutter speeds and large apertures freeze moving objects and soften  
background details, while slow shutter speeds and small apertures blur moving objects and  
bring out background details.  
Shutter speed  
Aperture  
Fast shutter speed  
Slow shutter speed  
(1 s)  
Large aperture (f/3)  
(Remember, the higher the f-number, the  
smaller the aperture.)  
Small aperture (f/36)  
(1/1,600 s)  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mode P (Programmed Auto)  
In this mode, the camera automatically adjusts shutter speed and aperture for  
optimal exposure in most situations. This mode is recommended for snapshots and  
other situations in which you want to leave the camera in charge of shutter speed  
and aperture. To take photographs in programmed auto:  
Mode dial  
1 Rotate the mode dial to P.  
2 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.  
#
A Flexible Program  
In mode P, different combinations of shutter speed  
and aperture can be selected by rotating the main  
command dial while the exposure meters are on  
(“flexible program”). Rotate the dial to the right for  
large apertures (low f-numbers) that blur background  
details or fast shutter speeds that “freeze” motion.  
Rotate the dial to the left for small apertures (high  
Main command dial  
f-numbers) that increase depth of field or slow shutter speeds that blur motion. All  
combinations produce the same exposure. While flexible program is in effect, a U indicator  
appears in the control panel. To restore default shutter speed and aperture settings, rotate  
the main command dial until the indicator is no longer displayed, choose another mode, or  
turn the camera off.  
A See Also  
See page 298 for information on the built-in exposure program. For information on  
activating the exposure meters, see “Auto-Meter Off” on page 39.  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mode S (Shutter-Priority Auto)  
In shutter-priority auto, you choose the shutter speed while the camera  
automatically selects the aperture that will produce the optimal exposure. Use slow  
shutter speeds to suggest motion by blurring moving subjects, fast shutter speeds to  
“freeze” motion.  
Fast shutter speed (1/1,600 s)  
Slow shutter speed (1/6 s)  
Mode dial  
To take photographs in shutter-priority auto:  
#
1 Rotate the mode dial to S.  
2 Choose a shutter speed.  
While the exposure meters are on, rotate the  
main command dial to choose the desired  
shutter speed from “p” or values  
between 30 s and 1/8,000 s.  
Main command dial  
3 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.  
A See Also  
See page 306 for information on what to do if flashing “A” or “%” indicator appears in  
the shutter-speed displays.  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mode A (Aperture-Priority Auto)  
In aperture-priority auto, you choose the aperture while the camera automatically  
selects the shutter speed that will produce the optimal exposure. Large apertures  
(low f-numbers) reduce depth of field, blurring objects behind and in front of the  
main subject. Small apertures (high f-numbers) increase depth of field, bringing out  
details in the background and foreground. Short field depths are generally used in  
portraits to blur background details, long field depths in landscape photographs to  
bring the foreground and background into focus.  
Large aperture (f/2.8)  
Small aperture (f/36)  
Mode dial  
#
To take photographs in aperture-priority auto:  
1 Rotate the mode dial to A.  
2 Choose an aperture.  
While the exposure meters are on, rotate the  
sub-command dial to choose the desired  
aperture from values between the minimum  
and maximum for the lens.  
Sub-command dial  
3 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.  
A Non-CPU Lenses (0 270)  
Use the lens aperture ring to adjust aperture. If the maximum  
aperture of the lens has been specified using the Non-CPU lens  
data item in setup menu (0 159) when a non-CPU lens is attached,  
the current f-number will be displayed in the viewfinder and  
control panel, rounded to the nearest full stop. Otherwise the  
aperture displays will show only the number of stops (F, with  
maximum aperture displayed as FA) and the f-number must be  
read from the lens aperture ring.  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mode M (Manual)  
In mode M, you control both shutter speed and aperture. To take photographs in  
mode M:  
Mode dial  
1 Rotate the mode dial to M.  
2 Choose aperture and shutter speed.  
While the exposure meters are on, rotate the main command dial to choose a  
shutter speed, and the sub-command dial to set aperture. Shutter speed can be  
set to “p” or to values between 30 s and 1/8,000 s, or the shutter can be held  
open indefinitely for a long time-exposure (A, 0 73). Aperture can be set  
to values between the minimum and maximum for the lens. Use the exposure  
indicators to check exposure.  
#
Shutter speed  
Aperture  
Main command dial  
Sub-command dial  
3 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A Depth-of-Field Preview  
To preview the effects of aperture, press and hold the  
depth-of-field preview button. The lens will be  
stopped down to the aperture value selected by the  
camera (modes P and S) or the value chosen by the user  
(modes A and M), allowing depth of field to be  
previewed in the viewfinder.  
Depth-of-field preview button  
A Custom Setting e4—Modeling Flash  
This setting controls whether the built-in flash and optional flash units that support the  
Creative Lighting System (CLS; see page 276) will emit a modeling flash when the depth-of-  
field preview button is pressed. See page 228 for more information.  
A AF Micro NIKKOR Lenses  
Provided that an external exposure meter is used, the exposure ratio need only be taken into  
account when the lens aperture ring is used to set aperture.  
#
A The Exposure Indicator  
If a shutter speed other than “bulb” or “time” is selected, the exposure indicator in the  
viewfinder shows whether the photograph would be under- or over-exposed at current  
settings (if Lo or Hi is displayed, the indicators show the amount of under- or over-exposure).  
Depending on the option chosen for Custom Setting b2 (EV steps for exposure cntrl.,  
0 211), the amount of under- or over-exposure is shown in increments of 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV (the  
illustrations below show the display in the viewfinder when 1/3 step is selected for Custom  
Setting b2). If the limits of the exposure metering system are exceeded, the displays will  
flash.  
Underexposed by 1/3 EV  
Optimal exposure  
Overexposed by over 2 EV  
A Reverse Indicators  
If  
(V) is selected for Custom Setting f9 (Reverse indicators, 0 234), the  
exposure indicators in the viewfinder and information display are displayed with positive  
values on the left and negative values on the right. Select  
negative values on the left and positive values on the right.  
(W) to display  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚Long Time-Exposures (M Mode Only)  
Select the following shutter speeds for long time-  
exposures of moving lights, the stars, night  
scenery, or fireworks.  
35 s exposure  
at aperture  
f/25  
•
Bulb (A): The shutter remains open while  
the shutter-release button is held down. To  
prevent blur, use a tripod or an optional MC-DC2 remote cord (0 281).  
Time (%): Requires an optional ML-L3 remote control (0 281). Start the exposure  
by pressing the ML-L3 shutter-release button. The shutter remains open for thirty  
minutes or until the button is pressed a second time.  
•
1 Ready the camera.  
Mount the camera on a tripod or place it on a stable, level surface. To avoid loss  
of power during the exposure, use a fully charged EN-EL15 battery or an  
optional EH-5a AC adapter and EP-5B power connector. Note that noise  
(randomly-spaced bright pixels or fog) may occur in long exposures; before  
shooting, choose On for Long exp. NR in the shooting menu (0 205).  
#
Mode dial  
2 Rotate the mode dial to M.  
3 Choose a shutter speed.  
While the exposure meters are on, rotate the  
main command dial to choose a shutter  
speed of A. For a shutter speed of  
“time” (%), select remote mode (0 80) after  
choosing the shutter speed.  
Main command dial  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Open the shutter.  
Bulb: After focusing, press the shutter-release button on the camera or optional  
MC-DC2 remote cord all the way down. Keep the shutter-release button  
pressed until the exposure is complete.  
Time: Press the ML-L3 shutter-release button all the way down to start shooting.  
5 Close the shutter.  
Bulb: Take your finger off the shutter-release button.  
Time: Press the ML-L3 shutter-release button all the way down. Shooting ends  
automatically after thirty minutes.  
#
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User Settings: U1 and U2 Modes  
$
Assign frequently-used settings to the U1 and U2 positions on the mode dial.  
Saving User Settings  
1 Select a mode.  
Mode dial  
Rotate the mode dial to the desired mode.  
$
2 Adjust settings.  
Make the desired adjustments to flexible program (mode P), shutter speed  
(modes S and M), aperture (modes A and M), exposure and flash compensation,  
flash mode, focus point, metering, AF and AF-area modes (viewfinder  
photography only), bracketing, and settings in the shooting (0 202) and  
Custom Settings (0 206) menus (note that the camera will not store the  
options selected for Storage folder, File naming, Manage Picture Control,  
Multiple exposure, or Interval timer shooting).  
3 Select Save user settings.  
G button  
Press the G button to display the menus.  
Highlight Save user settings in the setup  
menu and press 2.  
4 Select U1 or U2.  
Highlight U1 or U2 and press 2.  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 Save user settings.  
Highlight Save settings and press J to  
assign the settings selected in Steps 1 and 2  
to the mode dial position selected in Step 4.  
Recalling User Settings  
Simply rotate the mode dial to U1 to recall the  
settings assigned to U1, or to U2 to recall the  
settings assigned to U2.  
Mode dial  
Resetting User Settings  
To reset settings for U1 or U2 to default values:  
$
1 Select Reset user settings.  
Press the G button to display the menus.  
Highlight Reset user settings in the setup  
menu and press 2.  
G button  
2 Select U1 or U2.  
Highlight U1 or U2 and press 2.  
3 Reset user settings.  
Highlight Reset and press J.  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Release Mode  
k
Choosing a Release Mode  
To choose a release mode, press the release mode dial  
lock release and turn the release mode dial to the  
desired setting.  
Release mode dial  
Mode  
Description  
Single frame: Camera takes one photograph each time shutter-release button is pressed.  
S
Continuous low speed: While shutter-release button is held down, camera records 1–5  
frames per second. 1 Frame rate can be chosen using Custom Setting d6 (CL mode  
shooting speed, 0 217).  
CL  
k
Continuous high speed: While shutter-release button is held down, camera records up to 6  
frames per second. 2  
CH  
Quiet shutter-release: As for single frame, except that mirror does not click back into place  
while shutter-release button is fully pressed, allowing user to control timing of click  
made by mirror, which is also quieter than in single frame mode. In addition, beep  
does not sound regardless of setting selected for Custom Setting d1 (Beep; 0 215).  
Self-timer: Use self-timer for self-portraits or to reduce blurring caused by camera shake  
(0 80).  
J
E
Remote control: Shutter is controlled using shutter-release button on optional ML-L3  
remote control (0 80).  
4
Mirror up: Choose this mode to minimize camera shake in telephoto or close-up  
photography or in other situations in which the slightest camera movement can result  
in blurred photographs (0 83).  
MUP  
1 Average frame rate with an EN-EL15 battery, continuous-servo AF, manual or shutter-priority  
auto exposure, a shutter speed of 1/250 s or faster, remaining settings other than Custom  
Setting d6 at default values, and memory remaining in memory buffer.  
2 Average frame rate with an EN-EL15 battery, continuous-servo AF, manual or shutter-priority  
auto exposure, a shutter speed of 1/250 s or faster, other settings at default values, and  
memory remaining in memory buffer.  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Continuous Mode (CH/CL)  
To take pictures in CH (continuous high speed) and CL (continuous low speed) modes:  
1 Select CH or CL mode.  
Press the release mode dial lock release and turn  
the release mode dial to CH or CL.  
Release mode dial  
2 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.  
While the shutter-release button is pressed all  
the way down, pictures will be taken at about  
6 fps in continuous high speed mode, or at the  
frame rate selected for Custom Setting d6 (CL mode shooting speed, 0 217) in  
continuous low speed mode. Frame rates may slow when the battery is low or  
vibration reduction or auto ISO sensitivity control (0 103) is on.  
k
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A The Memory Buffer  
The camera is equipped with a memory buffer for temporary storage, allowing shooting to  
continue while photographs are being saved to the memory card. Up to 100 photographs  
can be taken in succession; note, however, that frame rate will drop when the buffer is full.  
While photographs are being recorded to the memory card, the access lamp next to the  
memory card slot will light. Depending on shooting conditions and memory card  
performance, recording may take from a few seconds to a few minutes. Do not remove the  
memory card or remove or disconnect the power source until the access lamp has gone out. If  
the camera is switched off while data remain in the buffer, the power will not turn off until all  
images in the buffer have been recorded. If the battery is exhausted while images remain in  
the buffer, the shutter release will be disabled and the images transferred to the memory  
card.  
A Buffer Size  
The approximate number of images that can be stored in the  
memory buffer at current settings is shown in the exposure-  
count displays in the viewfinder and control panel while the  
shutter-release button is pressed. The illustration at right  
shows the display when space remains in the buffer for about  
28 pictures.  
k
A See Also  
For information on choosing the maximum number of photographs that can be taken in a  
single burst, see Custom Setting d7 (Max. continuous release, 0 217). For information on  
the number of pictures that can be taken in a single burst, see page 320.  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Self-Timer and Remote Modes  
The self-timer and optional ML-L3 remote control (0 281) can be used to reduce  
camera shake or for self-portraits.  
1 Mount the camera on a tripod.  
Mount the camera on a tripod or place the camera on a stable, level surface.  
2 Select a release mode.  
Press the release mode dial lock release and  
rotate the release-mode dial to E (self-timer)  
or 4 (remote) mode.  
Release mode dial  
In remote mode, the timing of the shutter  
release can be selected using the Remote  
control mode option in the shooting menu.  
After pressing the G button to display the  
menus, highlight Remote control mode in  
the shooting menu and press 2 to display  
the following options. Press the selector up  
or down to highlight an option and press J.  
G button  
k
Option  
Description  
Shutter is released 2 s after ML-L3 shutter-release button is  
pressed.  
% Delayed remote  
Quick-response Shutter is released when ML-L3 shutter-release button is  
$
remote  
pressed.  
Press ML-L3 shutter-release button once to raise mirror, again to  
release shutter and take photograph. Prevents blur caused by  
camera moving when mirror is raised.  
Remote  
mirror-up  
&
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Frame the photograph.  
A Cover the Viewfinder  
When taking photos without your eye to  
the viewfinder, remove the DK-21 rubber  
eyecup (q) and insert the supplied DK-5  
eyepiece cap as shown (w). This  
prevents light entering via the  
DK-21 rubber eyecup  
DK-5 eyepiece cap  
viewfinder interfering with exposure.  
Hold the camera firmly when removing  
the rubber eyecup.  
4 Take the photograph.  
Self-timer mode: Press the shutter-release  
button halfway to focus, and then press the  
button the rest of the way down to start the  
self-timer (note that the timer will not start if the camera is unable to focus or in  
other situations in which the shutter can not be released). The self-timer lamp  
will start to blink. Two seconds before the photograph is taken, the self-timer  
lamp will stop blinking. The shutter will be released ten seconds after the timer  
starts.  
k
Remote control mode: From a distance of 5 m  
(16 ft.) or less, aim the transmitter on the  
ML-L3 at either of the infrared receivers on  
the camera (0 3, 5) and press the ML-L3  
shutter-release button. In delayed remote  
mode, the self-timer lamp will light for about  
two seconds before the shutter is released. In quick-response remote mode, the  
self-timer lamp will flash after the shutter has been released. In remote mirror-  
up mode, pressing the ML-L3 shutter-release button once raises the mirror; the  
shutter will be released and the self-timer lamp will flash after 30 s or when the  
button is pressed a second time.  
To cancel shooting, select another release mode.  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D Before Using the Remote Control  
Before using the remote control for the first time, remove the clear plastic battery-insulator  
sheet.  
D Using the Built-in Flash  
Before taking a photograph with the flash in P, S, A, M, or 0 modes, press the M button to raise  
the flash and wait for the M indicator to be displayed in the viewfinder (0 143). Shooting will  
be interrupted if the flash is raised while remote control mode is in effect or after the self-  
timer has started. If the flash is required, the camera will only respond to the ML-L3 shutter-  
release button once the flash has charged. In auto or scene modes in which the flash pops  
up automatically, the flash will begin charging when remote mode is selected; once the flash  
is charged, it will automatically pop up and fire when required. Note that only one  
photograph will be taken when the flash fires, regardless of the number of exposures  
selected for Custom Setting c3 (Self-timer; 0 214).  
In flash modes that support red-eye reduction, the red-eye reduction lamp will light for  
about one second before the shutter is released. In delayed remote mode, the self-timer  
lamp will light for two seconds, followed by the red-eye reduction lamp which light for one  
second before the shutter is released.  
A Focusing in Remote Control Mode  
The camera will not adjust focus in remote mirror-up mode or when continuous-servo  
autofocus is selected; note however that if any autofocus mode is selected, you can focus by  
pressing the camera shutter-release button halfway before shooting (pressing the button all  
the way down will not release the shutter). If auto- or single-servo autofocus is selected or  
the camera is in live view in delayed or quick-response remote mode, the camera will  
automatically adjust focus before shooting; if the camera is unable to focus in viewfinder  
photography, it will return to stand-by without releasing the shutter.  
k
A Remote Mirror-up Mode  
Metering is not performed in remote mirror-up mode. Photos can not be framed in the  
viewfinder while the mirror is raised.  
A A  
In self-timer mode, a shutter speed of A is equivalent to approximately ¼ s.  
A See Also  
For information on choosing the duration of the self-timer, the number of shots taken, and  
the interval between shots, see Custom Setting c3 (Self-timer; 0 214). For information on  
choosing the length of time the camera will remain in stand-by mode waiting for a signal  
from the remote control, see Custom Setting c5 (Remote on duration; 0 215). For  
information on controlling the beeps that sound when the self-timer and remote control are  
used, see Custom Setting d1 (Beep; 0 215).  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mirror up Mode  
Choose this mode to minimize blurring caused by camera movement when the  
mirror is raised. Use of a tripod is recommended.  
1 Select mirror up mode.  
Press the release mode dial lock release and  
rotate the release mode dial to MUP.  
Release mode dial  
2 Raise the mirror.  
Frame the picture, focus, and then press the  
shutter-release button the rest of the way down  
to raise the mirror.  
D Mirror Up  
While the mirror is raised, photos can not be framed in the viewfinder and autofocus  
and metering will not be performed.  
k
3 Take a picture.  
Press the shutter-release button all the way  
down again to take a picture. To prevent  
blurring caused by camera movement, press the  
shutter-release button smoothly, or use an optional remote cord (0 281). The  
mirror lowers when shooting ends.  
A Mirror up Mode  
A picture will be taken automatically if no operations are performed for about 30 s after the  
mirror is raised.  
A See Also  
For information on using the optional ML-L3 remote control for mirror-up photography, see  
page 80.  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
k
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Image Recording Options  
d
Image Quality and Size  
Together, image quality and size determine how much space each photograph  
occupies on the memory card. Larger, higher quality images can be printed at larger  
sizes but also require more memory, meaning that fewer such images can be stored  
on the memory card (0 320).  
Image Quality  
Choose a file format and compression ratio (image quality).  
Option  
File type  
Description  
Raw data from the image sensor are saved directly to the memory card.  
NEF (RAW)  
NEF Settings such as white balance and contrast can be adjusted on a  
computer after shooting.  
Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1:4 (fine  
quality). *  
Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1:8 (normal  
quality). *  
Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1:16 (basic  
quality). *  
JPEG fine  
d
JPEG normal JPEG  
JPEG basic  
NEF (RAW)+  
JPEG fine  
Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW) image and one fine-quality  
JPEG image.  
NEF (RAW)+ NEF/ Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW) image and one normal-  
JPEG normal JPEG quality JPEG image.  
NEF (RAW)+  
JPEG basic  
Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW) image and one basic-quality  
JPEG image.  
* Size priority selected for JPEG compression.  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Image quality is set by pressing the QUAL button and  
rotating the main command dial until the desired  
setting is displayed in the control panel.  
A The Shooting Menu  
Image quality can also be  
adjusted using the Image  
quality option in the shooting  
menu (0 202).  
QUAL button Main command dial  
Control panel  
d
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The following options can be accessed from the shooting menu. Press the G  
button to display the menus, highlight the desired option and press 2.  
❚❚JPEG Compression  
Choose the type of compression for JPEG images.  
Option  
Description  
Size priority  
Images are compressed to produce relatively uniform file size.  
O
P
Optimal quality Optimal image quality. File size varies with scene recorded.  
❚❚NEF (RAW) Recording > Type  
Choose the type of compression for NEF (RAW) images.  
Option  
Description  
Lossless  
compressed  
NEF images are compressed using a reversible algorithm, reducing  
file size by about 20–40% with no effect on image quality.  
NEF images are compressed using a non-reversible algorithm,  
reducing file size by about 40–55% with almost no effect on image  
quality.  
N
O Compressed  
❚❚NEF (RAW) Recording > NEF (RAW) Bit Depth  
Choose a bit depth for NEF (RAW) images.  
d
Option  
Description  
q 12-bit  
NEF (RAW) images are recorded at a bit-depth of 12 bits.  
NEF (RAW) images are recorded at a bit-depth of 14 bits, producing  
larger files but increasing the color data recorded.  
r 14-bit  
A NEF (RAW) Images  
NEF (RAW) images can be viewed on the camera or using software such as Capture NX 2  
(available separately; 0 281) or ViewNX 2 (available on the supplied ViewNX 2 CD). JPEG  
copies of NEF (RAW) images can be created using the NEF (RAW) processing option in the  
retouch menu (0 258). Note that the option selected for image size does not affect the size  
of NEF (RAW) images.  
A NEF+JPEG  
When photographs taken at settings of NEF (RAW) + JPEG are viewed on the camera with  
only one memory card inserted, only the JPEG image will be displayed. If both copies are  
recorded to the same memory card, both copies will be erased when the photo is deleted. If  
the JPEG copy is recorded to a separate memory card using the Role played by card in  
Slot 2 > RAW Slot 1—JPEG Slot 2 option, deleting the JPEG copy will not delete the NEF  
(RAW) image.  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Image Size  
Image size is measured in pixels. Choose from the following options:  
Image size  
Size (pixels)  
Print size (cm/in.) *  
41.7 × 27.6/16.4 × 10.9  
31.3 × 20.7/12.3 × 8.2  
20.9 × 13.8/8.2 × 5.4  
Large  
4,928 × 3,264  
3,696× 2,448  
2,464 × 1,632  
#
$
%
Medium  
Small  
* Approximate size when printed at 300 dpi. Print size in inches equals image size in pixels  
divided by printer resolution in dots per inch (dpi; 1 inch=approximately 2.54 cm).  
Image size is set by pressing the QUAL button and  
rotating the sub-command dial until the desired  
setting is displayed in the control panel.  
A The Shooting Menu  
Image size can also be adjusted  
using the Image size option in  
QUAL button Sub-command dial  
the shooting menu (0 202).  
Control panel  
d
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Two Memory Cards  
When two memory cards are inserted in the camera, you can use the Role played by  
card in Slot 2 item in the shooting menu to choose the role played by the card in Slot  
2. Choose from Overflow (the card in Slot 2 is used only when the card in Slot 1 is  
full), Backup (each picture is recorded twice, once to the card in Slot 1 and again to  
the card in Slot 2), and RAW Slot 1—JPEG Slot 2 (as for Backup, except that the NEF/  
RAW copies of photos recorded at settings of NEF/RAW + JPEG are recorded only to  
the card in Slot 1 and the JPEG copies only to the card in Slot 2).  
A “Backup” and “RAW Slot 1—JPEG Slot 2”  
The camera shows the number of exposures remaining on the card with the least amount of  
memory. Shutter release will be disabled when either card is full.  
A Recording Movies  
When two memory cards are inserted in the camera, the slot used to record movies can be  
selected using the Movie settings > Destination option in the shooting menu (0 60).  
d
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
d
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Focus  
N
This section describes the focus options available when photographs are framed in  
the viewfinder. Focus can be adjusted automatically (see below) or manually (0 99).  
The user can also select the focus point for automatic or manual focus (0 96) or use  
focus lock to focus to recompose photographs after focusing (0 97).  
Autofocus  
To use autofocus, rotate the focus-mode  
selector to AF.  
Focus-mode  
selector  
Autofocus Mode  
Choose from the following autofocus modes:  
Mode  
AF-A  
Description  
Auto-servo AF: Camera automatically selects single-servo autofocus if subject is stationary,  
continuous-servo autofocus if subject is moving.  
N
Single-servo AF: For stationary subjects. Focus locks when shutter-release button is pressed  
AF-S halfway. At default settings, shutter can only be released when in-focus indicator is  
displayed (focus priority; 0 208).  
Continuous-servo AF: For moving subjects. Camera focuses continuously while shutter-  
release button is pressed halfway; if subject moves, camera will engage predictive focus  
AF-C tracking (0 93) to predict final distance to subject and adjust focus as necessary. At  
default settings, shutter can be released whether or not subject is in focus (release  
priority; 0 208).  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To select the autofocus mode, press the  
AF-mode button and rotate the main  
command dial until the desired setting is  
displayed in the viewfinder or control  
panel.  
AF-mode button  
Control panel  
Main command dial  
Viewfinder  
N
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A Predictive Focus Tracking  
In AF-C mode or when continuous-servo autofocus is selected in AF-A mode, the camera will  
initiate predictive focus tracking if the subject moves toward or away from the camera while  
the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. This allows the camera to track focus while  
attempting to predict where the subject will be when the shutter is released.  
A Getting Good Results with Autofocus  
Autofocus does not perform well under the conditions listed below. The shutter release may  
be disabled if the camera is unable to focus under these conditions, or the in-focus indicator  
(I) may be displayed and the camera may sound a beep, allowing the shutter to be released  
even when the subject is not in focus. In these cases, focus manually (0 99) or use focus lock  
(0 97) to focus on another subject at the same distance and then recompose the  
photograph.  
There is little or no contrast  
The focus point contains  
between the subject and the  
areas of sharply contrasting  
background.  
brightness.  
Example: Subject is the  
Example: Subject is half in  
same color as the  
the shade.  
background.  
The focus point contains  
Background objects appear  
objects at different  
larger than the subject.  
distances from the camera.  
Example: A building is in the  
Example: Subject is inside a  
frame behind the subject.  
cage.  
N
The subject contains many  
The subject is dominated by  
fine details.  
regular geometric patterns.  
Example: A field of flowers  
or other subjects that are  
small or lack variation in  
brightness.  
Example: Blinds or a row of  
windows in a skyscraper.  
A See Also  
For information on using focus priority in continuous-servo AF, see Custom Setting a1 (AF-C  
priority selection, 0 208). For information on using release priority in single-servo AF, see  
Custom Setting a2 (AF-S priority selection, 0 208). See page 50 for information on the  
autofocus options available in live view or during movie recording.  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AF-Area Mode  
Choose how the focus point for autofocus is selected.  
•
Single-point AF: Select the focus point as described on page 96; the camera will focus  
on the subject in the selected focus point only. Use with stationary subjects.  
Dynamic-area AF: Select the focus point as described on page 96. In AF-A and AF-C  
focus modes, the camera will focus based on information from surrounding focus  
points if the subject briefly leaves the selected point. The number of focus points  
varies with the mode selected:  
•
-
9-point dynamic-area AF: Choose when there is time to compose the photograph or  
when photographing subjects that are moving predictably (e.g., runners or race  
cars on a track).  
-
-
21-point dynamic-area AF: Choose when photographing subjects that are moving  
unpredictably (e.g., players at a football game).  
39-point dynamic-area AF: Choose when photographing subjects that are moving  
quickly and can not be easily framed in the viewfinder (e.g., birds).  
•
3D-tracking: Select the focus point as described on page 96. In AF-A and AF-C focus  
modes, the camera will track subjects that leave the selected focus point and select  
new focus points as required. Use to quickly compose pictures with subjects that  
are moving erratically from side to side (e.g., tennis players). If the subject leaves  
viewfinder, remove your finger from the shutter-release button and recompose  
the photograph with the subject in the selected focus point.  
N
A 3D-tracking  
When the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, the colors in the area surrounding  
the focus point are stored in the camera. Consequently 3D-tracking may not produce the  
desired results with subjects that are the same color as the background or that occupy a  
very small area of the frame.  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
•
Auto-area AF: The camera automatically detects the subject and  
selects the focus point. If a type G or D lens is used, the  
camera can distinguish human subjects from the background  
for improved subject detection. The active focus points are  
highlighted briefly after the camera focuses; in AF-C mode or  
when continuous-servo autofocus is selected in AF-A mode,  
the main focus point remains highlighted after the other  
focus points have turned off.  
To select the AF-area mode, press the AF-  
mode button and rotate the sub-command  
dial until the desired setting is displayed in  
the viewfinder or control panel.  
AF-mode button  
Sub-command dial  
Control panel  
Viewfinder  
A AF-Area Mode  
AF-area mode is shown in the control panel and viewfinder.  
N
AF-area mode  
Control panel Viewfinder  
AF-area mode  
Control panel Viewfinder  
39-point dynamic-area  
AF *  
Single-point AF  
9-point dynamic-area  
AF *  
3D-tracking *  
Auto-area AF  
21-point dynamic-area  
AF *  
* Only active focus point is displayed in the viewfinder. Remaining focus points provide information to  
assist focus operation.  
A Manual Focus  
Single-point AF is automatically selected when manual focus is used.  
A See Also  
For information on adjusting how long the camera waits before refocusing when an object  
moves in front of the camera, see Custom Setting a3 (Focus tracking with lock-on, 0 209).  
See page 50 for information on the autofocus options available in live view or during movie  
recording.  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Focus Point Selection  
The camera offers a choice of 39 focus points that can be used to compose  
photographs with the main subject positioned almost anywhere in the frame.  
1 Rotate the focus selector lock to ●.  
This allows the multi selector to be used to select  
the focus point.  
Focus selector lock  
2 Select the focus point.  
Use the multi selector to select the focus point  
in the viewfinder while the exposure meters are  
on. Press J to select the center focus point.  
The focus selector lock can be rotated to the  
locked (L) position following selection to  
prevent the selected focus point from changing  
when the multi selector is pressed.  
N
A Auto-area AF  
The focus point for auto-area AF is selected automatically; manual focus-point selection is  
not available.  
A See Also  
For information on choosing when the focus point is illuminated, see Custom Setting a4 (AF  
point illumination, 0 209). For information on setting focus-point selection to “wrap  
around,” see Custom Setting a5 (Focus point wrap-around, 0 209). For information on  
choosing the number of focus points that can be selected using the multi selector, see  
Custom Setting a6 (Number of focus points, 0 210). For information on changing the role  
of the J button, see Custom Setting f2, OK button (shooting mode); 0 229.  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Focus Lock  
Focus lock can be used to change the composition after focusing, making it possible  
to focus on a subject that will not be in a focus point in the final composition. If the  
camera is unable to focus using autofocus (0 93), focus lock can also be used to  
recompose the photograph after focusing on another object at the same distance as  
your original subject. Focus lock is most effective when an option other than auto-  
area AF is selected for AF-area mode (0 94).  
1 Focus.  
Position the subject in the selected focus point  
and press the shutter-release button halfway to  
initiate focus. Check that the in-focus indicator  
(I) appears in the viewfinder.  
2 Lock focus.  
AF-A and AF-C focus modes: With the shutter-release  
button pressed halfway (q), press the AE-L/AF-L  
button (w) to lock both focus and exposure (an  
AE-L icon will be displayed in the viewfinder).  
Focus will remain locked while the AE-L/AF-L  
button is pressed, even if you later remove your  
finger from the shutter-release button.  
Shutter-release button  
N
AF-S focus mode: Focus will lock automatically  
when the in-focus indicator appears, and remain  
locked until you remove your finger from the  
shutter-release button. Focus can also be locked  
by pressing the AE-L/AF-L button (see above).  
AE-L/AF-L button  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Recompose the photograph and shoot.  
Focus will remain locked between shots if you  
keep the shutter-release button pressed halfway  
(AF-S) or keep the AE-L/AF-L button pressed,  
allowing several photographs in succession to  
be taken at the same focus setting.  
Do not change the distance between the camera and the subject while focus lock is  
in effect. If the subject moves, focus again at the new distance.  
A See Also  
See Custom setting c1 (Shutter-release button AE-L, 0 213) for information on using the  
shutter-release button to lock exposure, Custom Setting f5 (Assign AE-L/AF-L button,  
0 232) for information on choosing the role played by the AE-L/AF-L button.  
N
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Manual Focus  
Manual focus is available for lenses that do not support autofocus (non-AF NIKKOR  
lenses) or when the autofocus does not produce the desired results (0 93).  
•
AF-S lenses: Set the lens focus mode switch to M.  
A AF-S Lenses  
Users of AF-S lenses (including the AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR lens  
used in this manual for illustrative purposes; 0 315, 316) can select manual focus simply  
by setting the lens focus-mode switch to M.  
•
AF lenses: Set the lens focus mode switch (if present)  
Focus-mode selector  
and camera focus-mode selector to M.  
D AF Lenses  
Do not use AF lenses with the lens focus mode switch  
set to M and the camera focus-mode selector set to AF.  
Failure to observe this precaution could damage the  
camera.  
•
Manual focus lenses: Set the camera focus-mode selector to M.  
To focus manually, adjust the lens focus ring until the  
image displayed on the clear matte field in the  
viewfinder is in focus. Photographs can be taken at  
any time, even when the image is not in focus.  
N
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚The Electronic Rangefinder  
If the lens has a maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster,  
the viewfinder focus indicator can be used to confirm  
whether the subject in the selected focus point is in  
focus (the focus point can be selected from any of the  
39 focus points). After positioning the subject in the  
selected focus point, press the shutter-release button  
halfway and rotate the lens focus ring until the in-  
focus indicator (I) is displayed. Note that with the  
subjects listed on page 93, the in-focus indicator may  
sometimes be displayed when the subject is not in  
focus; confirm focus in the viewfinder before shooting.  
A Focal Plane Position  
To determine the distance between your subject and the  
camera, measure from the focal plane mark on the camera  
body. The distance between the lens mounting flange and  
the focal plane is 46.5 mm (1.83 in.).  
46.5mm  
Focal plane mark  
N
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ISO Sensitivity  
S
“ISO sensitivity” is the digital equivalent of film speed. Choose from settings that  
range from a value roughly equivalent to ISO 100 to one roughly equivalent to ISO  
6400 in steps equivalent to 1/3 EV. For special situations, ISO sensitivity can be raised  
above ISO 6400 by from about 0.3 EV (Hi 0.3, equivalent to ISO 8000) to about 2 EV  
(Hi 2, equivalent to ISO 25600). Auto and scene modes also offer an AUTO option,  
which allows the camera to set ISO sensitivity automatically in response to lighting  
conditions. The higher the ISO sensitivity, the less light needed to make an exposure,  
allowing higher shutter speeds or smaller apertures.  
ISO sensitivity can be adjusted by  
pressing the ISO button and rotating the  
main command dial until the desired  
setting is displayed in the control panel  
or viewfinder.  
ISO button  
Main command dial  
Viewfinder  
Control panel  
S
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A AUTO  
If the mode dial is rotated to P, S, A, or M after AUTO is selected for ISO sensitivity in another  
mode, the ISO sensitivity last selected in P, S, A, or M mode will be restored.  
A Hi 0.3–Hi 2  
Pictures taken at these settings are more likely to be subject to noise (randomly-spaced  
bright pixels, fog, or lines).  
A See Also  
For information on choosing the ISO sensitivity step size, see Custom Setting b1 (ISO  
sensitivity step value; 0 211). For information on using the High ISO NR option in the  
shooting menu to reduce noise at high ISO sensitivities, see page 205.  
A The Shooting Menu  
ISO sensitivity can also be adjusted using the ISO sensitivity  
settings option in the shooting menu (0 202).  
S
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Auto ISO Sensitivity Control  
(P, S, A, and M Modes Only)  
If On is selected for ISO sensitivity settings > Auto ISO sensitivity control in the  
shooting menu, ISO sensitivity will automatically be adjusted if optimal exposure can  
not be achieved at the value selected by the user (ISO sensitivity is adjusted  
appropriately when the flash is used).  
1 Select Auto ISO sensitivity control.  
G button  
Press the G button and select ISO  
sensitivity settings in the shooting menu.  
Highlight Auto ISO sensitivity control and  
press 2.  
2 Select On.  
Highlight On and press J (if Off is selected,  
ISO sensitivity will remain fixed at the value  
selected by the user).  
3 Adjust settings.  
The maximum value for auto ISO sensitivity  
can be selected using Maximum sensitivity  
(choose lower values to prevent noise in the  
form of randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog,  
S
or lines); the minimum value for auto ISO  
sensitivity is automatically set to ISO 100. In modes P and A, sensitivity will only  
be adjusted if underexposure would result at the shutter speed selected for  
Minimum shutter speed (1/4000–1 s; in modes S and M, sensitivity will be  
adjusted for optimal exposure at the shutter speed selected by the user).  
Slower shutter speeds will be used only if optimum exposure can not be  
achieved at the ISO sensitivity value selected for Maximum sensitivity. If the  
ISO sensitivity selected by the user is higher than the value selected for  
Maximum sensitivity, the value selected for Maximum sensitivity will be  
used instead.  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Press J to exit when settings are complete.  
When On is selected, the display at right appears  
in the viewfinder and control panel. When  
sensitivity is altered from the value selected by the  
user, these indicators blink and the altered value is  
shown in the information display.  
A Auto ISO Sensitivity Control  
Noise is more likely at higher sensitivities. Use the High ISO NR option in the shooting menu  
to reduce noise (see page 205). When a flash is used, the value selected for Minimum  
shutter speed is ignored in favor of the option selected for Custom Setting e1 (Flash sync  
speed, 0 222). Note that ISO sensitivity may be raised automatically when auto ISO  
sensitivity control is used in combination with slow sync flash modes (available with the  
built-in flash and SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, and SB-400 flash units), possibly  
preventing the camera from selecting slow shutter speeds.  
S
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Exposure/Bracketing  
Z
Metering  
(P, S, A, and M Modes Only)  
Choose how the camera sets exposure in P, S, A, and M modes (in other modes, the  
camera selects the metering method automatically).  
Option  
Description  
Matrix: Produces natural results in most situations. Camera meters a wide area of the  
frame and set exposure according to tone distribution, color, composition, and, with  
type G or D lenses (0 269), distance information (3D color matrix metering II; with  
other CPU lenses, camera uses color matrix metering II, which does not include 3D  
distance information). With non-CPU lenses, camera uses color matrix metering if focal  
length and maximum aperture are specified using Non-CPU lens data option in setup  
menu (0 159); otherwise camera uses center-weighted metering.  
a
Center-weighted: Camera meters entire frame but assigns greatest weight to center area  
(if CPU lens is attached, size of area can be selected using Custom Setting b4, Center-  
weighted area, 0 213; if non-CPU lens is attached, area is 8 mm in diameter). Classic  
meter for portraits; recommended when using filters with an exposure factor (filter  
factor) over 1×. *  
Spot: Camera meters circle 3.5 mm (0.14 in.) in diameter (approximately 2.5% of frame).  
Circle is centered on current focus point, making it possible to meter off-center subjects  
(if non-CPU lens is used or if auto-area AF is in effect, camera will meter center focus  
point). Ensures that subject will be correctly exposed, even when background is much  
brighter or darker. *  
Z
b
Z
* For improved precision with non-CPU lenses, specify lens focal length and maximum  
aperture in Non-CPU lens data menu (0 159).  
To choose a metering option, press the Z button and  
rotate the main command dial until the desired  
setting is displayed in the control panel.  
A See Also  
For information on making separate adjustments to  
optimal exposure for each metering method, see Custom  
Z button  
Main command dial  
Setting b5 (Fine tune optimal exposure, 0 213).  
Control panel  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Autoexposure Lock  
Use autoexposure lock to recompose photographs after metering exposure:  
1 Set metering to Z or b (0 105).  
Choose Z to assign the greatest weight to the center of frame, or b to set  
exposure for a 3.5-mm circle centered on the active focus point. a will not  
produce the desired results.  
Shutter-release button  
2 Lock exposure.  
Position the subject in the selected focus point  
and press the shutter-release button halfway.  
With the shutter-release button pressed halfway  
and the subject positioned in the focus point,  
press the AE-L/AF-L button to lock focus and  
exposure (if you are using autofocus, confirm  
that the I in-focus indicator appears in the  
viewfinder).  
AE-L/AF-L button  
While exposure lock is in effect, an AE-L indicator  
will appear in the viewfinder.  
3 Recompose the photograph.  
Keeping the AE-L/AF-L button pressed, recompose  
the photograph and shoot.  
Z
A Adjusting Shutter Speed and Aperture  
While exposure lock is in effect, the following settings can be adjusted without altering the  
metered value for exposure:  
Mode  
P
S
Setting  
Shutter speed and aperture (flexible program; 0 68)  
Shutter speed  
A
Aperture  
The new values can be confirmed in the viewfinder and control panel. Note that metering  
can not be changed while exposure lock is in effect.  
A See Also  
If On is selected for Custom Setting c1 (Shutter-release button AE-L, 0 213), exposure will  
lock when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. For information on changing the  
role of the AE-L/AF-L button, see Custom Setting f5 (Assign AE-L/AF-L button, 0 232).  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Exposure Compensation  
(P, S, A, and M Modes Only)  
Exposure compensation is used to alter exposure from the value suggested by the  
camera, making pictures brighter or darker. It is most effective when used with  
center-weighted or spot metering (0 105). Choose from values between –5 EV  
(underexposure) and +5 EV (overexposure) in increments of 1/3 EV. In general,  
positive values make the subject brighter while negative values make it darker.  
–1 EV  
No exposure compensation  
+1 EV  
To choose a value for exposure compensation, press the E  
button and rotate the main command dial until the desired  
value is displayed in the control panel or viewfinder.  
E button  
Main command dial  
0 EV  
–0.3 EV  
+2.0 EV  
(E button pressed)  
At values other than 0.0, the 0 at the center of the exposure  
indicators will flash (modes P, S, and A only) and a E icon will be  
displayed in the control panel and viewfinder after you release  
the E button. The current value for exposure compensation can  
be confirmed in the exposure indicator by pressing the E  
button.  
Z
Normal exposure can be restored by setting exposure compensation to 0. Exposure  
compensation is not reset when the camera is turned off.  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A Mode M  
In mode M, exposure compensation affects only the exposure indicator; shutter speed and  
aperture do not change.  
A Using a Flash  
When a flash is used, exposure compensation affects both background exposure and flash  
level.  
A See Also  
For information on choosing the size of the increments available for exposure  
compensation, see Custom Setting b2 (EV steps for exposure cntrl., 0 211). For  
information on making adjustments to exposure compensation without pressing the E  
button, see Custom Setting b3 (Easy exposure compensation, 0 212). For information on  
automatically varying exposure, flash level, white balance, or Active D-Lighting, see page  
109.  
Z
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Bracketing  
(P, S, A, and M Modes Only)  
Bracketing automatically varies exposure, flash level, Active D-Lighting (ADL), or  
white balance slightly with each shot, “bracketing” the current value. Choose in  
situations in which it is difficult to set exposure, flash level, white balance, or Active  
D-Lighting and there is not time to check results and adjust settings with each shot,  
or to experiment with different settings for the same subject.  
❚❚Exposure and Flash Bracketing  
To vary exposure and/or flash level over a series of photographs:  
1 Select exposure or flash bracketing.  
G button  
To display the menus, press the G button.  
Select Custom Setting e5 (Auto bracketing  
set) in the Custom Settings menu, highlight  
an option, and press J. Choose AE & flash  
to vary both exposure and flash level, AE  
only to vary only exposure, or Flash only to  
vary only flash level.  
2 Choose the number of shots.  
Pressing the D button, rotate the main command dial to choose the number  
of shots in the bracketing sequence and the order in which they will be taken.  
Z
Number of shots  
Bracketing progress  
indicator  
D button  
Main command dial  
Control panel  
Bracketing order  
No. of shots Bracketing progress indicator  
Normal exposure, underexposure, overexposure  
Normal exposure, overexposure  
Normal exposure, underexposure  
D will be displayed in the viewfinder (see  
right); the control panel will show M.  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Select the bracketing increment.  
Pressing the D button, rotate the sub-command dial to choose from values  
between 0.3 EV and 2 EV.  
Bracketing  
increment  
D button  
A See Also  
Sub-command dial  
Control panel  
For information on choosing the size of the increment, see Custom Setting b2 (EV  
steps for exposure cntrl., 0 211). For information on choosing the order in which  
bracketing is performed, see Custom Setting e6 (Bracketing order, 0 229).  
4 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.  
The camera will vary exposure and/or flash level shot-by-  
shot according to the bracketing program selected.  
Modifications to exposure are added to those made with  
exposure compensation (0 107), making it possible to achieve exposure  
compensation values of more than 5 EV.  
While bracketing is in effect, a bracketing progress indicator will be displayed in  
the control panel. A segment will disappear from the indicator after each shot:  
the y segment when the unmodified shot is taken, the z segment when the  
shot with the negative increment is taken, and the x segment when the shot  
with the positive increment is taken.  
Z
Exposure increment:  
Exposure increment:  
Exposure increment:  
0 EV (y)  
–1 EV (z)  
+1 EV (x)  
To cancel bracketing, press the D button and rotate the main command dial until  
the bracketing progress indicator and M icon are no longer displayed.  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A Exposure and Flash Bracketing  
In continuous low speed and continuous high speed release modes (0 78), shooting will  
pause after the number of shots specified in the bracketing program have been taken.  
Shooting will resume the next time the shutter-release button is pressed. In self-timer mode,  
the camera will take the number of shots selected in Step 2 on page 109 each time the  
shutter-release button is pressed, regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting c3  
(Self-timer) > Number of shots (0 214). In other release modes, one shot will be taken  
each time the shutter-release button is pressed.  
If the memory card fills before all shots in the sequence have been taken, shooting can be  
resumed from the next shot in the sequence after the memory card has been replaced or  
shots have been deleted to make room on the memory card. If the camera is turned off  
before all shots in the sequence have been taken, bracketing will resume from the next shot  
in the sequence when the camera is turned on.  
A Exposure Bracketing  
The camera modifies exposure by varying shutter speed and aperture (mode P), aperture  
(mode S), or shutter speed (modes A and M). If auto ISO sensitivity control is enabled in  
modes P, S, and A, the camera will automatically vary ISO sensitivity for optimum exposure  
when the limits of the camera exposure system are exceeded; in mode M, the camera will first  
use auto ISO sensitivity control to bring exposure as close as possible to the optimum and  
then bracket this exposure by varying shutter speed.  
Z
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚White Balance Bracketing  
The camera creates multiple copies of each photograph, each with a different white  
balance. For more information on white balance, see page 117.  
1 Select white balance bracketing.  
Choose WB bracketing for Custom Setting e5 Auto  
bracketing set.  
2 Choose the number of shots.  
Pressing the D button, rotate the main command dial to choose the number  
of shots in the bracketing sequence and the order in which they will be taken.  
Number of shots  
Bracketing progress  
indicator  
D button  
Main command dial  
Control panel  
D will be displayed in the viewfinder (see right); the  
control panel will show W.  
3 Select a white balance increment.  
Pressing the D button, rotate the sub-command dial to choose from  
increments of 1 (5 mired; 0 121), 2 (10 mired), or 3 (15 mired). The B value  
indicates the amount of blue, the A value the amount of amber (0 119).  
Z
White balance  
increment  
D button  
Sub-command dial  
Control panel  
The bracketing programs with an increment of 1 are listed below.  
Control panel Bracketing progress indicator No. of shots  
Increment  
1B  
Bracketing order  
0 / 1 B  
2
2
3
1A  
0 / 1 A  
1A, 1B  
0 / 1 A / 1 B  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.  
Each shot will be processed to create the number of  
copies specified in the bracketing program, and  
each copy will have a different white balance.  
Modifications to white balance are added to the  
white balance adjustment made with white balance  
fine-tuning.  
If the number of shots in the bracketing program is  
greater than the number of exposures remaining,  
the exposure count displays in the control panel  
and viewfinder will flash and the shutter release will  
be disabled. Shooting can begin when a new  
memory card is inserted.  
To cancel bracketing, press the D button and rotate the main command dial until  
the bracketing progress indicator and W icon are no longer displayed.  
A White Balance Bracketing  
White balance bracketing is not available at an image quality of NEF (RAW). Selecting NEF  
(RAW), NEF (RAW)+JPEG fine, NEF (RAW)+JPEG normal, or NEF (RAW)+JPEG basic  
cancels white balance bracketing.  
White balance bracketing affects only color temperature (the amber-blue axis in the white  
balance fine-tuning display, 0 119). No adjustments are made on the green-magenta axis.  
In self-timer mode (0 80), the number of copies specified in the white-balance program will  
be created each time the shutter is released, regardless of the option selected for Custom  
Setting c3 (Self-timer) > Number of shots (0 214).  
Z
If the camera is turned off while the memory card access lamp is lit, the camera will power off  
only after all photographs in the sequence have been recorded.  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚ADL Bracketing  
The camera varies Active D-Lighting over a series of exposures. For more information  
on Active D-Lighting, see page 139.  
1 Select ADL bracketing.  
Choose ADL bracketing for Custom Setting e5 Auto  
bracketing set.  
2 Choose the number of shots.  
Pressing the D button, rotate the main command dial to choose the number  
of shots in the bracketing sequence. Choose two shots to take one photograph  
with Active D-Lighting off and another at the value currently selected for Active  
D-Lighting in the shooting menu (if Active D-Lighting is off, the second shot will  
be taken with Active D-Lighting set to Auto). Choose three shots to take a  
series of photographs with Active D-Lighting set to Off, Normal, and High.  
Number of shots  
Bracketing progress  
indicator  
D button  
Main command dial  
Control panel  
D will be displayed in the viewfinder (see right); the  
control panel will show d.  
Z
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.  
The camera will vary Active D-Lighting shot-by-shot  
according to the bracketing program selected. While  
bracketing is in effect, a bracketing progress indicator will  
be displayed in the control panel. A segment will  
disappear from the indicator after each shot: the y  
segment when the first shot is taken, the 0 segment when  
the second shot is taken, and the 1 segment when the  
third shot (if applicable) is taken.  
To cancel bracketing, press the D button and rotate the main command dial until  
the bracketing progress indicator and d icon are no longer displayed.  
A ADL Bracketing  
In continuous low speed and continuous high speed release modes (0 78), shooting will  
pause after the number of shots specified in the bracketing program have been taken.  
Shooting will resume the next time the shutter-release button is pressed. In self-timer mode,  
the camera will take the number of shots selected in Step 2 on page 114 each time the  
shutter-release button is pressed, regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting c3  
(Self-timer) > Number of shots (0 214). In other release modes, one shot will be taken  
each time the shutter-release button is pressed.  
If the memory card fills before all shots in the sequence have been taken, shooting can be  
resumed from the next shot in the sequence after the memory card has been replaced or  
shots have been deleted to make room on the memory card. If the camera is turned off  
before all shots in the sequence have been taken, bracketing will resume from the next shot  
in the sequence when the camera is turned on.  
Z
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Z
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
White Balance  
(P, S, A, and M Modes Only)  
r
White balance ensures that colors are unaffected by the color of the light source.  
Auto white balance is recommended for most light sources; in P, S, A, and M modes,  
other values can be selected if necessary according to the type of source:  
Option  
Colortemp. *  
Description  
v Auto  
Normal  
White balance is adjusted automatically. For best  
results, use type G or D lens. If built-in or optional  
flash fires, results are adjusted for flash.  
3,500–  
8,000 K  
Keep warm lighting colors  
Incandescent  
J
I
3,000 K Use under incandescent lighting.  
Use with:  
Fluorescent  
Sodium-vapor lamps  
Warm-white fluorescent  
White fluorescent  
Cool-white fluorescent  
Day white fluorescent  
Daylight fluorescent  
2,700 K • Sodium-vapor lighting (found in sports venues).  
3,000 K • Warm-white fluorescent lights.  
3,700 K • White fluorescent lights.  
4,200 K • Cool-white fluorescent lights.  
5,000 K • Daylight white fluorescent lights.  
6,500 K • Daylight fluorescent lights.  
• High color temperature light sources (e.g.  
mercury-vapor lamps).  
High temp. mercury-vapor  
7,200 K  
H
N
Direct sunlight  
Flash  
Cloudy  
5,200 K Use with subjects lit by direct sunlight.  
5,400 K Use with built-in or optional flash.  
6,000 K Use in daylight under overcast skies.  
8,000 K Use in daylight with subjects in the shade.  
2,500– Choose color temperature from list of values  
10,000 K (0 122).  
G
M
Shade  
K
Choose color temp.  
Preset manual  
Use subject, light source, or existing photograph as  
r
L
—
reference for white balance (0 123).  
* All values are approximate. Fine-tuning set to 0.  
White balance is set by pressing the WB button and  
rotating the main command dial until the desired  
setting is displayed in the control panel.  
WB button Main command dial  
Control panel  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A The Shooting Menu  
White balance can also be adjusted using the White balance  
option in the shooting menu (0 202), which also can be used to  
fine-tune white balance (0 119) or measure a value for preset  
white balance (0 123). The Auto option in the White balance  
menu offers a choice of Normal and Keep warm lighting colors,  
which preserves the warm colors produced by incandescent  
lighting, while the I Fluorescent option can be used to select the  
light source from the bulb types.  
A Studio Flash Lighting  
Auto white balance may not produce the desired results with large studio flash units. Use  
preset white balance or set white balance to Flash and use fine tuning to adjust white  
balance.  
A Color Temperature  
The perceived color of a light source varies with the viewer and other conditions. Color  
temperature is an objective measure of the color of a light source, defined with reference to  
the temperature to which an object would have to be heated to radiate light in the same  
wavelengths. While light sources with a color temperature in the neighborhood of 5,000–  
5,500 K appear white, light sources with a lower color temperature, such as incandescent  
light bulbs, appear slightly yellow or red. Light sources with a higher color temperature  
appear tinged with blue. The camera white balance options are adapted to the following  
color temperatures:  
• I (sodium-vapor lamps): 2,700 K  
• J (incandescent)/  
• H (direct sunlight): 5,200 K  
• N (flash): 5,400 K  
I (warm-white fluorescent.): 3,000 K  
• I (white fluorescent): 3,700 K  
• I (cool-white fluorescent): 4,200 K  
• I (day white fluorescent): 5,000 K  
• G (cloudy): 6,000 K  
• I (daylight fluorescent): 6,500 K  
• I (high temp. mercury-vapor): 7,200 K  
• M (shade): 8,000 K  
A See Also  
r
When WB bracketing is selected for Custom Setting e5 (Auto bracketing set, 0 229), the  
camera will create several images each time the shutter is released. White balance will be  
varied with each image, “bracketing” the value currently selected for white balance (0 112).  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fine-Tuning White Balance  
White balance can be “fine tuned” to compensate for variations in the color of the  
light source or to introduce a deliberate color cast into an image. White balance is  
fine tuned using the White balance option in the shooting menu or by pressing the  
WB button and rotating the sub-command dial.  
❚❚The White Balance Menu  
1 Select a white balance option.  
G button  
To display the menus, press the G button.  
Select White balance in the shooting menu,  
then highlight a white balance option and  
press 2. If an option other than Auto,  
Fluorescent, Choose color temp., or Preset  
manual is selected, proceed to Step 2. If  
Auto, Fluorescent, or Choose color temp. is selected, highlight the desired  
setting and press 2. If Preset manual is selected, choose a preset as described  
on page 128 before proceeding.  
2 Fine tune white balance.  
Use the multi selector to fine-tune white  
balance. White balance can be fine tuned on  
the amber (A)–blue (B) axis and the green  
(G)–magenta (M) axis. The horizontal  
(amber-blue) axis corresponds to color  
temperature, with each increment  
equivalent to about 5 mired. The vertical  
(green-magenta) axis has the similar effects  
to the corresponding color compensation  
(CC) filters.  
Coordinates  
Adjustment  
Increase green  
r
Increase  
blue  
Increase  
amber  
Increase magenta  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Press J.  
Press J to save settings and return to the  
shooting menu. An asterisk (“*”) is  
displayed in the control panel when fine-  
tuning is in effect.  
❚❚The WB Button  
At settings other than K (Choose color temp.) and  
L (Preset manual), the WB button can be used to  
fine-tune white balance on the amber (A)–blue (B)  
axis (0 119; to fine-tune white balance when K or  
L is selected, use the shooting menu as described  
on page 119). Six settings in both directions are  
available; each increment is equivalent to about 5  
mired (0 121). Press the WB button and rotate the  
sub-command dial until the desired value is displayed  
in the control panel. Rotating the sub-command dial  
to the left increases the amount of amber (A).  
WB button  
Sub-command dial  
Control panel  
Rotating the sub-command dial to the right increases  
the amount of blue (B). An asterisk (“*”) appears in the  
control panel at settings other than 0.  
r
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A White Balance Fine Tuning  
The colors on the fine-tuning axes are relative, not absolute. For example, moving the cursor  
to B (blue) when a “warm” setting such as J (incandescent) is selected for white balance will  
make photographs slightly “colder” but will not actually make them blue.  
A Color Temperature Fine-Tuning  
When Choose color temp. is selected, you can view the  
color temperature while fine-tuning white balance.  
A “Mired”  
Any given change in color temperature produces a greater difference in color at low color  
temperatures than it would at higher color temperatures. For example, a change of 1000 K  
produces a much greater change in color at 3000 K than at 6000 K. Mired, calculated by  
multiplying the inverse of the color temperature by 10 6, is a measure of color temperature  
that takes such variation into account, and as such is the unit used in color-temperature  
compensation filters. E.g.:  
• 4000 K–3000 K (a difference of 1000 K)=83 mired  
• 7000 K–6000 K (a difference of 1000 K)=24 mired  
r
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Choosing a Color Temperature  
When K (Choose color temp.) is selected for white  
balance, color temperature can be selected by  
pressing the WB button and rotating the sub-  
command dial. The color temperature is displayed in  
the control panel.  
WB button  
Sub-command dial  
Control panel  
D Choose Color Temperature  
Note that the desired results will not be obtained with flash or fluorescent lighting. Choose  
N (Flash) or I (Fluorescent) for these sources. With other light sources, take a test shot to  
determine if the selected value is appropriate.  
A The White Balance Menu  
Color temperature can also be selected in the white  
balance menu. Note that the color temperature with the  
WB button and the sub-command dial replaces the value  
selected in the white balance menu.  
r
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preset Manual  
Preset manual is used to record and recall custom white balance settings for shooting  
under mixed lighting or to compensate for light sources with a strong color cast. Two  
methods are available for setting preset white balance:  
Method  
Measure  
Description  
Neutral gray or white object is placed under lighting that will be used in final photo  
and white balance measured by camera (0 124).  
Use photo White balance is copied from photo on memory card (0 126).  
The camera can store up to five values for preset white balance in presets d-0 through  
d-4. A descriptive comment can be added to any white balance preset (0 129).  
d-0  
Stores last value measured for white balance  
(0 124). This preset is overwritten when a new  
value is measured.  
d-1–d-4  
Store values copied from d-0 (0 126).  
Store values copied from images on  
memory card (0 126).  
r
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚Measuring a Value for Preset White Balance  
1 Light a reference object.  
Place a neutral gray or white object under the lighting that will be used in the  
final photograph. In studio settings, a standard gray panel can be used as a  
reference object. Note that exposure is automatically increased by 1 EV when  
measuring white balance; in mode M, adjust exposure so that the exposure  
indicator shows 0 (0 72).  
2 Set white balance to L (Preset manual).  
Press the WB button and rotate the main command dial until L is displayed in  
the control panel.  
WB button  
Main command dial  
Control panel  
3 Select direct measurement mode.  
Release the WB button briefly and then press the button  
until the L icon in the control panel starts to flash. A  
flashing D will also appear in the control panel and  
viewfinder. The displays will flash for about six seconds.  
Control panel  
r
Viewfinder  
4 Measure white balance.  
Before the indicators stop flashing, frame the reference  
object so that it fills the viewfinder and press the  
shutter-release button all the way down. The camera  
will measure a value for white balance and store it in preset d-0. No photograph  
will be recorded; white balance can be measured accurately even when the  
camera is not in focus.  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 Check the results.  
If the camera was able to measure a value for white  
balance, C will flash in the control panel for about  
six seconds, while the viewfinder will show a flashing  
a.  
Control panel  
Viewfinder  
If lighting is too dark or too bright, the camera may be  
unable to measure white balance. A flashing b a  
will appear in the control panel and viewfinder for  
about six seconds. Press the shutter-release button  
halfway to return to Step 4 and measure white balance  
again.  
Control panel  
Viewfinder  
6 Select preset d-0.  
If the new value for preset white balance will be used immediately, select preset  
d-0 by pressing the WB button and rotating the sub-command dial until d-0 is  
displayed in the control panel.  
D Direct Measurement Mode  
If no operations are performed while the displays are flashing, direct measurement mode  
will end in the time selected for Custom Setting c2 (Auto meter-off delay, 0 214).  
r
A Preset d-0  
The new value for white balance will be stored in preset d-0,  
automatically replacing the previous value for this preset (no  
confirmation dialog will be displayed). A thumbnail will be  
displayed in the preset white balance list (0 126).  
To use the new value for white balance, select preset d-0 (if no value has been measured for  
white balance before d-0 is selected, white balance will be set to a color temperature of  
5,200 K, the same as Direct sunlight). The new white balance value will remain in preset d-  
0 until white balance is measured again. By copying preset d-0 to one of the other presets  
before measuring a new value for white balance, up to five white balance values can be  
stored (0 126).  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚Copying White Balance from d-0 to Presets d-1–d-4  
Follow the steps below to copy a measured value for white balance from d-0 to any  
of the other presets (d-1–d-4).  
1 Select L (Preset manual).  
G button  
Press the G button and select White  
balance in the shooting menu. Highlight  
Preset manual and press 2.  
2 Select a destination.  
W button  
Highlight the destination preset (d-1 to d-4)  
and press W.  
3 Copy d-0 to the selected preset.  
Highlight Copy d-0 and press J. If  
comment has been created for d-0 (0 129),  
the comment will be copied to the comment  
for the selected preset.  
❚❚Copying White Balance from a Photograph (d-1–d-4 Only)  
Copy a value for white balance from an existing image to a selected preset. Note that  
existing values can not be copied to preset d-0.  
r
1 Select L (Preset manual).  
Highlight Preset manual in the white  
balance menu and press 2.  
2 Select a destination.  
W button  
Highlight the destination preset (d-1 to d-4)  
and press W.  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Choose Select image.  
Highlight Select image and press 2.  
4 Highlight a source image.  
Highlight the source image.  
To view the highlighted image full frame,  
X button  
press and hold the X button.  
To view images in other locations, hold D  
and press 1. The dialog shown at right will  
be displayed; select the desired card and  
folder (0 164).  
D button  
5 Copy white balance.  
Press J to copy the white balance value for  
the highlighted photograph to the selected  
preset. If the highlighted photograph has a  
comment (0 238), the comment will be  
copied to the comment for the selected  
preset.  
r
A Choosing a White Balance Preset  
Press 1 to highlight the current white balance preset  
(d-0–d-4) and press 2 to select another preset.  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚Selecting a White Balance Preset  
To set white balance to a preset value:  
1 Select L (Preset manual).  
Highlight Preset manual in the white  
balance menu and press 2.  
2 Select a preset.  
W button  
Highlight the desired preset and press W.  
To select the highlighted preset and display  
fine tuning menu (0 119) without  
completing the next step, press J instead.  
3 Select Set.  
Highlight Set and press 2. Fine tuning  
menu for the selected white balance preset  
is displayed (0 119).  
A Selecting a White Balance Preset: the WB Button  
At a setting of L (Preset manual), presets can also be selected by pressing the WB button  
and rotating the sub-command dial. The current preset is displayed in the control panel  
while the WB button is pressed.  
r
WB button  
Sub-command dial  
Control panel  
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚Entering a Comment  
Follow the steps below to enter a descriptive comment of up to thirty-six characters  
for a selected white balance preset.  
1 Select L (Preset manual).  
Highlight Preset manual in the white  
balance menu and press 2.  
2 Select a preset.  
W button  
Highlight the desired preset and press W.  
3 Select Edit comment.  
Highlight Edit comment and press 2.  
4 Edit the comment.  
Edit the comment as described on page 137.  
r
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
r
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Image Enhancement  
J
Picture Controls  
(P, S, A, and M Modes Only)  
Nikon’s unique Picture Control system makes it possible to share image processing  
settings, including sharpening, contrast, brightness, saturation, and hue, among  
compatible devices and software.  
Selecting a Picture Control  
The camera offers a choice of preset Picture Controls. In P, S, A, and M modes, you can  
choose a Picture Control according to the subject or type of scene (in other modes,  
the camera selects a Picture Control automatically).  
Option  
Description  
Standard processing for balanced results. Recommended for most  
situations.  
Q Standard  
Minimal processing for natural results. Choose for photographs that will later  
be extensively processed or retouched.  
R Neutral  
Pictures are enhanced for a vivid, photoprint effect. Choose for photographs  
that emphasize primary colors.  
S Vivid  
T Monochrome Take monochrome photographs.  
e Portrait  
Process portraits for skin with natural texture and a rounded feel.  
f Landscape Produces vibrant landscapes and cityscapes.  
1 Display Picture Controls.  
G button  
To display the menus, press the G button.  
Highlight Set Picture Control in the  
shooting menu and press 2 to display a list  
of Picture Controls.  
J
2 Choose a Picture Control.  
Highlight an option and press J.  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A Preset Picture Controls Versus Custom Picture Controls  
The Picture Controls supplied with the camera are referred to as preset Picture Controls.  
Custom Picture Controls are created through modifications to existing Picture Controls using  
the Manage Picture Control option in the shooting menu (0 136). Custom Picture Controls  
can be saved to a memory card for sharing among other cameras of the same model and  
compatible software (0 138).  
A Optional Picture Controls  
Additional optional Picture Controls may be available for download from Nikon websites.  
A The Picture Control Indicator  
The current Picture Control is shown in the information display when  
the R button is pressed.  
Picture Control  
indicator  
J
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Modifying Picture Controls  
Existing preset or custom Picture Controls (0 136) can  
be modified to suit the scene or the user’s creative  
intent. Choose a balanced combination of settings  
using Quick adjust, or make manual adjustments to  
individual settings.  
1 Select a Picture Control.  
Highlight the desired Picture Control in the Set  
Picture Control menu (0 131) and press 2.  
2 Adjust settings.  
Press 1 or 3 to highlight the desired setting and  
press 4 or 2 to choose a value (0 134). Repeat  
this step until all settings have been adjusted, or  
select Quick adjust to choose a preset  
combination of settings. Default settings can be  
restored by pressing the O button.  
3 Save changes and exit.  
Press J.  
A Modifications to Original Picture Controls  
Picture Controls that have been modified from default  
settings are indicated by an asterisk (“*”).  
J
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚Picture Control Settings  
Option  
Description  
Choose from options between –2 and +2 to reduce or exaggerate the effect  
of the selected Picture Control (note that this resets all manual adjustments).  
For example, choosing positive values for Vivid makes pictures more vivid.  
Not available with Neutral or Monochrome Picture Controls.  
Quick adjust  
Control the sharpness of outlines. Select A to adjust sharpening  
Sharpening automatically according to the type of scene, or choose from values between  
0 (no sharpening) and 9 (the higher the value, the greater the sharpening).  
Select A to adjust contrast automatically according to the type of scene, or  
choose from values between –3 and +3 (choose lower values to prevent  
Contrast  
highlights in portrait subjects from being “washed out” in direct sunlight,  
higher values to preserve detail in misty landscapes and other low-contrast  
subjects).  
Choose –1 for reduced brightness, +1 for enhanced brightness. Does not  
affect exposure.  
Brightness  
Control the vividness of colors. Select A to adjust saturation automatically  
Saturation according to the type of scene, or choose from values between –3 and +3  
(lower values reduce saturation and higher values increase it).  
Choose negative values (to a minimum of –3) to make reds more purple,  
Hue  
blues more green, and greens more yellow, positive values (up to +3) to  
make reds more orange, greens more blue, and blues more purple.  
Filter  
Simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome photographs. Choose  
effects  
from Off, yellow, orange, red, and green (0 135).  
Choose the tint used in monochrome photographs from B&W (black-and-  
white), Sepia, Cyanotype (blue-tinted monochrome), Red, Yellow, Green,  
Blue Green, Blue, Purple Blue, Red Purple (0 135).  
Toning  
D “A” (Auto)  
Results for auto sharpening, contrast, and saturation vary with exposure and the position of  
the subject in the frame. Use a type G or D lens for best results.  
J
A Custom Picture Controls  
The options available with custom Picture Controls are the same as those on which the  
custom Picture Control was based.  
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A The Picture Control Grid  
Pressing the W button in Step 2 (0 133) displays a Picture Control  
grid showing the contrast and saturation for the selected Picture  
Control in relation to the other Picture Controls (only contrast is  
displayed when Monochrome is selected). Release the W button to  
return to the Picture Control menu.  
The icons for Picture Controls that use auto contrast and saturation  
are displayed in green in the Picture Control grid, and lines appear  
parallel to the axes of the grid.  
A Previous Settings  
The line under the value display in the Picture Control setting menu  
indicates the previous value for the setting. Use this as a reference  
when adjusting settings.  
A Filter Effects (Monochrome Only)  
The options in this menu simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome photographs.  
The following filter effects are available:  
Option  
Yellow  
Description  
Y
O
R
G
Enhances contrast. Can be used to tone down the brightness of the sky in  
Orange landscape photographs. Orange produces more contrast than yellow, red  
more contrast than orange.  
Green Softens skin tones. Can be used for portraits.  
Red  
Note that the effects achieved with Filter effects are more pronounced than those  
produced by physical glass filters.  
A Toning (Monochrome Only)  
Pressing 3 when Toning is selected displays saturation options.  
Press 4 or 2 to adjust saturation. Saturation control is not available  
when B&W (black-and-white) is selected.  
J
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Creating Custom Picture Controls  
The Picture Controls supplied with the camera can be modified and saved as custom  
Picture Controls.  
1 Select Manage Picture Control.  
G button  
To display the menus, press the G button.  
Highlight Manage Picture Control in the  
shooting menu and press 2.  
2 Select Save/edit.  
Highlight Save/edit and press 2.  
3 Select a Picture Control.  
Highlight an existing Picture Control and  
press 2, or press J to proceed to step 5 to  
save a copy of the highlighted Picture  
Control without further modification.  
4 Edit the selected Picture Control.  
See page 134 for more information. To  
abandon any changes and start over from  
default settings, press the O button. Press J  
when settings are complete.  
J
5 Select a destination.  
Highlight a destination for the custom  
Picture Control (C-1 through C-9) and  
press 2.  
136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6 Name the Picture Control.  
The text-entry dialog shown at right will be  
displayed. By default, new Picture Controls  
are named by adding a two-digit number  
(assigned automatically) to the name of the  
existing Picture Control. To move the cursor  
Keyboard  
area  
Name area  
in the name area, hold the W button and press 4 or 2. To enter a new letter  
at the current cursor position, use the multi selector to highlight the desired  
character in the keyboard area and press J. To delete the character at the  
current cursor position, press the O button. To return to the shooting menu  
without saving the Picture Control, press the G button.  
Custom Picture Control names can be up to nineteen characters long. Any  
characters after the nineteenth will be deleted.  
7 Save changes and exit.  
After editing the name, press X to save  
changes and exit. The new Picture Control  
will appear in the Picture Control list.  
A Manage Picture Control > Rename  
Custom Picture Controls can be renamed at any time  
using the Rename option in the Manage Picture  
Control menu.  
A Manage Picture Control > Delete  
The Delete option in the Manage Picture Control  
menu can be used to delete selected custom Picture  
Controls when they are no longer needed.  
J
A The Original Picture Control Icon  
The original preset Picture Control on which the  
custom Picture Control is based is indicated by an icon  
in the top right corner of the edit display.  
Original Picture Control icon  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sharing Custom Picture Controls  
Custom Picture Controls created using the Picture Control Utility available with  
ViewNX 2 or optional software such as Capture NX 2 can be copied to a memory card  
and loaded into the camera, or custom Picture Controls created with the camera can  
be copied to the memory card to be used in compatible cameras and software and  
then deleted when no longer needed.  
To copy custom Picture Controls to or from the  
memory card, or to delete custom Picture Controls  
from the memory card, highlight Load/save in the  
Manage Picture Control menu and press 2. The  
following options will be displayed:  
•
Copy to camera: Copy custom Picture Controls from the  
memory card to custom Picture Controls C-1  
through C-9 on the camera and name them as  
desired.  
•
Delete from card: Delete selected custom Picture  
Controls from the memory card. The confirmation  
dialog shown at right will be displayed before a  
Picture Control is deleted; to delete the selected  
Picture Control, highlight Yes and press J.  
Copy to card: Copy a custom Picture Control (C-1  
through C-9) from the camera to a selected  
destination (1 through 99) on the memory card.  
•
A Saving Custom Picture Controls  
Up to 99 custom Picture Controls can be stored on the memory card at any one time. The  
memory card can only be used to store user-created custom Picture Controls. The preset  
Picture Controls supplied with the camera can not be copied to the memory card, renamed,  
or deleted.  
J
The options in the Manage Picture Control menu apply only to the memory card in Slot 1.  
Custom Picture Controls can not be deleted from or copied to or from the card in Slot 2.  
138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Active D-Lighting  
(P, S, A, and M Modes Only)  
Active D-Lighting preserves details in highlights and shadows, creating photographs  
with natural contrast. Use for high contrast scenes, for example when  
photographing brightly lit outdoor scenery through a door or window or taking  
pictures of shaded subjects on a sunny day. It is most effective when used with  
matrix metering (a).  
Active D-Lighting off  
Active D-Lighting:  
Active D-Lighting off  
Active D-Lighting:  
YAuto  
P High  
To use Active D-Lighting:  
1 Select Active D-Lighting.  
G button  
To display the menus, press the G button.  
Highlight Active D-Lighting in the shooting  
menu and press 2.  
2 Choose an option.  
Highlight an option and press J. If  
YAuto is selected, the camera will  
automatically adjust Active D-Lighting  
according to shooting conditions (in mode  
M, however, YAuto is equivalent to  
Q Normal).  
J
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D Active D-Lighting  
Noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) may appear in photographs taken with  
Active D-Lighting. Uneven shading may be visible with some subjects. Active D-Lighting can  
not be used at ISO sensitivities of Hi 0.3 or above.  
D “Active D-Lighting” Versus “D-Lighting”  
The Active D-Lighting option in the shooting menu adjusts exposure before shooting to  
optimize the dynamic range, while the D-Lighting option in the retouch menu (0 251)  
optimizes dynamic range in images after shooting.  
A See Also  
When ADL bracketing is selected for Custom Setting e5 (Auto bracketing set, 0 229), the  
camera varies Active D-Lighting over a series of shots. See page 114 for more information.  
J
140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Color Space  
The color space determines the gamut of colors available for color reproduction.  
Choose a color space according to how photographs will be processed on leaving the  
camera.  
Option  
Description  
Choose for photographs that will be printed or used “as is,” with no further  
modification.  
W sRGB  
This color space is capable of expressing a wider gamut of colors than  
X Adobe RGB sRGB, making it the preferred choice for images that will be extensively  
processed or retouched.  
1 Select Color space.  
G button  
To display the menus, press the G button.  
Highlight Color space in the shooting menu  
and press 2.  
2 Select a color space.  
Highlight the desired option and press J.  
J
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A Color Space  
Color spaces define the correspondence between colors and the numeric values that  
represent them in a digital image file. The sRGB color space is widely used, while the Adobe  
RGB color space is typically used in publishing and commercial printing. sRGB is  
recommended when taking photographs that will be printed without modification or  
viewed in applications that do not support color management, or when taking photographs  
that will be printed with ExifPrint, the direct printing option on some household printers, or  
kiosk printing or other commercial print services. Adobe RGB photographs can also be  
printed using these options, but colors will not be as vivid.  
JPEG photographs taken in the Adobe RGB color space are Exif 2.3 and DCF 2.0 compliant;  
applications and printers that support Exif 2.3 and DCF 2.0 will select the correct color space  
automatically. If the application or device does not support Exif 2.3 and DCF 2.0, select the  
appropriate color space manually. For more information, see the documentation provided  
with the application or device.  
A Nikon Software  
ViewNX 2 (supplied) and Capture NX 2 (available separately) automatically select the correct  
color space when opening photographs created with the camera.  
J
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Flash Photography  
l
Using the Built-in Flash  
The built-in flash has a Guide Number (GN) 12/39 (m/ft., ISO 100, 20 °C/68 °F) and  
provides coverage for the angle of view of a 16 mm lens. It can be used not only  
when natural lighting is inadequate but to fill in shadows and backlit subjects or to  
add a catch light to the subject’s eyes.  
❚❚Using the Built-in Flash: i, k, p, n, o, s, and wModes  
1 Choose a flash mode (0 144).  
2 Take pictures.  
The flash will pop up as required when the  
shutter-release button is pressed halfway, and fire  
when a photograph is taken. If the flash does not  
pop up automatically, DO NOT attempt to raise it by  
hand. Failure to observe this precaution could  
damage the flash.  
❚❚Using the Built-in Flash: P, S, A, M, and 0Modes  
1 Raise the flash.  
Press the M button to raise the flash.  
2 Choose a flash mode (0 144).  
l
3 Take pictures.  
M button  
The flash will fire whenever a picture is taken.  
A Lowering the Built-in Flash  
To save power when the flash is not in use, press it gently  
downward until the latch clicks into place.  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Flash Mode  
The flash modes available vary with shooting mode:  
i, k, p, n, s, w  
o
0
Auto+slow sync+  
red-eye reduction  
Auto  
Fill flash  
Auto+red-eye reduction  
Auto+slow sync  
Off  
j
Off  
j
P, A  
S, M  
Fill flash  
Fill flash  
Red-eye reduction  
Red-eye reduction  
Rear-curtain sync  
Slow sync+red-eye reduction  
Slow sync  
Rear curtain+slow sync *  
* S is displayed when setting is complete.  
To choose a flash mode, press the M button and rotate  
the main command dial until the desired setting is  
displayed in the control panel.  
D The Built-in Flash  
Use with lenses with focal lengths of 16–300 mm (0 271).  
Remove lens hoods to prevent shadows. The flash has a  
minimum range of 0.6 m (2 ft.) and can not be used in the  
macro range of macro zoom lenses. i-TTL flash control  
can be used at ISO sensitivities between 100 and 6400. At  
values over 6400, the desired results may not be achieved  
at some ranges or aperture settings.  
M button Main command dial  
l
Control panel  
If the flash fires in continuous release mode (0 78), only  
one picture will be taken each time the shutter-release  
button is pressed.  
The shutter release may be briefly disabled to protect the  
flash after it has been used for several consecutive shots.  
The flash can be used again after a short pause.  
144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A Flash Modes  
The flash modes listed on the previous page may combine one or more of the following  
settings, as shown by the flash mode icon:  
•
AUTO (auto flash): When lighting is poor or subject is back lit, flash pops up automatically  
when shutter-release button is pressed halfway and fires as required.  
• Y (red-eye reduction): Use for portraits. Red-eye reduction lamp lights before flash fires,  
reducing “red-eye.”  
• j (off): Flash does not fire even when lighting is poor or subject is back-lit.  
•
SLOW (slow sync): Shutter speed slows automatically to capture background lighting at night  
or under low light. Use to include background lighting in portraits.  
REAR (rear-curtain sync): Flash fires just before shutter closes, creating a stream of light behind  
moving light sources (below at right). If this icon is not displayed, flash will fire as the  
shutter opens (front-curtain sync; the effect this produces with moving light sources is  
shown below at left).  
•
Front-curtain sync  
A Shutter Speeds Available with the Built-in Flash  
The following shutter speeds are available with the built-in flash.  
Rear-curtain sync  
Mode  
Shutter speed  
1/250–1/60 s  
1/250–1/125 s  
1/250–1 s  
Mode  
S
M
Shutter speed  
1/250–30 s  
i, P *, A *, k, p, s, w  
n, 0  
o
1/250–30 s, A  
* Speeds as fast as 1/8,000 s are available with optional SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, and SB-600 flash units in  
modes P and A if 1/320 s (Auto FP) or 1/250 s (Auto FP) is selected for Custom Setting e1 (Flash sync  
speed, 0 222).  
A See Also  
See page 149 for information on locking flash value (FV) for a metered subject before  
recomposing a photograph. For information on auto FP high-speed sync and choosing a  
flash sync speed, see Custom Setting e1 (Flash sync speed, 0 222). For information on  
choosing the slowest shutter speed available when using the flash, see Custom Setting e2  
(Flash shutter speed, 0 223). For information on flash control and using the built-in flash  
in commander mode, see Custom Setting e3 (Flash cntrl for built-in flash, 0 223). See  
page 275 for information on using optional flash units.  
l
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A Flash Control Mode  
The camera supports the following i-TTL flash control modes:  
•
i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital SLR: Flash emits series of nearly invisible preflashes (monitor  
preflashes) immediately before main flash. Preflashes reflected from objects in all areas of  
frame are picked up by 2,016-pixel RGB sensor and are analyzed in combination with  
range information from matrix metering system to adjust flash output for natural balance  
between main subject and ambient background lighting. If type G or D lens is used,  
distance information is included when calculating flash output. Precision of calculation  
can be increased for non-CPU lenses by providing lens data (focal length and maximum  
aperture; see 0 159). Not available when spot metering is used.  
•
Standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR: Flash output adjusted to bring lighting in frame to standard  
level; brightness of background is not taken into account. Recommended for shots in  
which main subject is emphasized at expense of background details, or when exposure  
compensation is used. Standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR is activated automatically when  
spot metering is selected.  
The flash control mode for the built-in flash can be selected using Custom Setting e3 (Flash  
cntrl for built-in flash, 0 223). The information display shows the flash control mode for  
the built-in flash as follows:  
Flash sync  
Auto FP (0 222)  
—
i-TTL  
—
—
Manual  
Repeating flash  
Commander mode  
l
146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A Aperture, Sensitivity, and Flash Range  
Flash range varies with sensitivity (ISO equivalency) and aperture.  
Aperture at ISO equivalent of  
Range  
100  
1.4  
2
2.8  
4
5.6  
8
11  
16  
200  
2
2.8  
4
5.6  
8
11  
16  
22  
400  
2.8  
4
5.6  
8
11  
16  
22  
32  
800 1600 3200 6400  
m
ft.  
4
5.6  
8
8
11  
16  
22  
32  
—
—
—
—
0.7–8.5  
0.6–6.0  
0.6–4.2  
0.6–3.0  
0.6–2.1  
0.6–1.5  
0.6–1.1  
0.6–0.8  
2ft. 4in.–27ft. 11in.  
2ft.–19ft. 8in.  
2ft.–13ft. 9in.  
2ft.–9ft. 10in.  
2ft.–6ft. 11in.  
2ft.–4ft. 11in.  
2ft.–3ft. 7in.  
5.6  
8
11  
16  
22  
32  
—
—
—
11  
16  
22  
32  
—
—
11  
16  
22  
32  
—
2ft.–2ft. 7in.  
The built-in flash has a minimum range of 0.6 m (2 ft.).  
In mode P, the maximum aperture (minimum f-number) is limited according to ISO  
sensitivity, as shown below:  
Maximum aperture at ISO equivalent of:  
100  
200  
400  
800  
1600  
3200  
6400  
2.8  
3.5  
4
5
5.6  
7.1  
8
If the maximum aperture of the lens is smaller than given above, the maximum value for  
aperture will be the maximum aperture of the lens.  
l
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Flash Compensation  
(P, S, A, and M Modes Only)  
Flash compensation is used to alter flash output by from –3EV to +1EV in increments  
of 1/3EV, changing the brightness of the main subject relative to the background.  
Flash output can be increased to make the main subject appear brighter, or reduced  
to prevent unwanted highlights or reflections.  
Press the Y button and rotate the sub-command  
dial until the desired value is displayed in the control  
panel. In general, choose positive values to make the  
main subject brighter, negative values to make it  
darker.  
Y button  
Sub-command dial  
At values other than 0.0, a Y icon will be displayed  
in the control panel and viewfinder after you release  
the Y button. The current value for flash  
compensation can be confirmed by pressing the Y  
button.  
0 EV  
Normal flash output can be restored by setting flash  
compensation to 0.0. Flash compensation is not  
reset when the camera is turned off.  
(Y button pressed)  
–0.3 EV  
+1.0 EV  
A Optional Flash Units  
Flash compensation is also available with optional SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, SB-400,  
and SB-R200 flash units. The SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, and SB-600 also allow flash  
compensation to be set using the controls on the flash unit; the value selected with the flash  
unit is added to the value selected with the camera.  
A See Also  
For information on choosing the size of the increments available for flash compensation, see  
Custom Setting b2 (EV steps for exposure cntrl., 0 211). For information on automatically  
varying flash level over a series of shots, see page 0 109.  
l
148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FV Lock  
This feature is used to lock flash output, allowing photographs to be recomposed  
without changing the flash level and ensuring that flash output is appropriate to the  
subject even when the subject is not positioned in the center of the frame. Flash  
output is adjusted automatically for any changes in ISO sensitivity and aperture.  
To use FV lock:  
1 Assign FV lock to the Fn button.  
Select FV lock for Custom Setting f3 (Assign Fn  
button, 0 230).  
2 Raise the flash.  
In P, S, A, M, and 0 modes, the flash can be raised  
by pressing the M button. In i, k, p, n, o, s,  
and w modes, the flash will pop up  
automatically when required.  
M button  
3 Focus.  
Position the subject in the center of the frame  
and press the shutter-release button halfway to  
focus.  
4 Lock flash level.  
After confirming that the flash ready indicator (M)  
is displayed in the viewfinder, press the Fn  
button. The flash will emit a monitor preflash to  
determine the appropriate flash level. Flash  
l
output will be locked at this level and FV lock  
icons (e) will appear in the viewfinder.  
Fn button  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 Recompose the photograph.  
6 Take the photograph.  
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to shoot. If desired,  
additional pictures can be taken without releasing FV lock.  
7 Release FV lock.  
Press the Fn button to release FV lock. Confirm that the FV lock icon (e) is no  
longer displayed in the viewfinder.  
D Using FV Lock with the Built-in Flash  
FV lock is only available with the built-in flash when TTL is selected for Custom Setting e3  
(Flash cntrl for built-in flash, 0 223).  
A Using FV Lock with Optional Flash Units  
FV lock is also available with SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, SB-400, and SB-R200 flash units  
(available separately). Set the optional flash to TTL mode (the SB-900 and SB-800 can also be  
used in AA mode; see the flash manual for details). While FV lock is in effect, flash output will  
automatically be adjusted for changes in flash zoom head position.  
When Commander mode is selected for Custom Setting e3 (Flash cntrl for built-in flash,  
0 223), FV lock can be used with remote SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, or SB-R200 flash  
units if (a) any of the built-in flash, flash group A, or flash group B is in TTL mode, or (b) a flash  
group is composed entirely of SB-900 and SB-800 flash units in TTL or AA mode.  
A Metering  
The metering areas for FV lock when using optional flash unit are as follows:  
Flash unit  
Flash mode  
i-TTL  
AA  
i-TTL  
AA  
Metered area  
4-mm circle in center of frame  
Area metered by flash exposure meter  
Entire frame  
Stand-alone flash unit  
l
Used with other flash units  
(Advanced Wireless Lighting)  
Area metered by flash exposure meter  
A (master flash)  
A See Also  
For information on using the depth-of-field preview or AE-L/AF-L button for FV lock, see  
Custom Setting f4 (Assign preview button, 0 232) or Custom Setting f5 (Assign AE-L/AF-L  
button, 0 232).  
150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Shooting Options  
t
Restoring Default Settings  
The camera settings listed below can be restored to  
default values by holding the QUAL and E buttons  
down together for more than two seconds (these  
buttons are marked by a green dot). The control  
panel turns off briefly while settings are reset.  
E button  
QUAL button  
Option  
Focus point 1  
Option  
Image quality  
Image size  
White balance  
Fine tuning  
ISO sensitivity  
Auto and scene modes  
P, S, A, M  
Autofocus (viewfinder)  
Autofocus mode  
AF-area mode  
n, x, 0, 1, 2, 3  
Default  
NORMAL  
L
0
85  
88  
Default  
Center  
Matrix  
0
96  
105  
97,  
106  
139  
109  
131  
148  
107  
Metering  
Auto > Normal 117  
AE/AF lock hold  
Off  
0
119  
101  
91  
Active D-Lighting  
Bracketing  
Picture Control settings 2  
Flash compensation  
Exposure compensation  
Flash mode  
Off  
Off  
Unmodified  
Off  
AUTO  
100  
Off  
AF-A  
Auto front-  
curtain sync  
Single-point AF  
39-point  
dynamic-area AF  
i, k, p, n, w  
m, w  
94  
50  
Auto+red-eye  
reduction  
Auto slow sync  
Front-curtain  
sync  
s
144  
Other shooting modes Auto-area AF  
Autofocus (live view/movie)  
Autofocus mode  
AF-area mode  
m, r, w, 1, 2, 3  
n, 0  
o
AF-S  
0, P, S, A, M  
FV lock  
Multiple Exposure  
Flexible program  
Off  
Off  
Off  
149  
152  
68  
Wide-area AF  
Normal-area AF 50  
t
Other shooting modes Face-priority AF  
1 Focus point not displayed if auto-area AF is  
selected for AF-area mode.  
2 Current Picture Control only.  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Multiple Exposure  
(P, S, A, and M Modes Only)  
Follow the steps below to record a series of two or three exposures in a single  
photograph. Multiple exposures can be recorded at any image quality setting, and  
make use of RAW data from the camera image sensor to produce colors noticeably  
superior to those in software-generated photographic overlays.  
❚❚Creating a Multiple Exposure  
Multiple exposures can not be recorded in live view. Exit live view before proceeding.  
Note that at default settings, shooting will end and a multiple exposure will be  
recorded automatically if no operations are performed for 30 s.  
A Extended Recording Times  
For an interval between exposures of more than 30 s, select On for the Image review  
(0 200) option in the playback menu and extend the monitor-off delay for image review  
using Custom Setting c4 (Monitor off delay, 0 215). The maximum interval between  
exposures is 30 s longer than the option selected for Custom Setting c4. If no operations are  
performed for 30 s after the monitor has turned off during playback or menu operations,  
shooting will end and a multiple exposure will be created from the exposures that have been  
recorded to that point.  
1 Select Multiple exposure.  
G button  
Press the G button to display the menus.  
Highlight Multiple exposure in the  
shooting menu and press 2.  
2 Choose the number of shots.  
Highlight Number of shots and press 2.  
The dialog shown at right will be displayed.  
Press 1 or 3 to choose the number of  
exposures that will be combined to form a  
single photograph and press J.  
t
152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Choose the amount of gain.  
Highlight Auto gain and press 2.  
The following options will be displayed.  
Highlight an option and press J.  
•
On: Gain is adjusted according to number  
of exposures actually recorded (gain for  
each exposure is set to 1/2 for 2 exposures,  
1/3 for 3 exposures, etc.).  
•
Off: Gain is not adjusted when recording multiple exposure. Recommended  
if background is dark.  
4 Select Done.  
Highlight Done and press J. A n icon will  
be displayed in the control panel and the  
Done option in the multiple exposure menu  
will be replaced by Reset. To continue  
shooting without taking a multiple  
exposure, return to the shooting menu and  
select Multiple exposure > Reset.  
5 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.  
In continuous high-speed and continuous  
low-speed release modes (0 78), the camera  
records all exposures in a single burst. In  
self-timer mode, the camera will automatically record the number of exposures  
selected in Step 2 on page 152, regardless of the option selected for Custom  
Setting c3 (Self-timer) > Number of shots (0 214). In other release modes,  
one photograph will be taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed;  
continue shooting until all exposures have been recorded (for information on  
interrupting a multiple exposure before all photographs are recorded, see page  
154).  
t
The n icon will blink until shooting ends.  
When shooting ends, multiple exposure  
mode will end and the n icon will no longer  
be displayed.  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚Interrupting Multiple Exposures  
Selecting Multiple exposure in the shooting menu while a  
multiple exposure is being recorded displays the options shown  
at right. To interrupt a multiple exposure before the specified  
number of exposures have been taken, highlight Cancel and  
press J. If shooting ends before the specified number of  
exposures have been taken, a multiple exposure will be created  
from the exposures that have been recorded to that point. If Auto gain is on, gain  
will be adjusted to reflect the number of exposures actually recorded. Note that  
shooting will end automatically if:  
• A two-button reset is performed (0 151)  
• The camera is turned off  
• The battery is exhausted  
• Pictures are deleted  
D Multiple Exposures  
Do not remove or replace the memory card while recording a multiple exposure.  
The information listed in the playback photo information display (including metering,  
exposure, shooting mode, focal length, date of recording and camera orientation) is for the  
first shot in the multiple exposure.  
A Interval Timer Photography  
If interval timer photography is activated before the first exposure is taken, the camera will  
record exposures at the selected interval until the number of exposures specified in the  
multiple exposure menu have been taken (the number of shots listed in the interval timer  
shooting menu is ignored). These exposures will then be recorded as a single photograph  
and multiple exposure mode and interval timer shooting will end. Cancelling multiple  
exposure cancels interval timer shooting.  
A Other Settings  
While multiple exposure mode is in effect, memory cards can not be formatted and some  
menu options will not be available.  
t
154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interval Timer Photography  
The camera is equipped to take photographs automatically at preset intervals.  
D Before Shooting  
Do not select self-timer (E) or remote (4) release mode when using the interval timer.  
Before beginning interval timer photography, take a test shot at current settings and view  
the results in the monitor.  
Before choosing a starting time, select Time zone and date in the setup menu and make  
sure that the camera clock is set to the correct time and date (0 237).  
Use of a tripod is recommended. Mount the camera on a tripod before shooting begins. To  
ensure that shooting is not interrupted, be sure the battery is fully charged.  
1 Select Interval timer shooting.  
G button  
Press the G button to display the menus.  
Highlight Interval timer shooting in the  
shooting menu and press 2.  
2 Choose a starting time.  
Chose from the following starting triggers.  
•
To start shooting immediately, highlight Now  
and press 2. Shooting begins about 3 s  
after settings are completed; proceed to  
Step 3.  
•
To choose a starting time, highlight Start time  
and press 2 to display the start time  
options shown at right. Press 4 or 2 to  
highlight hours or minutes and press 1 or  
3 to change. Press 2 to continue.  
3 Choose the interval.  
t
Press 4 or 2 to highlight hours or minutes  
and press 1 or 3 to choose an interval  
longer than the slowest anticipated shutter  
speed. Press 2 to continue.  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Choose the number of intervals and  
number of shots per interval.  
Press 4 or 2 to highlight number of  
intervals or number of shots; press 1 or 3 to  
change. Press 2 to continue.  
Number of Number Total  
intervals of shots/ number of  
interval shots  
5 Start shooting.  
Highlight On and press J (to return to the  
shooting menu without starting the interval  
timer, highlight Off and press J). The first  
series of shots will be taken at the specified  
starting time, or after about 3 s if Now was  
selected for Choose start time in Step 2. Shooting will continue at the selected  
interval until all shots have been taken. Note that because shutter speed and  
the time needed to record the image to the memory card may vary from shot to  
shot, the interval between a shot being recorded and the start of the next shot  
may vary. If shooting can not proceed at current settings (for example, if a  
shutter speed of A is currently selected in manual exposure mode or the  
start time is in less than a minute), a warning will be displayed in the monitor.  
t
156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D Out of Memory  
If the memory card is full, the interval timer will remain active but no pictures will be taken.  
Resume shooting (0 158) after deleting some pictures or turning the camera off and  
inserting another memory card.  
A Cover the Viewfinder  
To prevent light entering via the viewfinder interfering with exposure, remove the rubber  
eyecup and cover the viewfinder with the supplied DK-5 eyepiece cap (0 81).  
A Release Mode  
Regardless of the release mode selected, the camera will take the specified number of shots  
at each interval. In CH (continuous high speed) mode, photographs will be taken at a rate of  
up to 6 shots per second. In S (single frame) and CL (continuous low-speed) modes,  
photographs will be taken at the rate chosen for Custom Setting d6 (CL mode shooting  
speed, 0 217); in mode J, camera noise will be reduced.  
A Bracketing  
Adjust bracketing settings before starting interval timer photography. If exposure, flash, or  
ADL bracketing is active while interval timer photography is in effect, the camera will take  
the number of shots in the bracketing program at each interval, regardless of the number of  
shots specified in the interval timer menu. If white balance bracketing is active while interval  
timer photography is in effect, the camera will take one shot at each interval and process it  
to create the number of copies specified in the bracketing program.  
A During Shooting  
During interval timer photography, the Q icon in the control panel  
will blink. Immediately before the next shooting interval begins, the  
shutter speed display will show the number of intervals remaining,  
and the aperture display will show the number of shots remaining in  
the current interval. At other times, the number of intervals  
remaining and the number of shots in each interval can be viewed by pressing the shutter-  
release button halfway (once the button is released, the shutter speed and aperture will be  
displayed until the exposure meters turn off).  
To view current interval timer settings, select Interval timer  
shooting between shots. While interval timer photography is in  
progress, the interval timer menu will show the starting time, the  
shooting interval, and the number of intervals and shots remaining.  
None of these items can be changed while interval timer  
photography is in progress.  
t
Pictures can be played back and shooting and menu settings can be adjusted freely while  
interval timer photography is in progress. The monitor will turn off automatically about four  
seconds before each interval.  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚Pausing Interval Timer Photography  
Interval timer photography can be paused by:  
• Highlighting Start > Pause in the interval timer menu and pressing J  
• Turning the camera off and then on again (if desired, the memory card can be  
replaced while the camera is off)  
• Rotating the release-mode dial or live view switch  
To resume shooting:  
1 Choose a new starting time.  
Choose a new starting time as described on  
page 155.  
2 Resume shooting.  
Highlight Restart and press J. Note that if  
interval timer photography was paused  
during shooting, any shots remaining in the  
current interval will be canceled.  
❚❚Interrupting Interval Timer Photography  
Interval timer shooting will end automatically if the battery is exhausted. Interval  
timer photography can also be ended by:  
• Selecting Start > Off in the interval timer menu  
• Performing a two button reset (0 151)  
• Selecting Reset shooting menu in the shooting menu (0 202)  
• Changing bracketing settings (0 109)  
• Terminating multiple exposure shooting (0 154)  
Normal shooting will resume when interval timer photography ends.  
❚❚No Photograph  
The camera will skip the current interval if any of the following situations persist for  
eight seconds or more after the interval was due to start: the photograph or  
photographs for the previous interval have yet to be taken, the memory buffer is full,  
or the camera is unable to focus in AF-S or when single-servo AF is selected in AF-A  
(note that the camera focuses again before each shot). Shooting will resume with the  
next interval.  
t
158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Non-CPU Lenses  
By specifying lens data (lens focal length and maximum aperture), the user can gain  
access to a variety of CPU lens functions when using a non-CPU lens (0 270). If the  
focal length of the lens is known:  
• Power zoom can be used with SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, and SB-600 flash units  
(available separately)  
• Lens focal length is listed (with an asterisk) in the playback photo info display  
If the maximum aperture of the lens is known:  
• The aperture value is displayed in the control panel and viewfinder  
• Flash level is adjusted for changes in aperture  
• Aperture is listed (with an asterisk) in the playback photo info display  
Specifying both the focal length and maximum aperture of the lens:  
• Enables color matrix metering (note that it may be necessary to use center-  
weighted or spot metering to achieve accurate results with some lenses, including  
Reflex-NIKKOR lenses)  
• Improves the precision of center-weighted and spot metering and i-TTL balanced  
fill-flash for digital SLR  
The camera can store data for up to nine non-CPU lenses. To enter or edit data for a  
non-CPU lens:  
1 Select Non-CPU lens data.  
G button  
Press the G button to display the menus.  
Highlight Non-CPU lens data in the setup  
menu and press 2.  
2 Choose a lens number.  
Highlight Lens number and press 4 or 2 to  
choose a lens number between 1 and 9.  
t
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Enter the focal length and aperture.  
Highlight Focal length (mm) or Maximum  
aperture and press 4 or 2 to edit the  
highlighted item. Focal length can be  
selected from values between 6 and  
4,000 mm, maximum aperture from values  
between f/1.2 and f/22.  
A Focal Length Not Listed  
If the correct focal length is not listed, choose the closest value greater than the actual  
focal length of the lens.  
A Teleconverters and Zoom Lenses  
The maximum aperture for teleconverters is the combined maximum aperture of the  
teleconverter and the lens. Note that lens data are not adjusted when non-CPU lenses  
are zoomed in or out. The data for different focal lengths can be entered as separate  
lens numbers, or the data for the lens can be edited to reflect the new values for lens  
focal length and maximum aperture each time zoom is adjusted.  
4 Select Done.  
Highlight Done and press J. The specified  
focal length and aperture will be stored  
under the chosen lens number.  
t
160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To recall lens data when using a non-CPU lens:  
1 Assign non-CPU lens number selection to a camera control.  
Select Choose non-CPU lens number for Custom Setting f3 (Assign Fn  
button, 0 230) or Custom Setting f4 (Assign preview button, 0 232).  
2 Use the selected control to choose the lens number.  
Press the selected button and rotate the main command dial until the desired  
lens number is displayed in the control panel.  
Focal length Maximum aperture  
Lens number  
Control panel  
Fn button  
Main command dial  
t
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The GP-1 GPS Unit  
The GP-1 GPS unit (available separately) can be connected to the camera’s accessory  
terminal (0 281) using the cable supplied with the GP-1, allowing information on the  
camera’s current position to be recorded when photographs are taken. Turn the  
camera off before connecting the GP-1; for more information, see the GP-1 manual.  
❚❚Setup Menu Options  
The GPS item in the setup menu contains the options listed below.  
•
Auto meter-off: Choose whether the exposure meters turn off automatically when  
the GP-1 is attached.  
Option  
Description  
Exposure meters turn off automatically if no operations are performed for the  
time selected for Custom Setting c2 (Auto meter-off delay, 0 214; to allow the  
Enable camera time to acquire GPS data, the delay is extended by up to one minute after  
the exposure meters are activated or the camera is turned on). This reduces the  
drain on the battery.  
Disable Exposure meters do not turn off while the GP-1 is connected.  
•
•
Position: This item is only available if the GP-1 is connected,  
when it displays the current latitude, longitude, altitude, and  
Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) as reported by the GP-1.  
Use GPS to set camera clock: Select Yes to synchronize the camera clock with the time  
reported by the GPS device.  
A Coordinated Universal Time (UTC)  
UTC data is provided by the GPS device and is independent of the camera clock.  
A The ! Icon  
Connection status is shown by the ! icon:  
• ! (static): Camera has established communication with GP-1.  
Photo information for pictures taken while this icon is displayed  
include an additional page of GPS data (0 169).  
• !(flashing): The GP-1 is searching for a signal. Pictures taken while  
the icon is flashing do not include GPS data.  
t
•
No icon: No new GPS data have been received from the GP-1 for at least two seconds.  
Pictures taken when the ! icon is not displayed do not include GPS data.  
162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
More on Playback  
I
Full-Frame Playback  
To play photographs back, press the K button.  
The most recent photograph will be displayed in  
the monitor.  
K button  
Multi selector  
Sub-command dial  
O button  
K button  
G button  
L button  
W button  
X button  
J button  
Main command dial  
A Rotate Tall  
To display “tall” (portrait-orientation) photographs in  
tall orientation, select On for the Rotate tall option in  
the playback menu (0 200).  
A Image Review  
When On is selected for Image review in the playback menu (0 200), photographs are  
automatically displayed in the monitor for about 4 s after shooting (because the camera is  
already in the correct orientation, images are not rotated automatically during image  
review). In continuous release mode, display begins when shooting ends, with the first  
photograph in the current series displayed.  
I
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To  
Use  
Description  
View additional  
photographs  
Press 2 to view photographs in order recorded, 4 to view  
photographs in reverse order.  
View photo  
information  
Press 1 or 3 to view information about current photograph  
(0 165).  
View thumbnails  
Zoom in on  
photograph  
W
X
See page 171 for more information.  
See page 173 for more information.  
Confirmation dialog will be displayed. Press O again to  
delete photo.  
Delete images  
O
Change protect  
status  
To protect image, or to remove protection from protected  
L
image, press  
L
(
0
174).  
Return to  
shooting mode  
Monitor will turn off. Photographs can be taken  
immediately.  
/
K
Display menus  
G
J
See page 195 for more information.  
Create retouched copy of current photograph (0 248). If  
current picture is marked with 1 icon to show that it is a  
movie, pressing J starts movie playback (0 62).  
Retouch photo or  
play movie  
A Choosing a Memory Card Slot  
If two memory cards are inserted, you can select a card for  
playback by holding the D button and pressing 1 during full-  
frame or thumbnail playback. The dialog shown at right will be  
displayed; highlight the desired slot and press 2 to list the folders  
on the selected card, then highlight a folder and press J to view  
the pictures in the highlighted folder. The same procedure can be  
used when selecting pictures for operations in the playback  
(0 195) and retouch (0 248) menus or when copying white  
balance from an existing photograph (0 127).  
D button  
A See Also  
For information on choosing how long the monitor will remain on when no operations are  
performed, see Custom Setting c4 (Monitor off delay, 0 215).  
I
164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Photo Information  
Photo information is superimposed on images displayed in full-frame playback.  
Press 1 or 3 to cycle through photo information as shown below. Note that  
shooting data, RGB histograms, and highlights are only displayed if corresponding  
option is selected for Display mode > Detailed photo info (0 197; shooting data  
page 4 is only displayed if copyright information was recorded with the photographs  
as described on page 243). GPS data are only displayed if a GPS device was used  
when the photo was taken.  
1/12  
N
I
KON  
D7000  
1/12  
.
LATITUDE  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
N
º
35 36. 371'  
LONGITUDE  
E
º
139 43. 696'  
35m  
ALTITUDE  
.
TIME(UTC)  
15/04/2010  
1
/
125 F5  
6
100  
35mm  
:
:
10 02 27  
AUTO1 0,  
0
20100D7000 DSC_0001. JPG  
N
OR AL  
4928×3M264  
20100D7000 DSC_0001. JPG  
N
OR  
MAL  
N
I
KO  
N
D7000  
--  
100 1  
15 04 2010 10 : 02 : 27  
/
/
15  
/04/2010 10 : 02 : 27  
4928×3264  
File information  
Overview data  
GPS data  
-
100  
1
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
,
,
,
.
,
,
.
1
8000 F4  
8
TR SPDD AP  
E
MXP.  
M
O
E
, I S  
O
100  
0. 0  
F
ONCAL LENG  
T
H
35–mm  
–
5.6  
LE  
S
S
18 105 –  
3.  
5
A
F
V
R
S
V–R  
O
,
n
FLN  
A
HMTYD  
P
E
E
Built Wi n CMD  
H i g h l i g h t s  
--  
S
Y
C
O
SL  
O
100  
1
+
+
:
:
:
,
.
3
,
M
TTL, 3. 0  
A
C
TTL  
–––  
0
–––  
:
:
B
H i g h l i g h t s  
,
,
Select R  
G
B
,
,
Select R  
G
B
N
I
KO  
N
D7000  
100--1  
Highlights  
RGB histogram  
Shooting data  
pages 1–4  
❚❚File Information  
Protect status......................................................... 174  
Retouch indicator................................................. 248  
Focus point 1, 2 ..........................................................96  
AF area brackets 1  
1
2
3
1/12  
4
Frame number/total number of frames  
5
File name................................................................. 204  
Image quality............................................................85  
Image size ..................................................................88  
Time of recording.......................................... 27, 237  
Date of recording .......................................... 27, 237  
Current card slot ............................................ 46, 164  
Folder name ........................................................... 203  
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
_
20100D7000  
N
OR  
M
AL  
DSC 0001. JPG  
15  
/
04  
/
2010 10 : 02 : 27  
4928×3264  
I
1 Displayed only if Focus point is selected for Display mode (0 197).  
2 If photograph was taken using AF-S or with single-servo autofocus selected during AF-A, display shows  
point where focus first locked. If photograph was taken using AF-C or with continuous-servo autofocus  
selected during AF-A, focus point is only displayed if option other than auto-area AF was selected for AF-  
area mode and camera was able to focus.  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚Highlights 1  
Protect status..........................................................174  
Retouch indicator .................................................248  
Image highlights 2  
1
2
3
4
5
6
-
100 1  
Folder number—frame number .....................218  
Current channel 2  
Highlight display indicator  
H i g h l i g h t s  
,
,
Select R G B  
1 Displayed only if Highlights is selected for Display mode (0 197).  
2 Blinking areas indicate highlights for the current channel. Hold W button  
and press 4 or 2 to cycle through channels as follows:  
W button  
RGB  
R
G
B
(all channels)  
(red)  
(green)  
(blue)  
❚❚RGB Histogram 1  
Retouch indicator .................................................248  
4
5
White balance ........................................................117  
Color temperature.............................................122  
White balance fine-tuning .............................119  
Preset manual.....................................................123  
Current channel 2  
H i g h l i g h t s  
--  
100 1  
6
7
Histogram (RGB channel). In all histograms,  
horizontal axis gives pixel brightness, vertical  
axis number of pixels.  
,
,
Select R G B  
Image highlights 2  
Histogram (red channel)  
1
2
3
8
9
10  
Folder number—frame number .....................218  
Protect status ......................................................... 174  
Histogram (green channel)  
Histogram (blue channel)  
1 Displayed only if RGB histogram is selected for Display mode (0 197).  
2 Blinking areas indicate highlights for the current channel. Hold W button  
and press 4 or 2 to cycle through channels as follows:  
W button  
RGB  
R
G
B
(all channels)  
(red)  
(green)  
(blue)  
Highlight display off  
I
166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A Playback Zoom  
To zoom in on the photograph when the histogram is  
displayed, press X. Use the X and W buttons to zoom in  
and out and scroll the image with the multi selector. The  
histogram will be updated to show only the data for the  
portion of the image visible in the monitor.  
A Histograms  
Camera histograms are intended as a guide only and may differ from those displayed in  
imaging applications. Some sample histograms are shown below:  
If the image contains objects with a wide range of  
brightnesses, the distribution of tones will be relatively  
even.  
If the image is dark, tone distribution will be shifted to the  
left.  
If the image is bright, tone distribution will be shifted to  
the right.  
Increasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution of tones to the right, while  
decreasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution to the left. Histograms can  
provide a rough idea of overall exposure when bright ambient lighting makes it difficult to  
see photographs in the monitor.  
I
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚Shooting Data Page 1 1  
Shooting mode...........................................................6  
ISO sensitivity 2.......................................................101  
Exposure compensation.....................................107  
Optimal exposure tuning 3 ................................213  
Focal length .................................................. 159, 274  
4
5
:
.
,
,
,
,
,
.
1 8000 F4 8  
/
TR SP  
D
AP  
E
MXP.  
M
O
D
E
, I S  
O
H
100  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
0. 0  
F
ONCAL LENG  
T
35mm  
6
7
8
–
–
/
LE  
S
/
18 105  
3. 5 5.6  
–
/
A
F
V
R
S
V
R
O
,
n
Lens data  
–
FLN  
A
S
HM  
T
Y
P
E
E
Built Wi n CMD  
S
Y
C
O
D
SL  
O
Focus mode........................................................ 91, 99  
Lens VR (vibration reduction) 4........................... 26  
Flash type....................................................... 143, 275  
Commander mode...............................................225  
Flash mode..............................................................144  
+
+
:
:
:
:
:
,
.
,
M
TTL, 3. 0  
A
C
TTL 3 0  
–––  
–––  
B
9
--  
100 1  
N
I
KO  
N
D7000  
10  
11  
Protect status ......................................................... 174  
Retouch indicator................................................. 248  
1
2
3
Flash control ...........................................................223  
Flash compensation.............................................148  
Camera name  
Metering .................................................................. 105  
Shutter speed............................................................67  
Aperture......................................................................67  
12  
13  
Folder number—frame number .....................218  
1 Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode (0 197).  
2 Displayed in red if photo was taken with auto ISO sensitivity control on.  
3 Displayed if Custom Setting b5 (Fine tune optimal exposure, 0 213) has been set to a value other than  
zero for any metering method.  
4 Displayed only if VR lens is attached.  
❚❚Shooting Data Page 2 1  
Color space..............................................................141  
Picture Control.......................................................131  
Quick adjust 2..........................................................134  
Original Picture Control 3 ...................................137  
Sharpening..............................................................134  
4
5
6
:
:
HI TE BALANCE  
A
UTO1, 0,  
0
WCO  
L
O
R SPAC  
E
s
RGB  
PI  
C
TURE  
C
TRL  
: ST  
: 0  
ANDARD  
QUICK ADJUST  
7
8
9
CO TRANNST  
S
HA  
RPE ING  
:
:
3
0
BRNIG  
H
T
ESNS :0  
Contrast....................................................................134  
Brightness................................................................134  
S
A
TUR  
A
TI  
O
:0  
:0  
HUE  
Saturation 4..............................................................134  
Filter effects 5 ..........................................................134  
Hue 4 ..........................................................................134  
Toning 5........................................................... 134, 135  
Camera name  
10  
N
I
KO  
N
D7000  
--  
100 1  
11  
Protect status ......................................................... 174  
Retouch indicator................................................. 248  
1
2
3
12  
13  
Folder number—frame number .....................218  
White balance ........................................................ 117  
Color temperature ............................................ 122  
White balance fine-tuning............................. 119  
Preset manual..................................................... 123  
1
2
3
4
5
Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode (0 197).  
Standard, Vivid, Portrait, and Landscape Picture Controls only.  
Neutral, Monochrome, and custom Picture Controls.  
Not displayed with monochrome Picture Controls.  
Monochrome Picture Controls only.  
I
168  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚Shooting Data Page 3 *  
Protect status......................................................... 174  
Retouch indicator................................................. 248  
1
2
3
High ISO noise reduction .................................. 205  
Long exposure noise reduction ...................... 205  
Active D-Lighting ................................................. 139  
.
:
:
:
O
I SE RE  
D
U
C
H
N I ISO, NORM  
NAC  
T
D
L I GH  
T
O
R
A
L
.
–
.
D
LMMIG  
H
TI  
G
–
RET  
O
U
C
H
ARN FILTNER  
4
5
6
7
8
C
WYAM  
OTYPE  
TRI  
Retouch history..................................................... 248  
Image comment ................................................... 238  
Camera name  
:
.
CO  
MM  
E
N
T
SPRI  
G
H
A
S
CO  
M
E SP  
GN  
H
A
S
CO  
M
E 3636  
.
RI  
N
Folder number—frame number..................... 218  
N
I
KO  
N
D7000  
--  
100 1  
* Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode (0 197).  
❚❚Shooting Data Page 4 *  
Protect status......................................................... 174  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Retouch indicator................................................. 248  
Name of photographer ...................................... 243  
Copyright holder .................................................. 243  
Camera name  
:
:
ART I ST  
PYRI GHT  
NIKON TARO  
NIKON  
C
O
Folder number—frame number..................... 218  
N
I
KO  
N
D7000  
--  
100 1  
* Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode (0 197) and copyright information is appended to  
photograph (0 243).  
❚❚GPS Data *  
Protect status......................................................... 174  
Retouch indicator................................................. 248  
Latitude  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
.
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
LATITUDE  
N
º
35 36. 371'  
Longitude  
E
LONGITUDE  
º
139 43. 696'  
35m  
Altitude  
ALTITUDE  
15/04/2010  
TIME(UTC)  
Coordinated Universal Time (UTC)  
Camera name  
:
:
10 02 27  
Folder number—frame number..................... 218  
N
I
KO  
N
D7000  
--  
100 1  
I
*
Displayed only if GPS device was used when photo was taken (0 162); data for movies are for start of  
recording.  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚Overview Data  
Histogram showing the distribution of tones in  
the image (0 167).  
5
1/12  
N
I
KO  
N
D7000  
ISO sensitivity *.......................................................101  
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
Focal length .................................................. 159, 274  
GPS data indicator................................................162  
Image comment indicator.................................238  
Flash mode..............................................................144  
.
,
1 8000 F4 8  
100  
SLOW  
35mm  
/
+
.
–
1. 3  
10000 B6,  
20100D7000  
1 0  
M
1
L
OR  
Flash compensation.............................................148  
Commander mode...............................................225  
Exposure compensation.....................................107  
_
N
M
AL  
DSC 0001. JPG  
15  
/
04  
/
2010 10 : 02 : 27  
4928×3264  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
Frame number/total number of images  
Protect status ......................................................... 174  
Camera name  
1
2
3
4
Metering...................................................................105  
Shooting mode...........................................................6  
Shutter speed........................................................... 67  
Aperture..................................................................... 67  
Retouch indicator................................................. 248  
*
Displayed in red if photo was taken with auto ISO sensitivity control on.  
File name..................................................................204  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
1/12  
N
I
KO  
N
D7000  
Image quality ........................................................... 85  
Image size.................................................................. 88  
Time of recording...........................................27, 237  
Date of recording...........................................27, 237  
Current card slot.............................................46, 164  
Folder name............................................................203  
.
,
1 8000 F4 8  
100  
SLOW  
35mm  
/
+
.
–
1. 3  
10000 B6,  
20100D7000  
1 0  
M
1
_
15/04/2010 10 : 02 : 27  
4928x3M264  
N
OR AL  
DSC 0001. JPG  
White balance ........................................................117  
Color temperature.............................................122  
White balance fine-tuning .............................119  
Preset manual.....................................................123  
Color space..............................................................141  
Picture Control....................................................... 131  
Active D-Lighting..................................................139  
17  
18  
27  
I
170  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Thumbnail Playback  
To display images in “contact sheets” of four, nine, or 72 images, press the W button.  
W
W
W
W
X
X
X
X
Calendar  
playback  
Full-frame  
playback  
Thumbnail playback  
To  
Use  
W
Description  
Display more images  
Press W to increase the number of images displayed.  
Press X to reduce the number of images displayed.  
When four images are displayed, press to view  
highlighted image full frame.  
Display fewer images  
X
Use multi selector to highlight images for full-frame  
playback, playback zoom (0 173), deletion (0 175),  
or protection (0 174).  
Highlight images  
View highlighted image  
Delete highlighted  
image  
Change protect status of  
highlighted image  
J
O
Press J to display the highlighted image full frame.  
See page 175 for more information.  
See page 174 for more information.  
L
Return to shooting  
mode  
Monitor will turn off. Photographs can be taken  
immediately.  
/
K
Display menus  
G
See page 195 for more information.  
I
171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Calendar Playback  
To view images taken on a selected date, press the W button when 72 images are  
displayed.  
W
W
W
W
Full-frame  
playback  
Calendar  
playback  
Thumbnail playback  
Press the W button to toggle between the date list  
and the list of thumbnails for the selected date. Use  
the multi selector to highlight dates in the date list  
or to highlight pictures in the thumbnail list.  
Thumbnail list  
Date list  
The operations can be performed depend on whether the cursor is in the date list or  
the thumbnail list:  
To  
Use  
Description  
Toggle between date  
list and thumbnail list  
Exit to thumbnail  
playback/Zoom in on  
highlighted photo  
Press W button in date list to place cursor in thumbnail  
list. Press again to return to date list.  
W
•
•
Date list: Exit to 72-frame playback.  
Thumbnail list: Press and hold X button to zoom in on  
highlighted picture.  
X
Highlight dates/  
Highlight images  
•
•
Date list: Highlight date.  
Thumbnail list: Highlight picture.  
Toggle full frame  
playback  
Delete highlighted  
photo(s)  
•
•
•
•
Date list: View first picture taken on selected date.  
Thumbnail list: View highlighted picture.  
Date list: Delete all pictures taken on selected date.  
Thumbnail list: Delete highlighted picture (0 175).  
J
O
I
Change protect  
status of highlighted  
photo  
L
See page 174 for more information.  
Return to shooting  
mode  
Monitor will turn off. Photographs can be taken  
immediately.  
/
K
Display menus  
G
See page 195 for more information.  
172  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom  
Press the X button to zoom in on the image displayed in full-frame playback or on the  
image currently highlighted in thumbnail or calendar playback. The following  
operations can be performed while zoom is in effect:  
To  
Use  
Description  
Press X to zoom in to maximum of  
approximately 31× (large images), 23 ×  
(medium images) or 15 × (small  
Zoom in or out  
X / W  
images). Press W to zoom out. While  
photo is zoomed in, use multi selector  
to view areas of image not visible in  
monitor. Keep multi selector pressed to scroll rapidly to other  
areas of frame. Navigation window is displayed when zoom  
ratio is altered; area currently visible in monitor is indicated by  
yellow border.  
View other  
areas of image  
Faces (up to 35) detected during zoom  
are indicated by white borders in  
navigation window. Rotate sub-  
command dial to view other faces.  
Select faces  
View other  
images  
Rotate main command dial to view same location in other  
images at current zoom ratio.  
Changeprotect  
status  
L
See page 174 for more information.  
Return to  
shooting mode  
/
Monitor will turn off. Photographs can be taken immediately.  
See page 195 for more information.  
K
Display menus  
G
I
173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Protecting Photographs from Deletion  
In full-frame, zoom, thumbnail, and calendar playback, the L button can be used to  
protect photographs from accidental deletion. Protected files can not be deleted  
using the O button or the Delete option in the playback menu. Note that protected  
images will be deleted when the memory card is formatted (0 32).  
To protect a photograph:  
1 Select an image.  
Display the image in full-frame playback or playback zoom or highlight it in the  
thumbnail list in thumbnail or calendar playback.  
Full-frame playback  
Thumbnail playback  
Calendar playback  
2 Press the L button.  
The photograph will be marked with a a  
icon. To remove protection from the  
photograph so that it can be deleted, display  
the photograph or highlight it in the  
thumbnail list and then press the L  
button.  
L button  
A Removing Protection from All Images  
To remove protection from all images in the folder or folders currently selected in the  
Playback folder menu, press the L and O buttons together for about two seconds during  
playback.  
I
174  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Deleting Photographs  
To delete the photograph displayed in full-frame playback or the photograph  
highlighted in the thumbnail list, press the O button. To delete multiple selected  
photographs, all photographs taken on a selected date, or all photographs in the  
current playback folder, use the Delete option in the playback menu. Once deleted,  
photographs can not be recovered.  
Full-Frame, Thumbnail, and Calendar Playback  
Press the O button to delete the current photograph.  
1 Select an image.  
Display the image or highlight it in the thumbnail list in thumbnail or calendar  
playback.  
2 Press the O button.  
A confirmation dialog will be displayed.  
Calendar playback  
O button  
Full-frame playback Thumbnail playback  
(thumbnail list)  
3 Press the O button again.  
O button  
To delete the photograph, press the O button again. To exit  
without deleting the photograph, press the K button.  
A Calendar Playback  
During calendar playback, you can delete all photographs taken on a selected date by  
highlighting the date in the date list and pressing the O button (0 172).  
I
A See Also  
The After delete option in the playback menu determines whether the next or previous  
image is displayed after an image is deleted (0 200).  
175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Playback Menu  
The Delete option in the playback menu contains the following options. Note that  
depending on the number of images, some time may be required for deletion.  
Option  
Description  
Q Selected  
Delete selected pictures.  
n Select date Delete all pictures taken on a selected date (0 177).  
Delete all pictures in the folder currently selected for  
R All  
playback (0 195). If two cards are inserted, you can  
select the card from which pictures will be deleted.  
❚❚Selected: Deleting Selected Photographs  
1 Choose Selected.  
G button  
Press the G button and select Delete in  
the playback menu. Highlight Selected and  
press 2.  
2 Highlight a picture.  
Use the multi selector to highlight a picture  
(to view the highlighted picture full screen,  
press and hold the X button; to view images  
in other locations, hold the D button, press  
1, and select the desired card and folder as  
described on page 164).  
3 Select the highlighted picture.  
Press the W button to select the  
highlighted picture. Selected pictures are  
marked by a O icon. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to  
select additional pictures; to deselect a  
picture, highlight it and press W.  
I
W button  
176  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Press J to complete the operation.  
A confirmation dialog will be displayed;  
highlight Yes and press J.  
❚❚Select Date: Deleting Photographs Taken on a Selected Date  
1 Choose Select date.  
In the delete menu, highlight Select date  
and press 2.  
2 Highlight a date.  
Use the multi selector to highlight a date.  
To view the pictures taken on the  
highlighted date, press W. Use the multi  
selector to scroll through the pictures, or  
press and hold X to view the current picture  
full screen. Press W to return to the date  
list.  
W button  
3 Select the highlighted date.  
Press 2 to select all pictures taken on the  
highlighted date. Selected dates are marked  
with a M icon. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select  
additional dates; to deselect a date,  
highlight it and press 2.  
4 Press J to complete the operation.  
A confirmation dialog will be displayed;  
highlight Yes and press J.  
I
177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I
178  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connections  
Q
Connecting to a Computer  
This section describes how to use the supplied UC-E4 USB cable to connect the  
camera to a computer.  
Before Connecting the Camera  
Before connecting the camera, install the software on the supplied ViewNX 2 CD. To  
ensure that data transfer is not interrupted, be sure the camera EN-EL15 battery is  
fully charged. If in doubt, charge the battery before use or use an EH-5a AC adapter  
and EP-5B power connector (available separately).  
❚❚Supplied Software  
ViewNX 2 includes a “Nikon Transfer 2” function for copying pictures from the camera  
to the computer, where ViewNX 2 can be used to view and print selected images or  
to edit photographs and movies. For more information, see ViewNX 2 online help.  
❚❚Supported Operating Systems  
The supplied software can be used with computers running the following operating  
systems:  
•
Windows: Windows 7 (Home Basic/Home Premium/Professional/Enterprise/  
Ultimate), Windows Vista Service Pack 2 (Home Basic/Home Premium/Business/  
Enterprise/Ultimate) and Windows XP Service Pack 3 (Home Edition/Professional).  
ViewNX 2 runs as 32-bit applications in 64-bit editions of Windows 7 and Windows  
Vista.  
•
Macintosh: Mac OS X (version 10.4.11, 10.5.8, 10.6.4)  
See the websites listed on page xvii for the latest information on supported  
operating systems.  
A Connecting Cables  
Be sure the camera is off when connecting or disconnecting interface cables. Do not use  
force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle. Close the camera connector cover  
when the connector is not in use.  
D During Transfer  
Q
Do not turn the camera off or disconnect the USB cable while transfer is in progress.  
A Windows  
To visit the Nikon website after installing ViewNX 2, select All Programs > Link to Nikon  
from the Windows start menu (Internet connection required).  
179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting the Camera  
Connect the camera using the supplied UC-E4 USB cable.  
1 Turn the camera off.  
2 Turn the computer on.  
Turn the computer on and wait for it to start up.  
3 Connect the USB cable.  
Connect the USB cable as shown. Do not use force or attempt to insert the  
connectors at an angle.  
D USB Hubs  
Connect the camera directly to the computer; do not connect the cable via a USB hub  
or keyboard.  
4 Turn the camera on.  
5 Transfer photographs.  
After following the on-screen instructions to  
start Nikon Transfer 2, click Start Transfer to  
transfer photographs (for more information  
on using Nikon Transfer 2, start ViewNX 2 or  
Nikon Transfer 2 and select ViewNX 2 Help  
from the Help menu).  
Start Transfer  
6 Turn the camera off and disconnect the USB cable when transfer ends.  
Nikon Transfer 2 will close automatically when transfer is complete.  
Q
180  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Wireless and Ethernet Networks  
If the optional WT-4 wireless transmitter (0280) is attached, photographs can be  
transferred or printed over wireless or Ethernet networks and the camera can also be  
controlled from network computers running Camera Control Pro 2 (available  
separately). The WT-4 can be used in any of the following modes:  
Mode  
Function  
Transfer mode Upload new or existing photographs to computer or ftp server.  
Thumbnail select  
Preview photographs on computer monitor before upload.  
mode  
Control camera from computer using Camera Control Pro 2 (available  
separately).  
PC mode  
Print mode  
Print JPEG photographs on printer connected to network computer.  
For more information, see the WT-4 user’s manual. Be sure to update to the latest  
versions of the WT-4 firmware and supplied software.  
A Transfer Mode  
When the WT-4 is connected to the camera in transfer mode, the picture currently displayed  
in full-frame playback can be uploaded to the computer by pressing the D and J buttons.  
A Movies  
The WT-4 can be used to upload movies in transfer mode if Auto send or Send folder is not  
selected for Transfer settings. Movies can not be uploaded in thumbnail selector mode.  
A Recording and Viewing Movies During Transfer  
Movies can not be recorded or played back in image transfer mode when a WT-4 is  
connected to the camera (“image transfer mode” applies when images are being transferred  
and when images remain to be sent).  
A Thumbnail Select Mode  
Camera settings can not be changed from the computer in thumbnail select mode.  
A Camera Control Pro 2  
Camera Control Pro 2 software (available separately) can be used to control the camera from  
a computer. When Camera Control Pro 2 is used to capture photographs directly to the  
computer, the PC connection indicator (c) will appear in the control panel.  
Q
181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printing Photographs  
To print selected JPEG pictures on a PictBridge printer via a direct USB connection,  
follow the steps below.  
Take photographs  
Select photographs for printing using Print set (DPOF)  
(0189)  
Connect camera to printer (see below)  
Print photographs one at a  
Print multiple photographs  
Create index prints  
time (0183)  
(0185)  
(0188)  
Disconnect USB cable  
A Printing Via Direct USB Connection  
Be sure the EN-EL15 battery is fully charged or use an optional EH-5a AC adapter and EP-5B  
power connector. When taking photographs to be printed via direct USB connection, set  
Color space to sRGB (0141).  
Connecting the Printer  
Connect the camera using the supplied UC-E4 USB cable.  
1 Turn the camera off.  
2 Connect the USB cable.  
Turn the printer on and connect the USB cable as shown. Do not use force or  
attempt to insert the connectors at an angle.  
Q
D USB Hubs  
Connect the camera directly to the printer; do not connect the cable via a USB hub.  
182  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Turn the camera on.  
A welcome screen will be displayed in the monitor, followed by a PictBridge  
playback display.  
Printing Pictures One at a Time  
1 Select a picture.  
Press 4or 2to view additional pictures, or press  
1or 3to view photo information (0165). Press  
the X button to zoom in on the current frame  
(0173; press K to exit zoom). To view six  
pictures at a time, press the W button. Use the  
multi selector to highlight pictures, or press X to display the highlighted picture  
full frame; to view images in other locations, hold the D button, press 1, and  
select the desired card and folder as described on page 164.  
2 Display printing options.  
Press J to display PictBridge printing options.  
Q
183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Adjust printing options.  
Press 1or 3to highlight an option and press 2to select.  
Option  
Description  
Menu of page sizes will be displayed (options not  
supported by current printer are not listed). Press 1or  
Page size 3to choose page size (to print at default page size for  
current printer, select Printer default), then press J to  
select and return to previous menu.  
Menu shown at right will be displayed. Press 1or 3to  
choose number of copies (maximum 99), then press J  
to select and return to previous menu.  
No. of  
copies  
This option is available only if supported by current  
printer. Menu shown at right will be displayed. Press 1  
or 3to choose print style from Printer default (print  
Border using current printer settings), Print with border (print  
photo with white border), or No border, then press J  
to select and return to previous menu. Only options  
supported by current printer will be displayed.  
Menu shown at right will be displayed. Press 1or 3to  
choose Printer default (print using current printer  
Time  
settings), Print time stamp (print time and date of  
stamp  
recording on photo), or No time stamp, then press J to  
select and return to previous menu.  
This option is available only with printers that support  
cropping. Menu shown at right will be displayed. To exit  
without cropping picture, highlight No cropping and  
press J. To crop picture, highlight Crop and press 2.  
Cropping  
If Crop is selected, dialog shown at right will be  
displayed. Press X to increase size of crop, W to  
decrease. Choose position of crop using multi selector  
and press J. Note that print quality may drop if small  
crops are printed at large sizes.  
Q
184  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Start printing.  
Select Start printing and press J to start  
printing. To cancel before all copies have been  
printed, press J.  
D NEF (RAW)  
NEF (RAW) photographs (085) can not be printed by direct USB connection. JPEG copies of  
NEF (RAW) images can be created using the NEF (RAW) processing option in the retouch  
menu (0258).  
D Connecting Cables  
Be sure the camera is off when connecting or disconnecting interface cables. Do not use  
force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle. Close the camera connector cover  
when the connector is not in use.  
Printing Multiple Pictures  
1 Display the PictBridge menu.  
G button  
Press the G button in the PictBridge  
playback display (see Step 3 on page 183).  
2 Choose an option.  
Highlight one of the following options and  
press 2.  
•
•
Print select: Select pictures for printing.  
Select date: Print one copy of all the pictures  
taken on a selected date.  
•
Print (DPOF): Print an existing print order created with the Print set (DPOF)  
option in the playback menu (0189). The current print order will be  
displayed in Step 3.  
To create an index print of all JPEG pictures on the memory card, select Index  
print. See page 188 for more information.  
Q
185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Select pictures or choose a date.  
If you chose Print select or Print (DPOF) in  
Step 2, use the multi selector to scroll through  
the pictures on the memory card; to view  
images in other locations, hold the D  
button, press 1, and select the desired card  
and folder as described on page 164. To  
display the current picture full screen, press  
and hold the X button. To select the current  
picture for printing, hold the W button and  
press 1. The picture will be marked with a  
Z icon and the number of prints will be set  
to 1. Keeping the W button pressed, press  
1or 3to specify the number of prints (up to  
99; to deselect the picture, press 3when the  
number of prints is 1). Continue until all the  
desired pictures have been selected.  
W + 13: Choose number of copies  
X button: View photo full screen  
D Selecting Photographs for Printing  
NEF (RAW) photographs (085) can not be  
selected for printing. JPEG copies of NEF (RAW)  
images can be created using the NEF (RAW)  
processing option in the retouch menu  
(0258).  
If you chose Select date in Step 2, press 1or 3  
to highlight a date and press 2to toggle the  
highlighted date on or off. To view the  
pictures taken on the selected date, press  
W. Use the multi selector to scroll through  
the pictures, or press and hold X to view the  
current picture full screen. Press W again to  
return to the date selection dialog.  
W button: View  
photos for selected  
date  
Q
X button: View  
highlighted photo  
full screen  
186  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Display printing options.  
Press J to display PictBridge printing  
options.  
5 Adjust printing options.  
Press 1or 3to highlight an option and press 2to select.  
Option  
Description  
Menu of page sizes will be displayed (0184; options not supported by current  
Page printer are not listed). Press 1or 3to choose page size (to print at default page  
size size for current printer, select Printer default), then press J to select and return  
to previous menu.  
Menu of border options will be displayed (0184; options not supported by  
current printer are not listed). Press 1or 3to choose print style from Printer  
Border default (print at current printer settings), Print with border (print photo with  
white border), or No border, then press J to select and return to previous  
menu.  
Menu of time stamp options will be displayed (0184). Press 1or 3to choose  
Time Printer default (print at current printer settings), Print time stamp (print time  
stamp and date of recording on photo), or No time stamp, then press J to select and  
return to previous menu.  
6 Start printing.  
Select Start printing and press J to start  
printing. To cancel before all copies have  
been printed, press J.  
A Errors  
See page 308 for information on what to do if an error occurs during printing.  
Q
187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Creating Index Prints  
To create an index print of all JPEG pictures on the memory card, select Index print  
in Step 2 of “Printing Multiple Pictures” (0185). Note that if the memory card  
contains more than 256 pictures, only the first 256 images will be printed.  
1 Select Index print.  
Selecting Index print in the PictBridge menu  
(0185) displays the images on the memory card  
as shown at right.  
2 Display printing options.  
Press J to display PictBridge printing options.  
3 Adjust printing options.  
Choose page size, border, and time stamp options as described on page 187 (a  
warning will be displayed if the selected page size is too small).  
4 Start printing.  
Select Start printing and press J to start  
printing. To cancel before printing is complete,  
press J.  
Q
188  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Creating a DPOF Print Order: Print Set  
The Print set (DPOF) option in the playback menu is used to create digital “print  
orders” for PictBridge-compatible printers and devices that support DPOF.  
1 Choose Select/set for the Print set  
G button  
(DPOF) item in the playback menu.  
Press the G button and select Print set  
(DPOF) in the playback menu. Highlight  
Select/set and press 2(to remove all  
photographs from the print order, select  
Deselect all?).  
2 Select pictures.  
Use the multi selector to scroll through the  
pictures on the memory card (to view  
images in other locations, hold the D  
button and press 1). To display the current  
picture in full screen, press and hold the X  
W + 13: Choose number of copies  
button. To select the current picture for  
printing, hold the W button and press 1.  
The picture will be marked with a Z icon and  
the number of prints will be set to 1.  
Keeping the W button pressed, press 1or  
3to specify the number of prints (up to 99;  
X button: View photo full screen  
to deselect the picture, press 3when the  
number of prints is 1). Continue until all the  
desired pictures have been selected.  
3 Display imprint options.  
Press J to display data imprint options.  
Q
189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Select imprint options.  
Highlight the following options and press 2  
to toggle the highlighted option on or off (to  
complete the print order without including  
this information, proceed to Step 5).  
•
Data imprint: Print shutter speed and  
aperture on all pictures in print order.  
•
Imprint date: Print date of recording on all pictures in print order.  
5 Complete the print order.  
Highlight Done and press J to complete  
the print order.  
D Print Set (DPOF)  
To print the current print order when the camera is connected to a PictBridge printer, select  
Print (DPOF) in the PictBridge menu and follow the steps in “Printing Multiple Pictures” to  
modify and print the current order (0185). DPOF date and data imprint options are not  
supported when printing via direct USB connection; to print the date of recording on  
photographs in the current print order, use the PictBridge Time stamp option.  
The Print set (DPOF) option can not be used if there is not enough space on the memory  
card to store the print order.  
NEF (RAW) photographs (085) can not be selected using this option. JPEG copies of NEF  
(RAW) images can be created using the NEF (RAW) processing option in the retouch menu  
(0258).  
Print orders may not print correctly if images are deleted using a computer or other device  
after the print order is created.  
Q
190  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Viewing Photographs on TV  
The supplied EG-D2 audio video (A/V) cable can be used to connect the camera to a  
television or video recorder for playback or recording. A type C mini-pin High-  
Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI) cable (available separately from third-party  
suppliers) can be used to connect the camera to high-definition video devices.  
Standard Definition Devices  
Before connecting the camera to a standard television, confirm that the camera  
video standard (0237) matches that used in the TV.  
1 Turn the camera off.  
Always turn the camera off before connecting or disconnecting the A/V cable.  
2 Connect the A/V cable as shown.  
Connect to  
video device  
Audio (white)  
Connect to  
camera  
Video (yellow)  
3 Tune the television to the video channel.  
4 Turn the camera on and press the K button.  
During playback, image will be displayed both in the camera monitor and on  
the television screen. Note that the edges of images may not be displayed.  
Q
191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A Video Mode  
If no image is displayed, check that camera is correctly connected and that the option  
selected for Video mode (0237) matches the video standard used in the TV.  
A Television Playback  
Use of an EH-5a AC adapter and EP-5B power connector (available separately) is  
recommended for extended playback.  
A Slide Shows  
The Slide show option in the playback menu can be used for automated playback (0201).  
A Audio  
When a movie with sound recorded in stereo using an external microphone is viewed on a  
television connected to the camera via an A/V cable, the audio output is monaural. HDMI  
connections support stereo output. Volume can be adjusted using television controls; the  
camera controls can not be used.  
D Close the Connector Cover  
Close the camera connector cover when the connectors are not in use. Foreign matter in the  
connectors can interfere with data transfer.  
Q
192  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
High-Definition Devices  
The camera can be connected to HDMI devices using a type C mini-pin HDMI cable  
(available separately from third-party suppliers).  
1 Turn the camera off.  
Always turn the camera off before connecting or disconnecting an HDMI cable.  
2 Connect the HDMI cable as shown.  
Connect to high-definition device  
Connect to  
(choose cable with connector for  
camera  
HDMI device)  
3 Tune the device to the HDMI channel.  
4 Turn the camera on and press the K button.  
During playback, images will be displayed on the high-definition television or  
monitor screen; the camera monitor will remain off.  
D Close the Connector Cover  
Close the camera connector cover when the connectors are not in use. Foreign matter in the  
connectors can interfere with data transfer.  
Q
193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚HDMI Options  
The HDMI option in the setup menu controls output resolution and can be used to  
enable the camera for remote control from devices that support HDMI-CEC (High-  
Definition Multimedia Interface–Consumer Electronics Control, a standard that  
allows HDMI devices to be used to control peripherals to which they are connected).  
Output Resolution  
Choose the format for images output to the HDMI device.  
If Auto is selected, the camera will automatically select  
the appropriate format.  
Device Control  
If On is selected for HDMI >Device control in the setup  
menu when the camera is connected to a television that  
supports HDMI-CEC and both the camera and television  
are on, the display shown at right will appear on the  
television and the television remote can be used in place  
of the camera multi selector and J button during full-  
frame playback and slide shows. If Off is selected, the  
television remote can not be used to control the camera.  
A HDMI-CEC Devices  
When the camera is connected to an HDMI-CEC device, ) will appear in the control panel  
in place of the number of exposures remaining.  
A Device Control  
See the television manual for details.  
Q
194  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu Guide  
M
D The Playback Menu: Managing Images  
To display the playback menu, press G and select the D (playback menu) tab.  
G button  
The playback menu contains the following options:  
Option  
0
Option  
0
Delete  
176  
195  
196  
197  
197  
Image review  
After delete  
Rotate tall  
Slide show  
Print set (DPOF)  
200  
200  
200  
201  
189  
Playback folder  
Hide image  
Display mode  
Copy image(s)  
G button ➜ D playback menu  
Playback Folder  
Choose a folder for playback (0163):  
Option  
Description  
D7000  
All  
Pictures in all folders created with the D7000 will be visible during playback.  
Pictures in all folders will be visible during playback.  
Current  
Only pictures in the current folder will be visible during playback.  
U
195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ D playback menu  
Hide Image  
Hide or reveal pictures. Hidden pictures are visible only in the Hide image menu and  
can only be deleted by formatting the memory card.  
Option  
Description  
Select/set  
Hide or reveal selected pictures.  
Selecting this option displays a list of dates. To hide all  
pictures taken on a date, highlight the date and press 2.  
Selected dates are marked by a L; to reveal all pictures  
taken on a selected date, highlight it and press 2. Press J  
to complete the operation.  
Select date  
Deselect all? Reveal all pictures.  
D Protected and Hidden Images  
Revealing a protected image will also remove protection from the image.  
Follow the steps below to hide or reveal selected pictures.  
1 Choose Select/set.  
Highlight Select/set and press 2.  
2 Select pictures.  
W button  
Use the multi selector to scroll through the  
pictures on the memory card (to view the  
highlighted picture full screen, press and  
hold the X button; to view images in other  
locations as described on page 164, hold  
D and press 1) and press W to select the  
current picture. Selected pictures are  
marked by a R icon; to deselect a picture,  
highlight it and press W again. Continue until all the desired pictures have  
been selected.  
3 Press J.  
Press J to complete the operation.  
U
196  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ D playback menu  
Display Mode  
Choose the information available in the playback photo  
information display (0165). Press 1or 3to highlight an  
option, then press 2to select the option for the photo  
information display. A  
L
appears next to selected items; to  
deselect, highlight and press 2. To return to the playback  
menu, highlight Done and press J.  
G button ➜ D playback menu  
Copy Image(s)  
Copy images between memory cards. This option is only available when two  
memory cards are inserted in the camera.  
Option  
Description  
Select the card from which pictures will be copied.  
Select the pictures to be copied.  
Select source  
Select image(s)  
Select destination folder  
Copy image(s)?  
Select the folder to which pictures will be copied.  
Copy the images.  
To copy images:  
1 Choose Select source.  
Highlight Select source and press 2.  
2 Select the source card.  
Highlight the slot containing the card from  
which images will be copied and press J.  
3 Choose Select image(s).  
Highlight Select image(s) and press 2.  
U
197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Select the source folder.  
Highlight the folder containing the images  
to be copied and press 2.  
5 Make the initial selection.  
Before going on select or deselect individual  
images, you can mark all or all protected  
images in the folder for copying by choosing  
Select all images or Select protected  
images. To mark only individually selected  
images for copying, choose Deselect all  
before proceeding.  
6 Select additional images.  
W button  
Highlight pictures and press W to select or  
deselect (to view the highlighted picture full  
screen, press and hold the X button).  
Selected images are marked with a L. Press  
J to proceed to Step 7 when your selection  
is complete.  
7 Choose Select destination folder.  
Highlight Select destination folder and  
press 2.  
U
198  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8 Select a destination folder.  
To enter a folder number, choose Select  
folder by number, enter the number  
(0203), and press J. If the folder with the  
selected number does not already exist, a  
new folder will be created.  
To choose from a list of existing folders,  
choose Select folder from list, highlight a  
folder, and press J.  
9 Copy the images.  
Highlight Copy image(s)? and press J.  
A confirmation dialog will be displayed;  
highlight Yes and press J. Press J again to  
exit when copying is complete.  
D Copying Images  
Images will not be copied if there is insufficient space on the destination card. Be sure the  
battery is fully charged before copying movies.  
If the destination folder contains an image with the  
same name as one of the images to be copied, a  
confirmation dialog will be displayed. Select Replace  
existing image to replace the image with the image to  
be copied, or select Replace all to replace all existing  
images with the same names without further  
prompting. To continue without replacing the image,  
select Skip, or select Cancel to exit without copying  
any further images.  
Protect status is copied with the images but print marking (0189) is not. Hidden images  
can not be copied.  
U
199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ D playback menu  
Image Review  
Choose whether pictures are automatically displayed in the  
monitor immediately after shooting. If Off is selected, pictures  
can only be displayed by pressing the K button.  
G button ➜ D playback menu  
After Delete  
Choose the picture displayed after an image is deleted.  
Option  
Description  
Display following picture. If deleted picture was last frame, previous  
picture will be displayed.  
S Show next  
Display previous picture. If deleted picture was first frame, following  
picture will be displayed.  
T Show previous  
If user was scrolling through pictures in order recorded, following  
picture will be displayed as described for Show next. If user was  
scrolling through pictures in reverse order, previous picture will be  
displayed as described for Show previous.  
U Continue as before  
G button ➜ D playback menu  
Rotate Tall  
Choose whether to rotate “tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures  
for display during playback. Note that because the camera itself  
is already in the appropriate orientation during shooting,  
images are not rotated automatically during image review.  
Option  
On  
Description  
“Tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures are automatically rotated for display in the  
camera monitor. Pictures taken with Off selected for Auto image rotation (0239)  
will be displayed in “wide” (landscape) orientation.  
Off  
“Tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures are displayed in “wide” (landscape) orientation.  
U
200  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ D playback menu  
Slide Show  
Create a slide show of the pictures in the current playback folder (0195). Hidden  
images (0196) are not displayed.  
Option  
Start  
Description  
Start slide show.  
Frame interval Choose how long each picture will be displayed.  
To start the slide show, highlight Start and press J. The following operations can be  
performed while the slide show is in progress:  
To  
Press  
Description  
Press 4to return to previous frame, 2to skip to next  
frame.  
Skip back/skip ahead  
View additional photo info  
Change photo info displayed (0165).  
Pause/resume  
J
Pause or resume slide show.  
Exit to playback menu  
G
End slide show and return to playback menu.  
End slide show and exit to full-frame (0163) or  
thumbnail playback (0171).  
Exit to playback mode  
K
Press shutter-release button halfway to return to  
shooting mode.  
Exit to shooting mode  
The dialog shown at right is displayed when the show ends.  
Select Restart to restart or Exit to return to the playback menu.  
U
201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options  
To display the shooting menu, press G and select the C (shooting menu) tab.  
G button  
The shooting menu contains the following options:  
Option  
Reset shooting menu  
Storage folder  
File naming  
Role played by card in Slot 2  
Image quality  
0
202  
203  
204  
89  
85  
88  
87  
87  
Option  
Auto distortion control  
Color space  
Active D-Lighting  
Long exp. NR  
0
205  
141  
139  
205  
205  
101  
152  
60  
High ISO NR  
Image size  
ISO sensitivity settings  
Multiple exposure  
Movie settings  
Interval timer shooting  
Remote control mode  
JPEG compression  
NEF (RAW) recording  
White balance  
Set Picture Control  
Manage Picture Control  
117  
131  
136  
155  
80  
Note: Depending on camera settings, some items may be grayed out and unavailable. For  
information on the options available in each shooting mode, see page 292.  
G button ➜ C shooting menu  
Reset Shooting Menu  
Select Yes to restore shooting menu options to their default  
values (0295).  
U
202  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ C shooting menu  
Storage Folder  
Select the folder in which subsequent images will be stored.  
❚❚Selecting Folders by Folder Number  
1 Choose Select folder by number.  
Highlight Select folder by number and press 2.  
The dialog shown at right will be displayed.  
2 Choose a folder number.  
Press 4or 2to highlight a digit, press 1or 3to change. If a folder with the  
selected number already exists, a W, X, or Y icon will be displayed to the left  
of the folder number:  
• W : Folder is empty.  
• X : Folder is partially full.  
• Y : Folder contains 999 pictures or a picture numbered 9999. No further  
pictures can be stored in this folder.  
The card on which the folder is stored is shown by the card slot icon in the top  
right corner of the Select folder by number dialog. The card used for new  
folders depends on the option currently selected for Role played by card in  
slot 2 (089).  
3 Save changes and exit.  
Press  
J
to complete the operation and return to the shooting menu (to exit  
without choosing a folder, press the  
G
button). If a folder with the specified  
number does not already exist, a new folder will be created. Subsequent  
photographs will be stored in the selected folder unless it is already full.  
D Folder and File Numbers  
If the current folder is numbered 999 and contains 999 pictures or a picture numbered 9999,  
the shutter-release will be disabled and no further photographs can be taken. To continue  
shooting, create a folder with a number less than 999, or select an existing folder with a  
number less than 999 and less than 999 images.  
A Startup Time  
Additional time may be required for camera startup if the memory card contains a very large  
number of files or folders.  
U
203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚Selecting Folders from a List  
1 Choose Select folder from list.  
Highlight Select folder from list and press 2.  
2 Highlight a folder.  
Press 1or 3to highlight a folder.  
3 Select the highlighted folder.  
Press J to select the highlighted folder and return to the shooting menu (to  
exit without changing the active folder, press the G button). Subsequent  
photographs will be stored in the selected folder.  
G button ➜ C shooting menu  
File Naming  
Photographs are saved using file names consisting of “DSC_” or, in the case of images  
that use the Adobe RGB color space, “_DSC”, followed by a four-digit number and a  
three-letter extension (e.g., “DSC_0001.JPG”). The File naming option is used to select  
three letters to replace the “DSC” portion of the file name. For information on editing  
file names, see page 137. Note that the portion of the name that can be edited is a  
maximum of three characters long.  
A Extensions  
The following extensions are used: “.NEF” for NEF (RAW) images, “.JPG” for JPEG images,  
“.MOV” for movies, and “.NDF” for dust off reference data. In each pair of photographs  
recorded at image-quality settings of NEF (RAW)+JPEG, the NEF and JPEG images have the  
same file names but different extensions.  
U
204  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ C shooting menu  
Auto Distortion Control  
Select On to reduce barrel distortion when shooting with wide-  
angle lenses and to reduce pin-cushion distortion when  
shooting with long lenses (note that the edges of the area  
visible in the viewfinder may be cropped out of the final  
photograph, and that the time needed to process photographs  
before recording begins may increase). This option is  
recommended only with type G and D lenses (PC, fisheye, and  
certain other lenses excluded); results are not guaranteed with  
other lenses.  
A Retouch: Distortion Control  
For information on creating copies of existing photographs with reduced barrel and pin-  
cushion distortion, see page 261.  
G button ➜ C shooting menu  
Long Exp. NR (Long Exposure Noise Reduction)  
If On is selected, photographs taken at shutter speeds slower  
than 8 s will be processed to reduce noise (randomly-spaced  
bright pixels or fog), increasing the time required to record  
images by roughly 1.5 to 2 times. During processing, “l m”  
will blink in the shutter speed/aperture displays and pictures  
can not be taken (if the camera is turned off before processing is  
complete, the picture will be saved but noise reduction will not  
be performed). In continuous release mode, frame rates will  
slow and while photographs are being processed, the capacity  
of the memory buffer will drop.  
G button ➜ C shooting menu  
High ISO NR  
Photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities can be processed to reduce “noise.”  
Option  
High  
Normal  
Low  
Description  
S
T
U
Reduce noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, lines, or fog), particularly in  
photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities. Choose the amount of noise  
reduction performed from High, Normal, and Low.  
Noise reduction is only performed at ISO sensitivities of ISO 1600 and higher.  
The amount of noise reduction is less than the amount performed when Low  
is selected for High ISO NR.  
Off  
U
205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A Custom Settings:  
Fine-Tuning Camera Settings  
To display the Custom Settings menu, press G and select the A (Custom Settings  
menu) tab.  
G button  
Custom Setting groups  
Custom Settings are used to customize camera settings  
to suit individual preferences.  
Main menu  
A: Resetcustom  
settings  
(0207)  
U
206  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The following Custom Settings are available:  
Custom Setting  
Reset custom settings  
Autofocus  
Custom Setting  
Shooting/display  
d6 CL mode shooting speed  
d7 Max. continuous release  
d8 File number sequence  
d9 Information display  
0
207  
0
A
d
a
217  
217  
218  
219  
219  
219  
219  
220  
221  
a1 AF-C priority selection  
a2 AF-S priority selection  
a3 Focus tracking with lock-on  
a4 AF point illumination  
a5 Focus point wrap-around  
a6 Number of focus points  
a7 Built-in AF-assist illuminator  
a8 Live view/movie AF  
208  
208  
209  
209 d10 LCD illumination  
209 d11 Exposure delay mode  
210 d12 Flash warning  
210 d13 MB-D11 battery type  
211 d14 Battery order  
b
Metering/exposure  
e
Bracketing/flash  
b1 ISO sensitivity step value  
b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl.  
b3 Easy exposure compensation  
b4 Center-weighted area  
211  
211  
212  
213  
213  
e1 Flash sync speed  
222  
223  
223  
228  
229  
229  
e2 Flash shutter speed  
e3 Flash cntrl for built-in flash  
e4 Modeling flash  
e5 Auto bracketing set  
e6 Bracketing order  
b5 Fine tune optimal exposure  
c
Timers/AE lock  
c1 Shutter-release button AE-L  
c2 Auto meter-off delay  
c3 Self-timer  
c4 Monitor off delay  
c5 Remote on duration  
213  
214  
214  
215  
215  
f
Controls  
f1 D switch  
f2 OK button (shooting mode)  
f3 Assign Fn button  
f4 Assign preview button  
f5 Assign AE-L/AF-L button  
f6 Customize command dials  
f7 Release button to use dial  
f8 Slot empty release lock  
f9 Reverse indicators  
229  
229  
230  
232  
232  
233  
234  
234  
234  
235  
d
Shooting/display  
d1 Beep  
215  
216  
216  
216  
d2 Viewfinder grid display  
d3 ISO display and adjustment  
d4 Viewfinder warning display  
d5 Screen tips  
216 f10 Assign MB-D11 4 button  
Note: Depending on camera settings, some items may be grayed out and unavailable. For  
information on the options available in each shooting mode, see page 292.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
A: Reset Custom Settings  
Select Yes to restore Custom Settings to their default values  
(0296).  
U
207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
a: Autofocus  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
a1: AF-C Priority Selection  
When AF-C is selected for viewfinder photography  
(091), this option controls whether photographs can  
be taken whenever the shutter-release button is  
pressed (release priority) or only when the camera is in  
focus (focus priority).  
AF-mode  
button  
Main command dial  
Option  
Release  
Focus  
Description  
G
Photos can be taken whenever the shutter-release button is pressed.  
Photos can only be taken when the in-focus indicator (I) is displayed.  
F
Regardless of the option selected, focus will not lock when AF-C is selected for AF  
mode. The camera will continue to adjust focus until the shutter is released.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
a2: AF-S Priority Selection  
When AF-S is selected for viewfinder photography  
(091), this option controls whether photographs can  
be taken only when the camera is in focus (focus  
priority) or whenever the shutter-release button is  
pressed (release priority).  
AF-mode  
button  
Main command dial  
Option  
Release  
Focus  
Description  
G
Photos can be taken whenever the shutter-release button is pressed.  
Photos can only be taken when the in-focus indicator (I) is displayed.  
F
Regardless of the option selected, if the in-focus indicator (I) is displayed when AF-S  
is selected for AF mode, focus will lock while the shutter-release button is pressed  
halfway. Focus lock continues until the shutter is released.  
U
208  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
a3: Focus Tracking with Lock-On  
This option controls how autofocus adjusts to sudden large changes in the distance  
to the subject when AF-C is selected or continuous-servo autofocus is selected when  
the camera is in AF-A mode for viewfinder photography (091).  
Option  
Description  
C
(
D
)
E
5 (Long)  
When the distance to the subject changes abruptly, the camera waits for the  
specified period before adjusting the distance to the subject. This prevents  
the camera from refocusing when the subject is briefly obscured by objects  
passing through the frame.  
4
3 (Normal)  
2
1 (Short)  
The camera immediately adjusts focus when the distance to the subject  
changes. Use when photographing a series of subjects at varying distances in  
quick succession.  
Off  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
a4: AF Point Illumination  
Choose whether the active focus point is highlighted in red in the viewfinder.  
Option  
Description  
The selected focus point is automatically highlighted as needed to establish  
contrast with the background.  
v Auto  
The selected focus point is always highlighted, regardless of the brightness of  
the background. Depending on the brightness of the background, the  
selected focus point may be difficult to see.  
On  
Off  
The selected focus point is not highlighted.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
a5: Focus Point Wrap-Around  
Choose whether focus-point selection “wraps around” from one edge of the display  
to another.  
Option  
Description  
Focus-point selection “wraps around” from top to  
bottom, bottom to top, right to left, and left to right,  
so that, for example, pressing 2when a focus point  
at the right edge of the display is highlighted (q)  
selects the corresponding focus point at the left  
edge of the display (w).  
w
q
Wrap  
The focus-area display is bounded by the outermost focus points so that, for  
example, pressing 2when a focus point at the right edge of the display is  
selected has no effect.  
U
No wrap  
209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
a6: Number of Focus Points  
Choose the number of focus points available for manual focus-point selection.  
Option Description  
# 39 points Choose from the 39 focus points shown at right.  
Choose from the 11 focus points shown at right. Use for  
quick focus-point selection.  
A 11 points  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
a7: Built-in AF-assist Illuminator  
Choose whether the built-in AF-assist illuminator lights to assist  
the focus operation when lighting is poor.  
Option  
On  
Description  
The AF-assist illuminator lights when lighting is poor (viewfinder photography  
only). AF-assist illumination is only available when both of the following  
conditions are met:  
1. AF-S is selected for autofocus mode (091) or single-servo autofocus is selected  
when the camera is in AF-A mode.  
2. H (auto-area AF) is chosen for AF-area mode (094), or an option other than H  
is chosen and the center focus point is selected.  
The AF-assist illuminator does not light to assist the focus operation. The camera  
may not be able to focus using autofocus when lighting is poor.  
Off  
A The AF-Assist Illuminator  
The AF-assist illuminator has a range of about 0.5–3.0 m (1 ft. 8 in.–9 ft. 10 in.); when using  
the illuminator, use a lens with a focal length of 24–200 mm and remove the lens hood.  
A See Also  
For information on the shooting modes in which AF-assist is available, see page 292. See  
page 273 for restrictions on the lenses that can be used with AF assist.  
U
210  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
a8: Live View/Movie AF  
Choose how the camera focuses when autofocus is selected in live view or during  
movie recording.  
•
Autofocus mode: Select the focus mode used for autofocus in  
live view and movie recording (050). Choose from Single-  
servo AF and Full-time-servo AF.  
•
AF-area mode: Choose how the focus point for autofocus is  
selected during live view and movie recording (050).  
Choose from Face-priority AF, Wide-area AF, Normal-area  
AF, and Subject-tracking AF.  
b: Metering/Exposure  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
b1: ISO Sensitivity Step Value  
Select the increments used when making adjustments to ISO  
sensitivity. If possible, the current ISO sensitivity setting is  
maintained when the step value is changed. If the current  
setting is not available at the new step value, ISO sensitivity will  
be rounded to the nearest available setting.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
b2: EV Steps for Exposure Cntrl.  
Select the increments used when making adjustments to  
shutter speed, aperture, exposure and flash compensation, and  
bracketing.  
U
211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
b3: Easy Exposure Compensation  
This option controls whether the E button is needed to set exposure compensation  
(0107). If On (Auto reset) or On is selected, the 0 at the center of the exposure  
display will blink even when exposure compensation is set to 0.  
Option  
Description  
Exposure compensation is set by rotating one of the command dials (see  
note below). The setting selected using the command dial is reset when  
the camera or exposure meters turn off (exposure compensation settings  
selected using the E button are not reset).  
K On (Auto reset)  
As above, except that the exposure compensation value selected using  
the command dial is not reset when the camera or exposure meters turn  
off.  
On  
Exposure compensation is set by pressing the E button and rotating the  
main command dial.  
Off  
A Change Main/Sub  
The dial used to set exposure compensation when On (Auto reset) or On is selected for  
Custom Setting b3 (Easy exposure compensation) depends on the option selected for  
Custom Setting f6 (Customize command dials) > Change main/sub (0233).  
Customize command dials > Change main/sub  
Off  
On  
P
S
A
Sub-command dial  
Sub-command dial  
Main command dial  
Sub-command dial  
Main command dial  
Sub-command dial  
M
N/A  
A Show ISO/Easy ISO  
Custom Setting b3 (Easy exposure compensation) can not be used with Custom Setting d3  
(Show ISO/Easy ISO). Adjustments to either of these items reset the remaining item; a  
message is displayed when the item is reset.  
U
212  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
b4: Center-Weighted Area  
When calculating exposure, center-weighted metering assigns the  
greatest weight to a circle in the center of the frame. The diameter (φ)  
of this circle can be set to 6, 8, 10, or 13 mm or to the average of the  
entire frame.  
Option  
M φ 6 mm  
L φ 8 mm  
N φ 10 mm  
O φ 13 mm  
P Average  
Note that the diameter is fixed at 8 mm when a non-CPU lens is used.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
b5: Fine Tune Optimal Exposure  
Use this option to fine-tune the exposure value selected by the  
camera. Exposure can be fine tuned separately for each  
metering method by from +1 to –1 EV in steps of 1/6 EV.  
D Fine-Tuning Exposure  
Exposure fine tuning is not affected by two-button resets. Note that as the exposure  
compensation (E) icon is not displayed, the only way to determine how much exposure has  
been altered is to view the amount in the fine-tuning menu. Exposure compensation  
(0107) is preferred in most situations.  
c: Timers/AE Lock  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
c1: Shutter-Release Button AE-L  
At the default setting of Off, exposure only locks when the AE-L/  
AF-L button is pressed. If On is selected, exposure will also lock  
when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway.  
U
213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
c2: Auto Meter-off Delay  
Choose how long the camera continues to meter exposure  
when no operations are performed. The shutter-speed and  
aperture displays in the control panel and viewfinder turn off  
automatically when the exposure meters turn off.  
Choose a shorter meter-off delay for longer battery life.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
c3: Self-Timer  
Choose the length of the shutter release delay, the number of  
shots taken, and the interval between shots in self-timer mode.  
•
•
•
Self-timer delay: Choose the length of the shutter-release delay.  
Number of shots: Press 1and 3to choose the number of shots  
taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed.  
Interval between shots: Choose the interval between shots when  
the Number of shots is more than 1.  
U
214  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
c4: Monitor off Delay  
Choose how long the monitor remains on when no operations  
are performed during playback (Playback; defaults to 10 s) and  
image review (Image review; defaults to 4 s), when menus  
(Menus; defaults to 20 s) or information (Information display;  
defaults to 10 s) are displayed, or during live view and movie  
recording (Live view; defaults to 10 minutes). Choose a shorter  
monitor-off delay for longer battery life.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
c5: Remote on Duration  
Choose how long the camera will remain on stand-by in remote  
release mode (080). If no operations are performed for the  
selected period, remote shooting will end and the exposure  
meters will turn off. Choose shorter times for longer battery life.  
To reactivate remote mode after the timer has expired, press the  
camera shutter-release button halfway.  
d: Shooting/Display  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
d1: Beep  
Choose the pitch and volume of the beep that sounds when the camera focuses  
using single-servo AF (AF-S or when single-servo AF is selected for AF-A; 050, 91),  
when focus locks in live view, while the release timer is counting down in self-timer  
and delayed remote release modes (080), when a photograph is taken in quick-  
response remote or remote mirror-up mode (080), or if you attempt to take a  
photograph when the memory card is locked (033). Note that a beep will not  
sound in quiet-shutter release mode (mode J; 077), regardless of the option  
selected.  
•
Volume: Choose 3 (high), 2 (medium), 1 (low) or Off (mute).  
When an option other than Off is selected, c appears in the  
control panel and information display.  
•
Pitch: Choose High or Low.  
U
215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
d2: Viewfinder Grid Display  
Choose On to display on-demand grid lines in the viewfinder for  
reference when composing photographs (09).  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
d3: ISO Display and Adjustment  
If Show ISO sensitivity or Show ISO/Easy ISO is selected, the viewfinder and control  
panel will show ISO sensitivity in place of the number of exposures remaining. If  
Show ISO/Easy ISO is selected, ISO sensitivity can be set in modes P and S by rotating  
the sub-command dial or in mode A by rotating the main command dial. Select  
Show frame count to display the number of exposures remaining in the viewfinder  
and control panel.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
d4: Viewfinder Warning Display  
Selecting On enables the following viewfinder warnings:  
• s: Displayed when a monochrome Picture Control is  
selected  
• d: Displayed when the battery is low  
• t: Displayed if no memory card is inserted in the camera  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
d5: Screen Tips  
Choose On to display tool tips for items selected in the  
information display.  
U
216  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
d6: CL Mode Shooting Speed  
Choose the maximum frame advance rate in CL (continuous low  
speed) mode (during interval timer photography, this setting  
also determines the frame advance rate for single-frame). Note  
that the frame advance rate may drop below the selected value  
at slow shutter speeds.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
d7: Max. Continuous Release  
The maximum number of shots that can be taken in a single  
burst in continuous mode can be set to any value between 1  
and 100.  
A The Memory Buffer  
Regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting d7, shooting will slow when the  
memory buffer fills. See page 320 for more information on the capacity of the memory  
buffer.  
U
217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
d8: File Number Sequence  
When a photograph is taken, the camera names the file by  
adding one to the last file number used. This option controls  
whether file numbering continues from the last number used  
when a new folder is created, the memory card is formatted, or  
a new memory card is inserted in the camera.  
Option  
Description  
When a new folder is created, the memory card formatted, or a new memory card  
inserted in the camera, file numbering continues from the last number used or  
from the largest file number in the current folder, whichever is higher. If a  
photograph is taken when the current folder contains a photograph numbered  
9999, a new folder will be created automatically and file numbering will begin  
again from 0001.  
On  
File numbering is reset to 0001 when a new folder is created, the memory card is  
formatted, or a new memory card is inserted in the camera. Note that a new  
folder is created automatically if a photograph is taken when the current folder  
contains 999 photographs.  
Off  
As for On, except that the next photograph taken is assigned a file number by  
Reset adding one to the largest file number in the current folder. If the folder is empty,  
J
file numbering is reset to 0001.  
D File Number Sequence  
If the current folder is numbered 999 and contains either 999 photographs or a photograph  
numbered 9999, the shutter-release button will be disabled and no further photographs can  
be taken. Choose Reset for Custom Setting d8 (File number sequence) and then either  
format the current memory card or insert a new memory card.  
U
218  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
d9: Information Display  
At the default setting of Auto (AUTO), the color of the lettering in the information  
display (010) will automatically change from black to white or white to black to  
maintain contrast with the background. To always use the same color lettering,  
select Manual and choose Dark on light (B; black lettering) or Light on dark  
(W; white lettering). Monitor brightness will automatically be adjusted for maximum  
contrast with the selected text color.  
Dark on light  
Light on dark  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
d10: LCD Illumination  
At the default setting of Off, the control panel backlight (LCD  
illuminator) will only light while the power switch is rotated  
toward D. If On is selected, the control panel will be illuminated  
whenever the exposure meters are active (039). Select Off for  
increased battery life.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
d11: Exposure Delay Mode  
In situations where the slightest camera movement can blur  
pictures, select On to delay shutter release until about 1 s after  
the shutter-release button is pressed and the mirror is raised.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
d12: Flash Warning  
If On is selected, the flash-ready indicator (c) will blink in the viewfinder if the flash is  
required to ensure optimal exposure.  
U
219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
d13: MB-D11 Battery Type  
To ensure that the camera functions as expected when the optional MB-D11 battery  
pack is used with AA batteries, match the option selected in this menu to the type of  
batteries inserted in the battery pack. There is no need to adjust this option when  
using EN-EL15 batteries.  
Option  
Description  
1
2
3
LR6 (AA alkaline)  
HR6 (AA Ni-MH)  
FR6 (AA lithium)  
Select when using LR6 alkaline AA batteries.  
Select when using HR6 Ni-MH AA batteries.  
Select when using FR6 lithium AA batteries.  
A Using AA Batteries  
The MB-D11 takes one EN-EL15 rechargeable Li-ion battery or six AA alkaline, Ni-MH, or  
lithium batteries (an EN-EL15 is supplied with the camera; AA batteries are available  
separately). Fewer pictures can be taken with AA batteries (0321). The capacity of AA  
batteries drops sharply at temperatures below 20 °C (68 °F) and varies with make and  
storage conditions; in some cases, batteries may cease to function before their expiry date.  
Some AA batteries can not be used; due to their performance characteristics and limited  
capacity, alkaline batteries should only be used if no alternative is available and then only at  
warmer temperatures. The camera shows the level of AA batteries as follows:  
Control panel  
L
Viewfinder  
—
d
Description  
Batteries fully charged.  
I
Low battery. Ready fresh batteries.  
H
(blinks)  
d
(blinks)  
Shutter release disabled. Change batteries.  
U
220  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
d14: Battery Order  
Choose whether the battery in the camera or the batteries in the  
battery pack are used first when an optional MB-D11 battery  
pack is attached. Note that if the MB-D11 is powered by an  
optional EH-5a AC adapter and EP-5B power connector, the AC  
adapter will be used regardless of the option selected.  
A s icon is displayed in the camera control panel when the  
batteries in the MB-D11 are in use. The information display  
shows the type of battery inserted in the MB-D11 as follows:  
Icon  
Battery type  
$ EN-EL15 rechargeable Li-ion battery  
w AA batteries  
U
221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
e: Bracketing/Flash  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
e1: Flash Sync Speed  
This option controls flash sync speed.  
Option  
Description  
Use auto FP high-speed sync with SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, and  
SB-R200 flash units. If other flash units are used, shutter speed is set to 1/320 s.  
When the camera shows a shutter speed of 1/320 s in mode P or A, auto FP high-  
speed sync will be activated if the actual shutter speed is faster than 1/320 s.  
Use auto FP high-speed sync with SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, and  
SB-R200 flash units. If other flash units are used, shutter speed is set to 1/250 s.  
When the camera shows a shutter speed of 1/250 s in mode P or A, auto FP high-  
speed sync will be activated if the actual shutter speed is faster than 1/250 s.  
1/320 s  
(Auto FP)  
1/250 s  
(Auto FP)  
1/250 s–1/60 s Flash sync speed set to selected value.  
A Fixing Shutter Speed at the Flash Sync Speed Limit  
To fix shutter speed at the sync speed limit in mode S or M, select the next shutter speed after  
the slowest possible shutter speed (30 s or bulb). An X (flash sync indicator) will be displayed  
in the control panel and viewfinder.  
A Auto FP High-Speed Sync  
Allows the flash to be used at the highest shutter speed supported by the camera, making it  
possible to choose the maximum aperture for reduced depth of field even when the subject  
is backlit in bright sunlight. The information display flash mode indicator shows “FP” when  
auto FP high-speed sync is active (0278).  
U
222  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚Flash Control at 1/320 s (Auto FP)  
When 1/320 s (Auto FP) is selected for Custom Setting e1 (Flash sync speed,  
0222), the built-in flash can be used at shutter speeds as fast as 1/320 s, while  
optional SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, and SB-R200 flash units can be used at any  
shutter speed (Auto FP High-Speed Sync).  
Flash sync speed  
1/320 s (Auto FP)  
1/250 s (Auto FP)  
1/250 s  
Optionalflash  
Optionalflash  
Optionalflash  
Built-in flash  
Built-in flash  
Built-in flash  
Shutter speed  
1/8,000–1/320 s  
1/320–1/250 s  
1/250–30 s  
unit  
unit  
unit  
—
Auto FP  
—
—
Auto FP  
Auto FP  
Flash sync  
—
—
—
—
Flash sync *  
* Flash range drops as shutter speed increases. Flash range will nevertheless be greater than  
that obtained at the same speeds with Auto FP.  
D The Flash-Ready Indicator  
When the flash fires at full power, the flash-indicator in the camera viewfinder will blink to  
warn that the resulting photograph may be underexposed. Note that the flash-ready  
indicators on optional flash units will not display this warning when 1/320 s (Auto FP) is  
selected.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
e2: Flash Shutter Speed  
This option determines the slowest shutter speed available  
when front- or rear-curtain sync or red-eye reduction is used in  
mode P or A (regardless of the setting chosen, shutter speeds  
can be as slow as 30 s in S and M modes or at flash settings of  
slow sync, slow rear-curtain sync, or red-eye reduction with slow  
sync). Options range from 1/60 s (1/60 s) to 30 s (30 s).  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
e3: Flash Cntrl for Built-in Flash  
Choose the flash mode for the built-in flash.  
Option  
1 TTL  
Description  
Flash output is adjusted automatically in response to shooting  
conditions.  
Choose the flash level (0224). The camera does not emit monitor pre-  
flashes.  
2
Manual  
The flash fires repeatedly while the shutter is open, producing a strobe-  
light effect (0224).  
3 Repeating flash  
U
Use the built-in flash as a master flash controlling one or more remote  
optional flash units (0225).  
4 Commander mode  
223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚Manual  
Choose a flash level between Full and 1/128 (1/128 of full power). At full power, the  
built-in flash has a Guide Number of 12/39 (m/ft., ISO 100, 20°C/68°F).  
❚❚Repeating Flash  
The flash fires repeatedly while the shutter is open, producing  
a strobe-light effect. Press 4or 2to highlight the following  
options, 1or 3to change.  
Option  
Description  
Output Choose flash output (expressed as a fraction of full power).  
Choose the number of times the flash fires at the selected  
output. Note that depending on shutter speed and the  
option selected for Frequency, the actual number of flashes  
Times  
may be less than selected.  
Frequency Choose how often the flash fires per second.  
A Flash Control Mode  
The flash control mode for the built-in flash is shown in the  
information display.  
A “Manual” and “Repeating Flash”  
Y icons blink in the control panel and viewfinder when these options are selected.  
A The SB-400  
When an optional SB-400 flash unit is attached and turned on, Custom  
Setting e3 changes to Optional flash, allowing the flash control mode  
for the SB-400 to be selected from TTL and Manual (Repeating flash  
and Commander mode options are not available).  
A “Times“  
The options available for Repeating Flash > Times are determined by flash output.  
Output  
1/4  
Options available for “Times”  
Output  
1/32  
Options available for “Times”  
2–10, 15  
2
1/8  
1/16  
2–5  
2–10  
1/64  
1/128  
2–10, 15, 20, 25  
2–10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35  
U
224  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚Commander Mode  
Use the built-in flash as a master flash controlling one or more remote optional  
SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, or SB-R200 flash units in up to two groups (A and B)  
using advanced wireless lighting.  
Selecting this option displays the menu shown at right. Press 4  
or 2to highlight the following options, 1or 3to change.  
Option  
Built-in  
flash  
Description  
Choose a flash mode for the built-in flash (commander flash).  
i-TTL mode. Choose flash compensation from values between +3.0 and –3.0 EV in  
increments of 1/3 EV.  
Choose the flash level from values between 1/1 and 1/128 (1/128 of full power).  
The built-in flash does not fire, although remote flash units do. The built-in flash  
must be raised so that it can emit monitor pre-flashes.  
TTL  
M
– –  
Group A Choose a flash mode for all flash units in group A.  
i-TTL mode. Choose flash compensation from values between +3.0 and –3.0 EV in  
increments of 1/3 EV.  
TTL  
Auto aperture (available only with SB-900 and SB-800 flash units). Choose flash  
AA  
compensation from values between +3.0 and –3.0 EV in increments of 1/3 EV.  
M
Choose the flash level from values between 1/1 and 1/128 (1/128 of full power).  
– – The flash units in this group do not fire.  
Choose a flash mode for all flash units in group B. The options available are the  
same as those listed for Group A, above.  
Group B  
Choose from channels 1–4. All flash units in both groups must be set to the same  
channel.  
Channel  
U
225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Follow the steps below to take photographs in commander mode.  
1 Adjust settings for the built-in flash.  
Choose the flash control mode and output level for the  
built-in flash. Note that output level can not be adjusted  
in – – mode.  
2 Adjust settings for group A.  
Choose the flash control mode and output level for the  
flash units in group A.  
3 Adjust settings for group B.  
Choose the flash control mode and output level for the  
flash units in group B.  
4 Select the channel.  
5 Press J.  
U
226  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6 Compose the shot.  
Compose the shot and arrange the flash units as shown below. Note that the  
maximum distance at which the remote flash units can be placed may vary with  
shooting conditions.  
Wireless remote sensors  
on flash units should face  
camera.  
60 ° or less  
10 m/33 ft. or less 30 ° or less  
5 m/15 ft. or  
less  
Camera  
(built-in flash)  
30 ° or less  
5 m/15 ft. or less  
60 ° or less  
7 Set the remote flash units to the selected channel.  
Turn all the remote flash units on and set them to the channel selected in  
Step 4. See the flash unit instruction manuals for details.  
8 Raise the built-in flash.  
Press the M button to raise the built-in flash. Note that even if – – is selected for  
Built-in flash>Mode, the built-in flash must be raised so that monitor  
preflashes will be emitted.  
9 Frame the photograph, focus, and shoot.  
After confirming that the camera flash-ready light and the flash-ready lights for  
all other flash units are lit, frame the photograph, focus, and shoot. FV lock  
(0149) can be used if desired.  
U
227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A The Flash Sync Mode Display  
M does not appear in the control panel flash sync mode display when – – is selected for Built-  
in flash > Mode.  
A Flash Compensation  
The flash compensation value selected with the Y (M) button and sub-command dial is  
added to the flash compensation values selected for the built-in flash, group A, and group B  
in the Commander mode menu. A Y icon is displayed in the control panel and viewfinder  
when a flash compensation value other than 0 is selected for Built-in flash > TTL. The Y  
icon flashes when the built-in flash is in mode M.  
D Commander Mode  
Position the sensor windows on the remote flash units to pick up the monitor preflashes  
from the built-in flash (particular care is required if the camera is not mounted a tripod). Be  
sure that direct light or strong reflections from the remote flash units do not enter the  
camera lens (in TTL mode) or the photocells on the remote flash units (AA mode), as this may  
interfere with exposure. To prevent timing flashes emitted by the built-in flash from  
appearing in photographs taken at short range, choose low ISO sensitivities or small  
apertures (large f-numbers) or use an optional SG-3IR infrared panel for the built-in flash. An  
SG-3IR is required for best results with rear-curtain sync, which produces brighter timing  
flashes. After positioning the remote flash units, take a test shot and view the results in the  
camera monitor.  
Although there is no limit on the number of remote flash units that may be used, the  
practical maximum is three. With more than this number, the light emitted by the remote  
flash units will interfere with performance.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
e4: Modeling Flash  
If On is selected when the camera is being used with the built-in  
flash or an optional SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, or SB-R200  
flash unit, a modeling flash will be emitted when the camera  
depth-of-field preview button is pressed (072). No modeling  
flash is emitted if Off is selected.  
U
228  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
e5: Auto Bracketing Set  
Choose the setting or settings affected by bracketing (0109). Choose AE & flash  
(j) to perform both exposure and flash-level bracketing, AE only (k) to bracket only  
exposure, Flash only (l) to perform only flash-level bracketing, WB bracketing (m)  
to perform white-balance bracketing (0112), or ADL bracketing (y) to perform  
Active D-Lighting bracketing (0114). Note that white balance bracketing is not  
available at image quality settings of NEF (RAW) or NEF (RAW) + JPEG.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
e6: Bracketing Order  
At the default setting of MTR > under > over (H), exposure, flash, and white balance  
bracketing are performed in the order described on pages 109 and 112. If  
Under > MTR > over (I) is selected, shooting will proceed in order from the  
lowest to the highest value. This setting has no effect on ADL bracketing.  
f: Controls  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
f1: D Switch  
Choose what happens when the power switch is rotated to D.  
Option  
Description  
LCD backlight (D)  
Control panel backlight illuminates for 6 s.  
D
Control panel backlight illuminates and shooting information is  
displayed in monitor.  
Dand information display  
0
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
f2: OK Button (Shooting Mode)  
Choose the role played by the J button during shooting: selecting the center focus  
point (J Select center focus point), highlighting the active focus point  
(K Highlight active focus point), or none (Not used).  
U
229  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
f3: Assign Fn Button  
Choose the role played by the Fn button.  
Option  
Description  
Preview  
Press the Fn button to preview depth of field (072).  
q
Press the Fn button to lock flash value (built-in flash and SB-900, SB-800,  
SB-700, SB-600, SB-400, and SB-R200 flash units only, 0149). Press again  
to cancel FV lock.  
FV lock  
r
AE/AF lock  
Focus and exposure lock while the Fn button is pressed.  
B
C
AE lock only Exposure locks while the Fn button is pressed.  
AE lock  
(Hold)  
Exposure locks when the Fn button is pressed, and remains locked until  
the button is pressed a second time or the exposure meters turn off.  
E
AF lock only Focus locks while the Fn button is pressed.  
F
s
Flash off  
The flash will not fire in photos taken while the Fn button is pressed.  
If the Fn button is pressed while exposure, flash, or ADL bracketing is active  
in single frame or quiet shutter-release mode, all shots in the current  
bracketing program will be taken each time the shutter-release button is  
pressed. If white balance bracketing is active or continuous release mode  
(mode CH or CL) is selected, the camera will repeat the bracketing burst  
while the shutter-release button is held down (in single frame release  
mode, photographs will be taken at about 6 fps).  
Bracketing  
burst  
t
Active  
Press the Fn button and rotate the main command dial to choose Active  
y
D-Lighting D-Lighting (0139).  
If image quality is set to JPEG fine, JPEG normal, or JPEG basic, “RAW”  
will be displayed in the control panel and an NEF (RAW) copy will be  
recorded with the next picture taken after the Fn button is pressed (to  
record NEF/RAW copies with a series of photographs, keep the shutter-  
release button pressed halfway between shots). To exit without recording  
an NEF (RAW) copy, press the Fn button again.  
+NEF (RAW)  
e
Matrix  
metering  
Center-  
weighted  
metering  
Matrix metering is activated while the Fn button is pressed.  
L
M
Center-weighted metering is activated while the Fn button is pressed.  
U
230  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Option  
Spot  
metering  
Description  
Spot metering is activated while the Fn button is pressed.  
N
Press the Fn button and rotate the main command dial to turn the framing  
grid display in the viewfinder on or off (09).  
Framing grid  
9
Viewfinder  
virtual  
horizon  
Press the Fn button to view or hide a virtual horizon display in the  
viewfinder (0231).  
m
Access top  
item in MY  
MENU  
Press the Fn button to jump to the top item in “MY MENU.” Select this  
option for quick access to a frequently-used menu item.  
O
If the Fn button is pressed when the command dials are rotated, changes  
1 step spd/ to shutter speed (modes S and M) and aperture (modes A and M) are made  
v
aperture  
in increments of 1 EV, regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting  
b2 (EV steps for exposure cntrl., 0211).  
Choose non-  
CPU lens  
number  
Press the Fn button and rotate a command dial to choose a lens number  
specified using the Non-CPU lens data option (0159).  
w
Fn button performs same function as K button. Select when using a  
telephoto lens or in other circumstances in which it is difficult to operate  
the K button with your left hand.  
Playback  
K
Start movie  
recording  
Press the Fn button in live view to start movie recording (057).  
0
A Viewfinder Virtual Horizon  
When Viewfinder virtual horizon is selected for Custom Setting f3 (Assign Fn button), the  
exposure indicator in the viewfinder can be used as a tilt meter. Press the Fn button to toggle  
between exposure and tilt meter displays.  
Camera tilted right  
Camera level  
Camera tilted left  
Viewfinder  
Note that the display may not be accurate when the camera is tilted at a sharp angle forward  
or back.  
U
231  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
f4: Assign Preview Button  
Choose the role played by the depth-of-field preview button.  
The options available are the same as for Assign Fn button  
(0230); the default setting is Preview.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
f5: Assign AE-L/AF-L Button  
Choose the role played by the AE-L/AF-L button.  
Option  
Description  
AE/AF Focus and exposure lock while the AE-L/AF-L button is  
B
C
F
lock  
pressed.  
AE lock  
only  
Exposure locks while the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed.  
AF lock  
only  
Focus locks while the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed.  
Exposure locks when the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed, and  
remains locked until the button is pressed a second time  
or the exposure meters turn off.  
AE lock  
(Hold)  
E
The AE-L/AF-L button initiates autofocus. The shutter-  
release button can not be used to focus.  
A
AF-ON  
Press the AE-L/AF-L button to lock flash value (built-in  
flash and SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, SB-400, and  
SB-R200 flash units only, 0149). Press again to cancel  
FV lock.  
FV lock  
r
U
232  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
This option controls the operation of the main and sub-command dials.  
f6: Customize Command Dials  
•
Reverse rotation: Controls the direction of the command dials. Choose No for normal  
command dial operation, Yes to reverse the rotation of the command dials. This  
setting also applies to the command dials for the MB-D11.  
•
Change main/sub: If Off is selected, the main command dial controls shutter speed  
and the sub-command dial controls aperture. Select On (Mode A) to use the main  
command dial to select aperture in shooting mode A, On to use the main  
command dial to select aperture in modes A and M and the sub-command dial to  
select shutter speed in modes S and M. This setting also applies to the command  
dials for the MB-D11.  
•
Aperture setting: If Sub-command dial is selected, aperture can only be adjusted  
with the sub-command dial (or with the main command dial if On is selected for  
Change main/sub). Note that except in the case of PC-E NIKKOR lenses, the sub-  
command dial can not be used to adjust aperture during live view; adjust aperture  
before starting live view. If Aperture ring is selected, aperture can only be  
adjusted with the lens aperture ring and the camera aperture display will show  
aperture in increments of 1 EV (aperture for type G lenses is still set using the sub-  
command dial). Note that regardless of the setting chosen, the aperture ring must  
be used to adjust aperture when a non-CPU lens is attached.  
•
Menus and playback: If Off is selected, the multi selector is used to choose the picture  
displayed during full-frame playback, highlight thumbnails, and navigate menus.  
If On or On (image review excluded) is selected, the main command dial can be  
used to choose the picture displayed during full-frame playback, move the cursor  
left or right during thumbnail playback, and move the menu highlight bar up or  
down, while the sub-command dial is used to display additional photo  
information in full-frame playback and to move the cursor up or down during  
thumbnail playback. Select On (image review excluded) to prevent the  
command dials from being used for playback during image review. While menus  
are displayed, rotating the sub-command dial right displays the sub-menu for the  
selected option, while rotating it left displays the previous menu. To make a  
selection, press 2or J.  
U
233  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
f7: Release Button to Use Dial  
Selecting Yes allows adjustments that are normally made by holding the E, M, ISO,  
QUAL, WB, AF-mode, Z, or D button and rotating a command dial to be made by  
rotating the command dial after the button is released (this also applies to the Fn and  
depth-of-field preview buttons if they have been assigned Active D-Lighting using  
Custom Setting f3, Assign Fn button, or Custom Setting f4, Assign preview button).  
Setting ends when any of the affected buttons is pressed again or the shutter-release  
button is pressed halfway. Except when No limit is selected for Custom Setting c2  
Auto meter-off delay, setting will also end when the exposure meters turn off.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
f8: Slot Empty Release Lock  
Selecting Enable release allows the shutter to be released when no memory card is  
inserted, although no pictures will be recorded (they will however be displayed in the  
monitor in demo mode). If Release locked is selected, the shutter-release button is  
only enabled when a memory card is inserted in the camera.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
f9: Reverse Indicators  
At the default setting of  
(V), the exposure indicators in the  
viewfinder and information display are displayed with positive values on the left and  
negative values on the right. Select  
(W) to display negative  
values on the left and positive values on the right.  
U
234  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
f10: Assign MB-D11 4 Button  
Choose the function assigned to the AE-L/AF-L button  
on the optional MB-D11 battery pack.  
Option  
AE/AF lock  
Description  
Focus and exposure lock while the MB-D11 AE-L/AF-L button is pressed.  
B
C
F
AE lock only Exposure locks while the MB-D11 AE-L/AF-L button is pressed.  
AF lock only Focus locks while the MB-D11 AE-L/AF-L button is pressed.  
Exposure locks when the MB-D11 AE-L/AF-L button is pressed, and remains  
E AE lock (Hold) locked until the button is pressed a second time or the exposure meters  
turn off.  
Pressing the MB-D11 AE-L/AF-L button initiates autofocus. The shutter-  
release button can not be used to focus.  
A
r
G
AF-ON  
Press the MB-D11 AE-L/AF-L button to lock flash value (built-in flash and  
SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, SB-400, and SB-R200 flash units only,  
0149). Press again to cancel FV lock.  
The MB-D11 AE-L/AF-L button performs the function selected for Custom  
Setting f3 (0230).  
FV lock  
Same as Fn  
button  
D VR Lenses  
Vibration reduction can not be initiated by pressing the AE-L/AF-L button.  
U
235  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup  
To display the setup menu, press G and select the B (setup menu) tab.  
G button  
The setup menu contains the following options:  
Option  
Format memory card  
0
Option  
Auto image rotation  
Image Dust Off ref photo  
Battery info  
Wireless transmitter  
Copyright information  
Save/load settings  
GPS  
Virtual horizon  
Non-CPU lens data  
AF fine tune  
Eye-Fi upload 2  
Firmware version  
0
236  
75  
76  
239  
240  
242  
181  
243  
244  
162  
245  
159  
246  
247  
247  
Save user settings  
Reset user settings  
LCD brightness  
Clean image sensor  
Lock mirror up for cleaning 1  
Video mode  
237  
284  
286  
237  
194  
237  
237  
238  
238  
HDMI  
Flicker reduction  
Time zone and date  
Language  
Image comment  
1 Not available when battery is low.  
2 Only displayed when compatible Eye-Fi memory card is inserted (0247).  
G button ➜ B Setup menu  
Format Memory Card  
To begin formatting, choose a memory card slot and select Yes.  
Note that formatting permanently deletes all pictures and other  
data on the card in the selected slot. Before formatting, be sure to  
make backup copies as required.  
D During Formatting  
Do not turn the camera off or remove memory cards during formatting.  
A Two-Button Format  
Memory cards can also be formatted by pressing the Q (O and Z) buttons for more than  
two seconds (032).  
U
236  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ B Setup menu  
LCD Brightness  
Press 1or 3to choose monitor brightness. Choose higher  
values for increased brightness, lower values for reduced  
brightness.  
A Live View  
See page 49 for information on adjusting monitor brightness in live  
view or during movie recording.  
G button ➜ B Setup menu  
Video Mode  
When connecting the camera to a television or VCR via the video connector, be sure  
the camera video mode matches the device video standard (NTSC or PAL).  
G button ➜ B setup menu  
Flicker Reduction  
Reduce flicker and banding when shooting under fluorescent or mercury-vapor  
lighting during live view or movie recording. Choose a frequency which matches  
that of the local AC power supply.  
A Flicker Reduction  
If you are unsure as to the frequency of the local power supply, test both options and choose  
the one that produces the best results. Flicker reduction may not produce the desired results  
if the subject is very bright, in which case you should select mode A or M and choose a smaller  
aperture (larger f-number) before starting live view. Note that flicker reduction is not  
available when On is selected for Movie settings > Manual movie settings (060) in mode  
M.  
G button ➜ B Setup menu  
Time Zone and Date  
Change time zones, set the camera clock, choose the date display order, and turn  
daylight saving time on or off.  
Option  
Description  
Choose a time zone. The camera clock is automatically set to the time in  
the new time zone.  
Time zone  
Set the camera clock (027). If the clock is not set, a blinking B icon will  
appear in the control panel.  
Choose the order in which the day, month, and year are displayed.  
Turn daylight saving time on or off. The camera clock will automatically be  
advanced or set back one hour. The default setting is Off.  
Date and time  
Date format  
U
Daylight saving time  
237  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ B Setup menu  
Language  
Choose a language for camera menus and messages. The following options are  
available.  
Option  
Description  
Czech  
Option  
Description  
Dutch  
Option  
Description  
Arabic  
Danish  
Norwegian  
Polish  
Portuguese  
Russian  
Traditional  
Chinese  
Simplified  
Chinese  
German  
English  
Spanish  
French  
Japanese  
Finnish  
Korean  
Thai  
Indonesian  
Italian  
Swedish  
Turkish  
G button ➜ B Setup menu  
Image Comment  
Add a comment to new photographs as they are taken. Comments can be viewed as  
metadata in ViewNX 2 (supplied) or Capture NX 2 (available separately; 0281). The  
comment is also visible on the third shooting data page in the photo information  
display (0169).  
• Done: Save changes and return to the setup menu.  
• Input comment: Input a comment as described on page 137. Comments can be  
up to 36 characters long.  
• Attach comment: Select this option to attach the comment  
to all subsequent photographs. Attach comment can be  
turned on and off by highlighting it and pressing 2.  
U
238  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ B Setup menu  
Auto Image Rotation  
Photographs taken while On is selected contain information on camera orientation,  
allowing them to be rotated automatically during playback (0163) or when viewed  
in ViewNX 2 (supplied) or in Capture NX 2 (available separately; 0281). The  
following orientations are recorded:  
Landscape (wide)  
orientation  
Camera rotated 90°  
clockwise  
Camera rotated 90°  
counter-clockwise  
Camera orientation is not recorded when Off is selected. Choose this option when  
panning or taking photographs with the lens pointing up or down.  
A Rotate Tall  
To automatically rotate “tall” (portrait-orientation) photographs for display during playback,  
select On for the Rotate tall option in the playback menu (0200). Note that because the  
camera itself is already in the appropriate orientation during shooting, images are not  
rotated automatically during image review (0163).  
U
239  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ B Setup menu  
Image Dust Off Ref Photo  
Acquire reference data for the Image Dust Off option in Capture NX 2 (available  
separately; for more information, see the Capture NX 2 manual).  
Image Dust Off ref photo is available only when a CPU lens is mounted on the  
camera. A lens with a focal length of at least 50 mm is recommended. When using a  
zoom lens, zoom all the way in.  
1 Choose a start option.  
Highlight one of the following options and press  
J. To exit without acquiring image dust off data,  
press G.  
•
•
Start: The message shown at right will be  
displayed and “rEF” will appear in the  
viewfinder and control panel displays.  
Clean sensor and then start: Select this option to  
clean the image sensor before starting. The  
message shown at right will be displayed and  
“rEF” will appear in the viewfinder and control  
panel displays when cleaning is complete.  
D Image Sensor Cleaning  
Dust off reference data recorded before image sensor cleaning is performed can not  
be used with photographs taken after image sensor cleaning is performed. Select  
Clean sensor and then start only if the dust off reference data will not be used with  
existing photographs.  
2 Frame a featureless white object in the viewfinder.  
With the lens about ten centimeters (four inches) from a well-lit, featureless  
white object, frame the object so that it fills the viewfinder and then press the  
shutter-release button halfway.  
In autofocus mode, focus will automatically be set to infinity; in manual focus  
mode, set focus to infinity manually.  
U
240  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Acquire dust off reference data.  
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to acquire Image Dust  
Off reference data. The monitor turns off when the shutter-release button is  
pressed. Note that noise reduction will be performed if the subject is poorly lit,  
increasing recording times.  
If the reference object is too bright or too dark, the camera  
may be unable to acquire Image Dust Off reference data  
and the message shown at right will be displayed. Choose  
another reference object and repeat the process from  
step 1.  
D Image Dust Off Reference Data  
The same reference data can be used for photographs taken with  
different lenses or at different apertures. Reference images can not be  
viewed using computer imaging software. A grid pattern is displayed  
when reference images are viewed on the camera.  
U
241  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ B Setup menu  
Battery Info  
View information on the battery currently inserted in the  
camera.  
Item  
Description  
Bat. meter  
The current battery level expressed as a percentage.  
The number of times the shutter has been released with the current battery  
since the battery was last charged. Note that the camera may sometimes  
release the shutter without recording a photograph, for example when  
measuring preset white balance.  
Pic. meter  
A five-level display showing battery age. 0 (k) indicates that battery  
performance is unimpaired, 4 (l) that the battery has reached the end of its  
charging life and should be replaced. Note that batteries charged at  
temperatures under about 5 °C (41 °F) may show a temporary drop in  
charging life; the battery age display will however return to normal once the  
battery has been recharged at a temperature of about 20 °C (68 °F) or higher.  
Battery age  
A The MB-D11 Battery Pack  
The display for the MB-D11 battery pack is shown at right. If AA  
batteries are used, the battery level will be shown by a battery level  
icon; other items will not be displayed.  
U
242  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ B Setup menu  
Copyright Information  
Add copyright information to new photographs as they are taken. Copyright  
information is visible on the fourth shooting data page in the photo information  
display (0169) and can be viewed as metadata in ViewNX 2 (supplied) or in  
Capture NX 2 (available separately; 0281).  
• Done: Save changes and return to the setup menu.  
• Artist: Enter a photographer name as described on page 137. Photographer  
names can be up to 36 characters long.  
• Copyright: Enter the name of the copyright holder as described on page 137.  
Copyright holder names can be up to 54 characters long.  
• Attach copyright information: Select this option to attach  
copyright information to all subsequent photographs.  
Attach copyright information can be turned on and off by  
highlighting it and pressing 2.  
D Copyright Information  
To prevent unauthorized use of the artist or copyright holder names, make sure that Attach  
copyright information is not selected and that the Artist and Copyright fields are blank  
before lending or transferring the camera to another person. Nikon does not accept liability  
for any damages or disputes arising from the use of the Copyright information option.  
U
243  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ B Setup menu  
Save/Load Settings  
Select Save settings to save the following settings to the memory card in Slot 1 (if  
the memory card is full, an error will be displayed; 0306).  
Menu  
Option  
Menu  
Option  
Display mode  
Image review  
After delete  
Rotate tall  
Custom All Custom Settings except Reset  
settings custom settings  
Clean image sensor  
Playback  
Video mode  
HDMI  
File naming  
Flicker reduction  
Time zone and date (excepting  
Role played by card in Slot 2  
Image quality  
date and time)  
Language  
Image comment  
Auto image rotation  
Copyright information  
GPS  
Image size  
Setup  
JPEG compression  
NEF (RAW) recording  
White balance (with fine tuning  
and presets d-0–d-4)  
Set Picture Control  
Auto distortion control  
Color space  
Shooting  
Non-CPU lens data  
All My Menu items  
My Menu/  
Recent All recent settings  
Settings  
Active D-Lighting  
Long exp. NR  
Choose tab  
High ISO NR  
ISO sensitivity settings  
Movie settings  
Remote control mode  
Settings saved using this model of camera can be restored by selecting Load  
settings. Note that Save/load settings is only available when a memory card is  
inserted in the camera, and that the Load settings option is only available if the card  
contains saved settings.  
A Saved Settings  
Settings are saved in a file named NCSETUP7. The camera will not be able to load settings if  
the file name is changed.  
U
244  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ B Setup menu  
Virtual Horizon  
Display a virtual horizon based on information from the camera  
tilt sensor. The reference line is displayed in green when the  
camera is level.  
D Tilting the Camera  
The virtual horizon display is not accurate when the camera is tilted  
at a sharp angle forward or back. If the camera is unable to measure  
tilt, the amount of tilt will not be displayed.  
Reference line  
A Viewfinder Virtual Horizon  
If Viewfinder virtual horizon is assigned to the Fn or depth-of-field  
preview button using Custom Setting f3 (Assign Fn button) or f4  
(Assign preview button), a tilt meter can be displayed in the  
viewfinder by pressing the selected button (0231).  
A See Also  
A virtual horizon can also be displayed during live view (053).  
U
245  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ B Setup menu  
AF Fine Tune  
Fine-tune focus for up to 12 lens types. AF tuning is not recommended in most  
situations and may interfere with normal focus; use only when required.  
Option  
AF fine tune  
(On/Off)  
Description  
•
•
On: Turn AF tuning on.  
Off: Turn AF tuning off.  
Move focal  
point away  
from camera.  
Tune AF for the current lens (CPU lenses only).  
Press 1or 3to choose a value between +20 and  
–20. Values for up to 12 lens types can be stored.  
Only one value can be stored for each type of lens.  
Current  
value  
Saved value  
Default  
Choose the AF tuning value used when no  
previously saved value exists for the current lens  
(CPU lenses only).  
Move focal  
point toward value  
camera.  
Previous  
List previously saved AF tuning values. If a value exists for the current lens, it will  
be shown with a V icon. To delete a lens from the list, highlight the desired lens  
and press O. To change a lens identifier (for example, to choose an identifier that  
is the same as the last two digits of the lens serial number to distinguish it from  
other lenses of the same type in light of the fact that Saved value can be used  
with only one lens of each type), highlight the desired lens and press 2.  
List saved  
values  
The menu shown at right will be displayed; press 1or 3  
to choose an identifier and press J to save changes and  
exit.  
D AF Tuning  
The camera may be unable to focus at minimum range or at infinity when AF tuning is  
applied.  
D Live View  
Tuning is not applied to autofocus during in live view (049).  
A Saved Value  
Only one value can be stored for each type of lens. If a teleconverter is used, separate values  
can be stored for each combination of lens and teleconverter.  
U
246  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ B Setup menu  
Eye-Fi Upload  
This option is displayed only when an Eye-Fi memory card (available separately from  
third-party suppliers) is inserted in the camera. Choose Enable to upload  
photographs to a preselected destination. Note that pictures will not be uploaded if  
signal strength is insufficient.  
Observe all local laws concerning wireless devices and choose Disable where  
wireless devices are prohibited.  
When an Eye-Fi card is inserted, its status is indicated by an icon  
in the information display:  
• d: Eye-Fi upload disabled.  
• e: Eye-Fi upload enabled but no pictures available for upload.  
• f (static): Eye-Fi upload enabled; waiting to begin upload.  
• f (animated): Eye-Fi upload enabled; uploading data.  
• g: Error — camera can not control Eye-Fi card. If a blinking W appears in the  
control panel or viewfinder, refer to page 307; if this indicator is not displayed,  
pictures can be taken normally but you may be unable to change Eye-Fi settings.  
D Eye-Fi Cards  
Eye-Fi cards may emit wireless signals when Disable is selected. If a warning is displayed in  
the monitor (0307), turn the camera off and remove the card.  
See the manual provided with the Eye-Fi card, and direct any inquiries to the manufacturer.  
The camera can be used to turn Eye-Fi cards on and off, but may not support other Eye-Fi  
functions.  
A Supported Eye-Fi Cards  
As of June 2010, the following Eye-Fi cards can be used: 2 GB SD cards in the Share, Home,  
and Explore product categories, 4 GB SDHC cards in the Anniversary, Share Video, Explore  
Video, and Connect X2 product categories, and 8 GB SDHC cards in the Pro X2 and  
Explore X2 product categories. Eye-Fi cards are for use only in the country of purchase. Be  
sure the Eye-Fi card firmware has been updated to the latest version.  
G button ➜ B Setup menu  
Firmware Version  
View the current camera firmware version.  
U
247  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
N The Retouch Menu:  
Creating Retouched Copies  
To display the retouch menu, press G and select the N (retouch menu) tab.  
G button  
The options in the retouch menu are used to create trimmed or retouched copies of  
existing pictures. The retouch menu is only displayed when a memory card  
containing photographs is inserted in the camera.  
Option  
0
Option  
Straighten  
Distortion control  
Fisheye  
Color outline  
Color sketch  
0
i
j
k
D-Lighting  
251  
251  
252  
253  
254  
255  
256  
258  
259  
260  
e
(
)
261  
261  
261  
262  
262  
263  
263  
63  
Red-eye correction  
Trim  
Monochrome  
Filter effects  
l
m
f
g
h
n Color balance  
Perspective control  
Miniature effect  
Edit movie  
o
7
8
Image overlay 1  
NEF (RAW) processing  
Resize  
i
9
p
Side-by-side comparison 2  
264  
&
Quick retouch  
1 Can only be selected by pressing G and selecting N tab.  
2 Only available if J is pressed in full-frame playback when a retouched image or original is  
displayed.  
D Retouching Copies  
With the exceptions of Image overlay and Edit movie > Choose start point/Choose end  
point, each effect can be applied only once (note that multiple edits may result in loss of  
detail). Options that can not be applied to the current image are grayed out and unavailable.  
A Image Quality  
Except in the case of copies created with Trim, Image overlay, NEF (RAW) processing, and  
Resize, copies created from JPEG images are the same size and quality as the original, while  
copies created from NEF (RAW) photos are saved as large fine-quality JPEG images. Size-  
priority compression is used when copies are saved in JPEG format.  
U
248  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Creating Retouched Copies  
To create a retouched copy:  
1 Display retouch options.  
Highlight the desired item in the retouch menu  
and press 2.  
2 Select a picture.  
Highlight a picture and press J (to view the  
highlighted picture full screen, press and hold the  
X button; to view images in other locations as  
described on page 164, hold D and press 1).  
A Retouch  
The camera may not be able to display or retouch  
images created with other devices.  
3 Select retouch options.  
For more information, see the section for the  
selected item. To exit without creating a  
retouched copy, press G.  
A Monitor off Delay  
The monitor will turn off and the operation will be cancelled if no actions are  
performed for 20 s; this can be adjusted using Custom Setting c4 (Monitor off delay;  
0215).  
4 Create a retouched copy.  
Press J to create a retouched copy. Retouched  
copies are indicated by a N icon.  
U
249  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A Creating Retouched Copies During Playback  
Retouched copies can also be created during playback.  
2
2
Display picture full frame and  
Highlight an option and  
Create retouched copy.  
press J.  
press J.  
U
250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ N retouch menu  
D-Lighting  
D-lighting brightens shadows, making it ideal for dark or backlit photographs.  
Before  
After  
Press 1or 3to choose the amount of correction performed.  
The effect can be previewed in the edit display. Press J to copy  
the photograph.  
G button ➜ N retouch menu  
Red-Eye Correction  
This option is used to correct “red-eye” caused by the flash, and  
is available only with photographs taken using the flash. The  
photograph selected for red-eye correction is previewed as  
shown at right. Confirm the effects of red-eye correction and  
create a copy as described in the following table. Note that  
red-eye correction may not always produce the expected results  
and may in very rare circumstances be applied to portions of the image that are not  
affected by red-eye; check the preview thoroughly before proceeding.  
To  
Use  
Description  
Press X button to zoom in, W button to zoom  
out. While photo is zoomed in, use multi  
Zoom in  
X
Zoom out  
W
selector to view areas of image not visible in  
monitor. Keep multi selector pressed to scroll  
rapidly to other areas of frame. Navigation  
window is displayed when zoom buttons or  
View other  
areas of image  
multi selector is pressed; area currently visible in  
monitor is indicated by yellow border. Press J to cancel zoom.  
If the camera detects red-eye in the selected photograph, a copy will be  
created that has been processed to reduce its effects. No copy will be  
created if the camera is unable to detect red-eye.  
Cancel zoom  
Create copy  
J
J
U
251  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ N retouch menu  
Trim  
Create a cropped copy of the selected photograph. The  
selected photograph is displayed with the selected crop shown  
in yellow; create a cropped copy as described in the following  
table.  
To  
Use  
W
X
Description  
Reduce size of crop  
Press the W button to reduce the size of the crop.  
Increase size of crop  
Press the X button to increase the size of the crop.  
Rotate the main command dial to switch between aspect  
ratios of 3 : 2, 4 : 3, 5 : 4, 1 : 1, and 16 : 9.  
Change crop aspect ratio  
Use multi selector to move the crop to another area of the  
image.  
Move crop  
Create copy  
Save the current crop as a separate file.  
J
A Trim: Image Quality and Size  
Copies created from NEF (RAW) or NEF (RAW) + JPEG photos have an  
image quality (085) of JPEG fine; cropped copies created from JPEG  
photos have the same image quality as the original. The size of the  
copy varies with crop size and aspect ratio and appears at upper left  
in the crop display.  
A Viewing Cropped Copies  
Playback zoom may not be available when cropped copies are displayed.  
U
252  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ N retouch menu  
Monochrome  
Copy photographs in Black-and-white, Sepia, or  
Cyanotype (blue and white monochrome).  
Selecting Sepia or Cyanotype displays a preview of  
the selected image; press 1to increase color  
saturation, 3to decrease. Press J to create a  
monochrome copy.  
Increase  
saturation  
Decrease  
saturation  
U
253  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ N retouch menu  
Filter Effects  
Choose from the following filter effects. After adjusting filter effects as described  
below, press J to copy the photograph.  
Option  
Description  
Creates the effect of a skylight filter, making the  
picture less blue. The effect can be previewed in the  
monitor as shown at right.  
Skylight  
Creates a copy with warm tone filter effects, giving the  
Warm filter copy a “warm” red cast. The effect can be previewed in  
the monitor.  
Red intensifier  
Intensify reds (Red intensifier), greens (Green  
Green intensifier intensifier), or blues (Blue intensifier). Press 1to  
increase the effect, 3to decrease.  
Blue intensifier  
Add starburst effects to light sources.  
•
•
Number of points: Choose from four, six, or eight.  
Filter amount: Choose the brightness of the light  
sources affected.  
Cross screen  
•
•
•
Filter angle: Choose the angle of the points.  
Length of points: Choose the length of points.  
Confirm: Preview the effects of the filter as shown at  
right. Press X to preview the copy full frame.  
Save: Create a retouched copy.  
•
Add a soft filter effect. Press 1or 3to choose the filter  
strength.  
Soft  
U
254  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ N retouch menu  
Color Balance  
Use the multi selector to create a copy with modified color  
balance as shown below. The effect is displayed in the monitor  
together with red, green, and blue histograms (0167) giving  
the distribution of tones in the copy.  
Increase amount of green  
Create retouched copy  
Increase amount of blue  
Increase amount of amber  
Increase amount of magenta  
A Zoom  
To zoom in on the image displayed in the monitor, press the X button.  
The histogram will be updated to show data only for the portion of the  
image displayed in the monitor. While the image is zoomed in, press  
the L button to toggle back and forth between color balance and  
zoom. When zoom is selected, you can zoom in and out with the X  
and W buttons and scroll the image with the multi selector.  
U
255  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ N retouch menu  
Image Overlay  
Image overlay combines two existing NEF (RAW) photographs to create a single  
picture that is saved separately from the originals; the results, which make use of RAW  
data from the camera image sensor, are noticeably better than overlays created in an  
imaging application. The new picture is saved at current image quality and size  
settings; before creating an overlay, set image quality and size (085, 88; all options  
are available). To create a NEF (RAW) copy, choose an image quality of NEF (RAW).  
+
1 Select Image overlay.  
Highlight Image overlay in the retouch menu  
and press 2. The dialog shown at right will be  
displayed, with Image 1 highlighted; press J to  
display a list of the NEF pictures created with this  
camera.  
2 Select the first image.  
Use the multi selector to highlight a photo. To  
view the highlighted image full frame, press and  
hold the X button (to view images in other  
locations as described on page 164, hold D and  
press 1). Press J to select the highlighted  
photograph and return to the preview display.  
3 Select the second image.  
The selected image will appear as Image 1. Highlight Image 2 and press J,  
then select the second photo as described in Step 2. Choose an image with the  
same bit-depth as the photo selected for Image 1.  
U
256  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Adjust gain.  
Highlight Image 1 or Image 2 and optimize  
exposure for the overlay by pressing 1or 3to  
select gain from values between 0.1 and 2.0.  
Repeat for the second image. The default value is  
1.0; select 0.5 to halve gain or 2.0 to double it. The  
effects are visible in the Preview column.  
5 Preview the overlay.  
Press 4or 2to place the cursor in the Preview  
column and press 1or 3to highlight Overlay.  
Press J to preview the overlay as shown at right  
(to save the overlay without displaying a preview,  
select Save). To return to Step 4 and select new  
photos or adjust gain, press W.  
6 Save the overlay.  
Press J while the preview is displayed to save the  
overlay. After an overlay is created, the resulting  
image will be displayed full-frame in the monitor.  
D Image Overlay  
The overlay has the same photo info (including date of recording, metering, shutter speed,  
aperture, shooting mode, exposure compensation, focal length, and image orientation),  
white balance, and Picture Control as Image 1. The current image comment is appended to  
the overlay; copyright information, however, is not copied. NEF (RAW) overlays use the  
compression selected for Type in the NEF (RAW) recording menu and have the same bit  
depth as the original images; JPEG overlays are saved using size-priority compression.  
U
257  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ N retouch menu  
NEF (RAW) Processing  
Create JPEG copies of NEF (RAW) photographs.  
1 Select NEF (RAW) processing.  
Highlight NEF (RAW) processing in the retouch  
menu and press 2to display a picture selection  
dialog listing only NEF (RAW) images created with  
this camera.  
2 Select a photograph.  
Highlight a photograph (to view the highlighted  
photograph full frame, press and hold the X  
button; to view images in other locations as  
described on page 164, hold D and press 1).  
Press J to select the highlighted photograph.  
3 Choose settings for the JPEG copy.  
Adjust image quality (085), image size (088), white balance (0117; if Auto is  
selected, white balance will be set to whichever of Normal and Keep warm  
lighting colors was in effect when the picture was taken), exposure  
compensation (0107), Picture Control (0131; note that the Picture Control  
grid can not be displayed), high ISO noise reduction (0205), color space  
(0141), and D-Lighting (0251). Note that white balance is not available with  
multiple exposures or pictures created with image overlay and that exposure  
compensation can only be set to values between –2 and +2 EV.  
Image quality  
Image size  
White balance  
Exposure compensation  
Picture Control  
High ISO noise reduction  
Color space  
D-Lighting  
4 Copy the photograph.  
Highlight EXE and press J to create a JPEG copy  
of the selected photograph (to exit without  
copying the photograph, press the G button).  
U
258  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ N retouch menu  
Resize  
Create small copies of selected photographs.  
1 Select Resize.  
To resize selected images, press G to display  
the menus and select Resize in the retouch  
menu.  
2 Choose a destination.  
If two memory cards are inserted, you can choose  
a destination for the resized copies by  
highlighting Choose destination and pressing 2  
(if only one card is inserted, proceed to Step 3).  
The menu shown at right will be displayed;  
highlight a card slot and press J.  
3 Choose a size.  
Highlight Choose size and press 2.  
The following options will be displayed; highlight  
an option and press J.  
Option  
A
Size (pixels)  
1920 × 1280  
1280 × 856  
960 × 640  
Option  
D
Size (pixels)  
640 × 424  
320 ×216  
B
j
C
U
259  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Choose pictures.  
Highlight Select image and press 2.  
The dialog shown at right will be displayed;  
highlight pictures using the multi selector and  
press the W button to select or deselect (to view  
the highlighted picture full screen, press and hold  
the X button; to view images in other locations as  
described on page 164, hold D and press 1).  
Selected pictures are marked by a 8 icon. Press  
J when the selection is complete.  
5 Save the resized copies.  
A confirmation dialog will be displayed. Highlight Yes and press J to save the  
resized copies.  
A Viewing Resized Copies  
Playback zoom may not be available when resized copies are displayed.  
A Image Quality  
Copies created from NEF (RAW) or NEF (RAW) + JPEG photos have an image quality (085) of  
JPEG fine; copies created from JPEG photos have the same image quality as the original.  
G button ➜ N retouch menu  
Quick Retouch  
Create copies with enhanced saturation and contrast.  
D-Lighting is applied as required to brighten dark or backlit  
subjects.  
Press 1or 3to choose the amount of enhancement. The effect  
can be previewed in the edit display. Press J to copy the  
photograph.  
U
260  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ N retouch menu  
Straighten  
Create a straightened copy of the selected image. Press 2to  
rotate the image clockwise by up to five degrees in increments  
of approximately 0.25 degrees, 4to rotate it counterclockwise  
(note that edges of the image will be trimmed to create a square  
copy). Press J to copy the photograph, or press K to exit to  
playback without creating a copy.  
G button ➜ N retouch menu  
Distortion Control  
Create copies with reduced peripheral distortion. Select Auto  
to let the camera correct distortion automatically and then  
make fine adjustments using the multi selector, or select  
Manual to reduce distortion manually (note that Auto is not  
available with photos taken using auto distortion control; see  
page 205). Press 2to reduce barrel distortion, 4to reduce pin-  
cushion distortion (note that greater amounts of distortion control result in more of  
the edges being cropped out). Press J to copy the photograph, or press K to exit to  
playback without creating a copy.  
D Auto  
Auto is for use only with pictures taken with type G and D lenses (PC, fisheye, and certain  
other lenses excluded). Results are not guaranteed with other lenses.  
G button ➜ N retouch menu  
Fisheye  
Create copies that appear to have been taken with a fisheye  
lens. Press 2to increase the effect (this also increases the  
amount of that will be cropped out at the edges of the image),  
4to reduce it. Press J to copy the photograph, or press K to  
exit to playback without creating a copy.  
U
261  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ N retouch menu  
Color Outline  
Create an outline copy of a photograph to use as a base for  
painting. The effect can be previewed in the edit display. Press  
J to copy the photograph.  
Before  
After  
G button ➜ N retouch menu  
Color Sketch  
Create a copy of a photograph that resembles a sketch made  
with colored pencils. Press 1or 3to highlight Vividness or  
Outlines and press 4or 2to change. Vividness can be  
increased to make colors more saturated, or decreased for a  
washed-out, monochromatic effect, while outlines can be made  
thicker or thinner. The results can be previewed in the edit  
display. Press J to copy the photograph, or press K to exit to  
playback without creating a copy.  
U
262  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ N retouch menu  
Perspective Control  
Create copies that reduce the effects of perspective taken from  
the base of a tall object. Use the multi selector to adjust  
perspective (note that greater amounts of perspective control  
result in more of the edges being cropped out). The results can  
be previewed in the edit display. Press J to copy the  
photograph, or press K to exit to playback without creating a  
copy.  
Before  
After  
G button ➜ N retouch menu  
Miniature Effect  
Create a copy that appears to be a photo of a diorama. Works best with photos taken  
from a high vantage point.  
To  
Press  
Description  
If photo is displayed in wide orientation, press  
1or 3 to position frame showing area of copy  
that will be in focus.  
Choose area  
in focus  
Area in focus  
If photo is displayed in tall orientation (0239),  
press 4or 2 to position frame showing area of  
copy that will be in focus.  
Preview copy  
Cancel  
Create copy  
X
Preview copy.  
Exit to full-frame playback without creating copy.  
Create copy.  
K
J
U
263  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ N retouch menu  
Side-by-side Comparison  
Compare retouched copies to the original photographs. This option is only available  
if the J button is pressed to display the retouch menu when a copy or original is  
played back full frame.  
1 Select a picture.  
In full-frame playback, select a retouched copy  
(shown by a N icon) or a photograph that has  
been retouched and press J.  
2 Select Side-by-side comparison.  
Highlight Side-by-side comparison and press  
J.  
3 Compare the copy with the original.  
Options used to create  
copy  
The source image is displayed on the left, the  
retouched copy on the right, with the options  
used to create the copy listed at the top of the  
display. Press 4or 2to switch between the  
source image and the retouched copy. To view  
the highlighted picture full frame, press and hold  
the X button. If the copy was created from two  
source images using Image overlay, or if the  
source has been copied multiple times, press 1  
Source Retouched  
image  
copy  
or 3to view the other source images or copies. To exit to playback mode, press  
the K button. To exit to playback mode with the highlighted image displayed,  
press J.  
D Side-by-side Comparisons  
The source image will not be displayed if the copy was created from a photograph that was  
protected (0174), is on a locked memory card, has since been deleted or hidden (0196), or  
is on a card in a different slot from that used when the image was created.  
U
264  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
O My Menu/m Recent Settings  
“My Menu” is a customized menu that gives you quick access to up to 20 options  
selected from the playback, shooting, Custom Settings, setup, and retouch menus.  
To display My Menu, press G and select the O (My Menu) tab.  
G button  
Options can be added, deleted, and reordered as described below. If desired, recent  
settings can be displayed in place of My Menu (0268).  
❚❚Adding Options to My Menu  
1 Select Add items.  
In My Menu (O), highlight Add items and  
press 2.  
2 Select a menu.  
Highlight the name of the menu containing  
the option you wish to add and press 2.  
3 Select an item.  
Highlight the desired menu item and press  
J.  
4 Position the new item.  
Press 1or 3to move the new item up or  
down in My Menu. Press J to add the new  
item.  
U
265  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 Add more items.  
The items currently displayed in My Menu  
are indicated by a check mark. Items  
indicated by a V icon can not be selected.  
Repeat steps 1–4 to select additional items.  
❚❚Deleting Options from My Menu  
1 Select Remove items.  
In My Menu (O), highlight Remove items and press 2.  
2 Select items.  
Highlight items and press 2to select or  
deselect. Selected items are indicated by a  
check mark.  
3 Select Done.  
Highlight Done and press J. A  
confirmation dialog will be displayed.  
4 Delete the selected items.  
Press J to delete the selected items.  
A Deleting Items in My Menu  
To delete the item currently highlighted in My Menu, press the O button. A confirmation  
dialog will be displayed; press O again to remove the selected item from My Menu.  
U
266  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚Reordering Options in My Menu  
1 Select Rank items.  
In My Menu (O), highlight Rank items and press 2.  
2 Select an item.  
Highlight the item you wish to move and  
press J.  
3 Position the item.  
Press 1or 3to move the item up or down  
in My Menu and press J. Repeat Steps 2–3  
to reposition additional items.  
4 Exit to My Menu.  
G button  
Press the G button to return to My Menu.  
U
267  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recent Settings  
To display the twenty most recently used settings, select m Recent settings for O My  
Menu > Choose tab.  
1 Select Choose tab.  
In My Menu (O), highlight Choose tab and  
press 2.  
2 Select m Recent settings.  
Highlight m Recent settings and press J.  
The name of the menu will change from “MY  
MENU” to “RECENT SETTINGS.”  
Menu items are added to the top of the recent settings menu as they are used. To  
view My Menu again, select O My Menu for m Recent settings > Choose tab.  
A Removing Items from the Recent Settings Menu  
To remove an item from the recent settings menu, highlight it and press the O button. A  
confirmation dialog will be displayed; press O again to delete the selected item.  
U
268  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Technical Notes  
n
Read this chapter for information on compatible accessories, cleaning and storing  
the camera, and what to do if an error message is displayed or you encounter  
problems using the camera.  
Compatible Lenses  
CPU lenses (particularly types G and D) are recommended, but note that IX-NIKKOR  
lenses can not be used. CPU lenses can be identified by the presence of CPU  
contacts, type G and D lenses by a letter on the lens barrel. Type G lenses are not  
equipped with a lens aperture ring. The maximum aperture of the lens is given by  
the f-number in the lens name.  
CPU contacts  
Aperture ring  
CPU lens  
Type G lens  
Type D lens  
❚❚Compatible CPU Lenses  
Camera setting  
Focus  
Mode  
Metering  
a
M (with electronic  
rangefinder)  
Auto and scene  
modes; P, S, A  
Z
b
Lens/accessory 1  
Type G or D AF NIKKOR/AF-S, AF-I NIKKOR  
PC-E NIKKOR series  
PC Micro 85mm f/2.8D4  
AF-S/AF-I teleconverter5  
Other AF NIKKOR (except lenses for F3AF)  
AI-P NIKKOR  
AF  
✔
M
M
✔
3D Color  
2
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
✔
✔
,
3
3
3
3
2
3
3
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
✔
✔
,
3
2
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
6
6
2
2
2
✔
✔
✔
✔
7
7
✔
✔
✔
8
—
✔
✔
1 Vibration Reduction (VR) supported with VR  
lenses.  
6 With maximum effective aperture of f/5.6 or  
faster.  
2 Spot metering meters selected focus point  
(0105).  
7 When AF 80–200mm f/2.8, AF 35–70mm f/2.8,  
AF 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5 (New), or AF 28–85mm  
3 Can not be used with shifting or tilting.  
4 The camera’s exposure metering and flash  
control systems may not function as expected  
when the lens is shifted and/or tilted or aperture  
is set to a value other than maximum.  
5 AF-S or AF-I lens required.  
f/3.5–4.5 lenses are zoomed all the way in at the  
minimum focus distance, the in-focus indicator  
may be displayed when the image on the matte  
screen in the viewfinder is not in focus. Focus  
manually until image in viewfinder is in focus.  
8 With maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster.  
n
269  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚Compatible Non-CPU Lenses  
When using the following non-CPU lenses and accessories, rotate the camera mode  
dial to A and M and set aperture using the lens aperture ring. In other modes, the  
shutter-release is disabled. Non-CPU lens data (0159) can be used to enable many  
of the features available with CPU lenses, including color matrix metering; if no data  
are provided, center-weighted metering will be used in place of color matrix  
metering, while if the maximum aperture is not provided, the camera aperture  
display will show the number of stops from maximum aperture and the actual  
aperture value must be read off the lens aperture ring. For a list of non-CPU lenses  
and accessories that can not be used with this camera, see page 271.  
Camera setting  
Focus  
Mode  
Metering  
a
M (with electronic  
rangefinder)  
Auto and scene  
modes; P, S  
A, M 3D Color  
Z
b
Lens/accessory  
AF  
—
—
—
—
—
—
M
2
3
4
5
AI-, AI-modified, NIKKOR or Nikon Series E1  
Medical-NIKKOR 120mm f/4  
Reflex-NIKKOR  
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
—
—
✔
✔
6
✔
—
—
—
—
3
5
—
✔
7
8
PC-NIKKOR  
AI-type Teleconverter9  
PB-6 Bellows Focusing Attachment11  
Auto extension rings (PK-series 11A, 12, or  
13; PN-11)  
✔
✔
10  
3
4
5
✔
✔
✔
✔
10  
12  
✔
—
10  
3
—
✔
✔
—
✔
—
—
✔
1 Range of rotation for AI 80–200mm f/2.8 ED  
tripod mount is limited by camera body. Filters  
can not be exchanged while AI 200–400mm f/4  
ED is mounted on camera.  
2 With maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster.  
3 If maximum aperture is specified using Non-  
CPU lens data (0159), aperture value will be  
displayed in viewfinder and control panel.  
4 Can be used only if lens focal length and  
maximum aperture are specified using Non-  
CPU lens data (0159). Use spot or center-  
weighted metering if desired results are not  
achieved.  
5 For improved precision, specify lens focal length  
and maximum aperture using Non-CPU lens  
data (0159).  
6 Can be used in mode M at shutter speeds slower  
than flash sync speed by one step or more.  
7 Electronic rangefinder can not be used with  
shifting or tilting.  
8 Exposure determined by presetting lens  
aperture. In mode A, preset aperture using lens  
aperture ring before performing AE lock and  
shifting lens. In mode M, preset aperture using  
lens aperture ring and determine exposure  
before shifting lens.  
9 Exposure compensation required when used  
with AI 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5, AI 35–105mm f/3.5–  
4.5, AI 35–135mm f/3.5–4.5, or AF-S 80–200mm  
f/2.8D. See teleconverter manual for details.  
10 With maximum effective aperture of f/5.6 or  
faster.  
11 Requires PK-12 or PK-13 auto extension ring.  
PB-6D may be required depending on camera  
orientation.  
12 Use preset aperture. In mode A, set aperture  
using focusing attachment before determining  
exposure and taking photograph.  
• PF-4 Reprocopy Outfit requires PA-4 Camera  
Holder.  
n
270  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D Incompatible Accessories and Non-CPU Lenses  
The following accessories and non-CPU lenses can NOT be used with the D7000:  
• TC-16AS AF teleconverter  
• Non-AI lenses  
• Lenses that require the AU-1 focusing unit (400mm f/4.5, 600mm f/5.6, 800mm f/8,  
1200mm f/11)  
• Fisheye (6mm f/5.6, 7.5mm f/5.6, 8mm f/8, OP 10mm f/5.6)  
• 2.1cm f/4  
• Extension Ring K2  
• 180–600mm f/8 ED (serial numbers 174041–174180)  
• 360–1200mm f/11 ED (serial numbers 174031–174127)  
• 200–600mm f/9.5 (serial numbers 280001–300490)  
• AF lenses for the F3AF (AF 80mm f/2.8, AF 200mm f/3.5 ED, AF Teleconverter TC-16)  
• PC 28mm f/4 (serial number 180900 or earlier)  
• PC 35mm f/2.8 (serial numbers 851001–906200)  
• PC 35mm f/3.5 (old type)  
• Reflex 1000mm f/6.3 (old type)  
• Reflex 1000mm f/11 (serial numbers 142361–143000)  
• Reflex 2000mm f/11 (serial numbers 200111–200310)  
D The Built-in Flash  
The built-in flash can be used with lenses with focal lengths of 16–300 mm, although in  
some cases the flash may be unable to entirely light the subject at some ranges or focal  
lengths due to shadows cast by the lens, while lenses that block the subject’s view of the red-  
eye reduction lamp may interfere with red-eye reduction. Remove lens hoods to prevent  
shadows. The flash has a minimum range of 0.6 m (2 ft.) and can not be used in the macro  
range of macro zoom lenses. The flash may be unable to light the entire subject with the  
following lenses at ranges less than those given below:  
Lens  
Zoom position Minimum distance without vignetting  
18 mm  
20–24 mm  
18 mm  
20–24 mm  
24 mm  
28 mm  
35 mm  
20 mm  
24–35 mm  
24 mm  
1.0 m/3 ft. 3in.  
No vignetting  
1.0 m/3 ft. 3 in.  
No vignetting  
2.0 m/6 ft. 7 in.  
1.0 m/3 ft. 3 in.  
No vignetting  
2.0 m/6 ft. 7 in.  
No vignetting  
1.0 m/3 ft. 3 in.  
No vignetting  
1.0 m/3 ft. 3 in.  
No vignetting  
AF-S DX NIKKOR 10–24mm f/3.5–4.5G ED  
AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor 12–24mm f/4G IF-ED  
AF-S NIKKOR 16–35mm f/4G ED VR  
AF-S Zoom-Nikkor 17–35mm f/2.8D IF-ED  
AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor 17–55mm f/2.8G IF-ED  
AF Zoom-Nikkor 18–35mm f/3.5– 4.5D IF-ED  
28–55 mm  
18 mm  
24–35 mm  
n
271  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lens  
Zoom position Minimum distance without vignetting  
18 mm  
24–200 mm  
28 mm  
35–70 mm  
28 mm  
1.0 m/3 ft. 3 in.  
No vignetting  
1.5 m/4 ft. 11 in.  
No vignetting  
1.0 m/3 ft. 3 in.  
No vignetting  
No vignetting  
AF-S DX VR Zoom-Nikkor 18– 200mm f/3.5–5.6G IF-ED  
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18– 200mm f/3.5– 5.6G ED VR II  
AF-S NIKKOR 24–70mm f/2.8G ED  
AF-S Zoom-Nikkor 28–70mm f/2.8D IF-ED  
35–70 mm  
24 mm  
PC-E NIKKOR 24mm f/3.5 ED *  
* When not shifted or tilted.  
When used with the AF-S NIKKOR 14–24mm f/2.8G ED, the flash will be unable to light the  
entire subject at all ranges.  
The built-in flash can also be used with AI-S, AI-, AI-modified NIKKOR, Nikon Series E and non-  
CPU lenses with a focal length of 16–300mm. AI 50–300mm f/4.5, modified AI 50–300mm  
f/4.5, and AI-S 50–300mm f/4.5 ED lenses must be used at a zoom position of 135mm or  
above, and AI 50–300mm f/4.5 ED lenses at a zoom position of 105mm or above.  
n
272  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A The AF-S/AF-I Teleconverter  
The AF-S/AF-I teleconverter can be used with the following AF-S and AF-I lenses:  
• AF-S VR 70–200mm f/2.8G ED  
• AF-S NIKKOR 70–200mm f/2.8G ED VR II  
• AF-S 80–200mm f/2.8D ED  
• AF-S VR Micro 105mm f/2.8G ED 1  
• AF-S VR 200mm f/2G ED  
• AF-S NIKKOR 400mm f/2.8G ED VR  
• AF-S 400mm f/2.8D ED  
• AF-S 400mm f/2.8D ED II  
• AF-I 400mm f/2.8D ED  
• AF-S NIKKOR 500mm f/4G ED VR 2  
• AF-S 500mm f/4D ED 2  
• AF-S VR 200–400mm f/4G ED 2  
• AF-S NIKKOR 200–400mm f/4G ED VR II 2  
• AF-S VR 300mm f/2.8G ED  
• AF-S 300mm f/2.8D ED  
• AF-S 500mm f/4D ED II 2  
• AF-I 500mm f/4D ED 2  
• AF-S NIKKOR 600mm f/4G ED VR 2  
• AF-S 600mm f/4D ED 2  
• AF-S 300mm f/2.8D ED II  
• AF-I 300mm f/2.8D ED  
• AF-S 600mm f/4D ED II 2  
• AF-I 600mm f/4D ED 2  
• AF-S 300mm f/4D ED 2  
1 Autofocus not supported.  
2 Autofocus not supported when used with AF-S Teleconverter TC-17E II/TC-20E II/TC-20E III.  
D AF-Assist Illumination  
AF-assist illumination is available with lenses with focal lengths of 24–200 mm. It can not  
however be used to assist the focus operation with the following lenses:  
•
•
•
•
•
AF-S NIKKOR 14–24mm f/2.8G ED  
•
•
•
•
Ai AF VR Zoom-Nikkor 80–400mm f/4.5–5.6D ED  
AF-S VR Nikkor 200mm f/2G IF-ED  
AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor 200–400mm f/4G IF-ED  
AF-S NIKKOR 200–400mm f/4G ED VR II  
AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor 70–200mm f/2.8G IF-ED  
AF-S NIKKOR 70–200mm f/2.8G ED VR II  
Ai AF Zoom-Nikkor 80–200mm f/2.8D ED  
AF-S Zoom-Nikkor 80–200mm f/2.8D IF-ED  
At ranges under 1 m (3 ft. 3 in.), the following lenses may block the AF-assist illuminator and  
interfere with autofocus when lighting is poor:  
•
•
•
AF-S Zoom-Nikkor 17–35mm f/2.8D IF-ED  
AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor 17–55mm f/2.8G IF-ED  
AF-S DX VR Zoom-Nikkor 18–200mm f/3.5–  
5.6G IF-ED  
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–200mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR II  
AF-S NIKKOR 24–70mm f/2.8G ED  
•
AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor 24–120mm f/3.5–5.6G  
IF-ED  
AF-S Zoom-Nikkor 28–70mm f/2.8D IF-ED  
AF-S NIKKOR 28–300mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
AF Zoom-Micro Nikkor 70  
–180mm f/4.5–5.6D ED  
Ai AF Micro-Nikkor 200mm f/4D IF-ED  
Ai AF Zoom Nikkor 24–120mm F3.5–5.6D (IF)  
n
273  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A Calculating Angle of View  
The size of the area exposed by a 35mm camera is 36 × 24 mm. The size of the area exposed  
by the D7000, in contrast, is 23.6 × 15.6 mm, meaning that the angle of view of a 35mm  
camera is approximately 1.5 times that of the D7000. The approximate focal length of lenses  
for the D7000 in 35mm format can be calculated by multiplying the focal length of the lens  
by about 1.5.  
Picture size (35mm format)  
(36 × 24 mm)  
Picture diagonal  
Lens  
Picture size (D7000)  
(23.6 × 15.6 mm)  
Angle of view (35mm format)  
Angle of view (D7000)  
n
274  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Optional Flash Units (Speedlights)  
The camera supports the Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS) and can be used with  
CLS-compatible flash units. Optional flash units can be attached directly to the  
camera accessory shoe as described below. The accessory shoe is equipped with a  
safety lock for flash units with a locking pin, such as the SB-900, SB-800, SB-700,  
SB-600, and SB-400.  
1 Remove the accessory shoe cover.  
2 Mount the flash unit on the accessory shoe.  
See the manual provided with the flash unit for details.  
The built-in flash will not fire when an optional flash unit is  
attached.  
A The AS-15 Sync Terminal Adapter  
When the AS-15 sync terminal adapter (available separately) is mounted on the camera  
accessory shoe, flash accessories can be connected via a sync terminal.  
D Use Only Nikon Flash Accessories  
Use only Nikon flash units. Negative voltages or voltages over 250 V applied to the accessory  
shoe could not only prevent normal operation, but damage the sync circuitry of the camera  
or flash. Before using a Nikon flash unit not listed in this section, contact a Nikon-authorized  
service representative for more information.  
n
275  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS)  
Nikon’s advanced Creative Lighting System (CLS) offers improved communication  
between the camera and compatible flash units for improved flash photography.  
❚❚CLS-Compatible Flash Units  
The camera can be used with the following CLS-compatible flash units:  
•
The SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, SB-400, and SB-R200:  
Flash unit  
Feature  
Guide  
No. 3  
SB-900 1  
34/111  
48/157  
SB-800  
38/125  
53/174  
SB-700  
28/92  
39/128  
SB-600  
30/98  
42/138  
SB-400  
21/69  
30/98  
SB-R200 2  
10/33  
14/46  
ISO 100  
ISO 200  
1 If a color filter is attached to the SB-900 when AUTO or N (flash) is selected for white balance, the  
camera will automatically detect the filter and adjust white balance appropriately.  
2 Controlled remotely with built-in flash in commander mode or using optional SB-900, SB-800, or  
SB-700 flash unit or SU-800 wireless Speedlight commander.  
3 m/ft., 20 °C (68 °F), SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, and SB-600 at 35 mm zoom head position; SB-900 and  
SB-700 with standard illumination.  
•
The SU-800 wireless speedlight commander: When mounted on a CLS-compatible  
camera, the SU-800 can be used as a commander for remote SB-900, SB-800,  
SB-700, SB-600, or SB-R200 flash units in up to three groups. The SU-800 itself is  
not equipped with a flash.  
A Guide Number  
To calculate the range of the flash at full power, divide the Guide Number by the aperture.  
For example, at ISO 100 the SB-800 has a Guide Number of 38 m or 125 ft. (35 mm zoom head  
position); its range at an aperture of f/5.6 is 38÷5.6 or about 6.8 meters (or in feet,  
125÷5.6=approximately 23 ft. 7 in.). For each twofold increase in ISO sensitivity, multiply  
the Guide Number by the square root of two (approximately 1.4).  
n
276  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The following features are available with CLS-compatible flash units:  
Flash unit  
Advanced Wireless Lighting  
Commander  
SB-900  
Remote  
SB-900 SB-700  
SB-900  
Flash mode/feature  
i-TTL i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital SLR  
AA Auto aperture  
SB-800 SB-700 SB-600 SB-400 SB-800 SB-700 SU-800 1 SB-800 SB-600 SB-R200  
2
4
4
3
2
3
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
5
✔
✔
—
—
—
✔
✔
—
—
—
✔
5
5
—
—
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
✔
✔
✔
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
—
—
✔
✔
5
5
A
Non-TTL auto  
GN Distance-priority manual  
Manual  
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
✔
—
—
6
M
✔
—
—
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
—
RPT Repeating flash  
Auto FP High-Speed Sync 7  
FV lock  
AF-assist for multi-area AF 8  
Flash Color Information Communication  
REAR Rear-curtain sync  
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
✔
—
—
✔
Y
Red-eye reduction  
—
—
—
—
Power zoom  
1 Only available when SU-800 is used to control other flash units.  
2 Standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR is used with spot metering or when selected with flash unit.  
3 Standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR is used with spot metering.  
4 Selected with flash unit.  
5 Auto aperture (AA) is used regardless of mode selected with flash unit.  
6 Can be selected with camera.  
7 Select 1/320 s (Auto FP) or 1/250 s (Auto FP) for Custom Setting e1 (Flash sync speed, 0222).  
8 CPU lens required.  
A Auto Aperture/Non-TTL Auto  
Unless the focal length and maximum aperture are specified using the Non-CPU lens data  
option in the setup menu, choosing auto aperture (AA) when a non-CPU lens is attached  
automatically selects non-TTL auto (A).  
n
277  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚Other Flash Units  
The following flash units can be used in non-TTL auto and manual modes. If they are  
set to TTL, the camera shutter-release button will lock and no photographs can be  
taken.  
SB-30, SB-27 2, SB-22S, SB-23, SB-29 3,  
SB-22, SB-20, SB-16B, SB-15 SB-21B 3, SB-29S 3  
Flash unit  
SB-80DX, SB-28DX, SB-28,  
SB-26, SB-25, SB-24  
Flash mode  
SB-50DX 1  
A
M
Non-TTL auto  
Manual  
Repeating flash  
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
—
✔
—
✔
G
REAR Rear-curtain sync 4  
1 Select mode P, S, A, or M, lower built-in flash, and use optional flash unit only.  
2 Flash mode is automatically set to TTL and shutter-release is disabled. Set flash unit to A (non-TTL auto  
flash).  
3 Autofocus is available with AF-S VR Micro-Nikkor 105mm f/2.8G IF-ED and AF-S Micro NIKKOR 60mm  
f/2.8G ED lenses only.  
4 Available when camera is used to select flash mode.  
A Flash Control Mode  
The information display shows the flash control mode for optional flash units attached to the  
camera accessory shoe as follows:  
Flash sync  
Auto FP (0222)  
i-TTL  
Auto aperture (AA) *  
Non-TTL auto flash (A)  
Distance-priority manual (GN)  
Manual  
Repeating flash  
—
Advanced wireless lighting  
* Available with SB-900, and SB-800 only.  
n
278  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D Notes on Optional Flash Units  
Refer to the Speedlight manual for detailed instructions. If the flash unit supports CLS, refer  
to the section on CLS-compatible digital SLR cameras. The D7000 is not included in the  
“digital SLR” category in the SB-80DX, SB-28DX, and SB-50DX manuals.  
If an optional flash unit is attached in shooting modes other than j, the flash will fire with  
every shot, even in modes in which the built-in flash can not be used.  
i-TTL flash control can be used at ISO sensitivities between 100 and 6400. At values over  
6400, the desired results may not be achieved at some ranges or aperture settings. If the  
flash-ready indicator blinks for about three seconds after a photograph is taken, the flash has  
fired at full power and the photograph may be underexposed.  
When an SC-series 17, 28, or 29 sync cable is used for off-camera flash photography, correct  
exposure may not be achieved in i-TTL mode. We recommend that you choose spot  
metering to select standard i-TTL flash control. Take a test shot and view the results in the  
monitor.  
In i-TTL, use the flash panel or bounce adapter provided with the flash unit. Do not use other  
panels such as diffusion panels, as this may produce incorrect exposure.  
The SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, and SB-400 provide red-eye reduction, while the SB-900,  
SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, and SU-800 provide AF-assist illumination with the following  
restrictions:  
•
SB-900: AF-assist illumination is available for all  
focus points; with 17–135 mm AF lenses,  
however, autofocus is available only with the  
focus points shown at right (if other focus points  
are selected, the AF-assist illuminator may not  
provide sufficient illumination for autofocus).  
SB-800, SB-600, and SU-800: With 24–105 mm AF  
lenses, AF-assist illumination is available only with  
the focus points shown at right.  
SB-700: AF-assist illumination is available for all  
focus points; with 24–135 mm AF lenses,  
however, autofocus is available only with the  
focus points shown at right (if other focus points  
are selected, the AF-assist illuminator may not  
provide sufficient illumination for autofocus).  
17–19 mm  
24–34 mm  
20–105 mm 106–135 mm  
•
•
35–49 mm  
50–105 mm  
24–135 mm  
n
279  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Accessories  
At the time of writing, the following accessories were available for the D7000.  
•
Rechargeable Li-ion Battery EN-EL15 (021–24): Additional EN-EL15 batteries are  
available from local retailers and Nikon-authorized service representatives.  
Battery Charger MH-25 (021): Recharge EN-EL15 batteries.  
•
•
Multi-Power Battery Pack MB-D11: The MB-D11 is equipped with a shutter-release  
button, AE/AF lock button, multi selector, and main- and sub-command dials for  
improved operation when taking photographs in portrait (tall) orientation.  
When attaching the MB-D11, remove the camera MB-D11 contact cover.  
Power Connector EP-5B, AC Adapter EH-5a: These accessories can be used to power the  
camera for extended periods (EH-5 AC adapters can also be used). The EP-5B is  
required to connect the camera to the EH-5a; see page 282 for details. Note that  
when the camera is used with an MB-D11, the EP-5B must be inserted into the  
MB-D11, not the camera. Do not attempt to use the camera with power  
connectors inserted into both the camera and MB-D11.  
Wireless Transmitter WT-4: Connects the camera to wireless and Ethernet networks.  
The photographs on the camera memory card can be viewed by computers on  
the same network or copied to a computer for long-term storage (be sure to  
always use the latest version of the software supplied with the WT-4). The  
camera can also be controlled from any computer on the network using  
Camera Control Pro 2 (available separately). Note that the WT-4 requires an  
independent power source; an EH-6 AC adapter or EN-EL3e battery is  
recommended. See the WT-4 manual for details.  
Power  
sources  
•
•
Wireless  
LAN  
adapters  
• Filters intended for special-effects photography may interfere with autofocus or  
the electronic rangefinder.  
• The D7000 can not be used with linear polarizing filters. Use C-PL or C-PL II  
circular polarizing filters instead.  
• NC filters are recommended for protecting the lens.  
Filters  
• To prevent ghosting, use of a filter is not recommended when the subject is  
framed against a bright light, or when a bright light source is in the frame.  
• Center-weighted metering is recommended with filters with exposure factors  
(filter factors) over 1 × (Y44, Y48, Y52, O56, R60, X0, X1, C-PL, ND2S, ND4, ND4S,  
ND8, ND8S, ND400, A2, A12, B2, B8, B12). See the filter manual for details.  
n
280  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
•
DK-20C Eyepiece Correction Lenses: Lenses are available with diopters of –5, –4, –3, –2,  
0, +0.5, +1, +2, and +3 m–1 when the camera diopter adjustment control is in the  
neutral position (–1 m–1). Use eyepiece correction lenses only if the desired  
focus can not be achieved with the built in diopter adjustment control (–3 to  
+1 m–1). Test eyepiece correction lenses before purchase to ensure that the  
desired focus can be achieved. The rubber eyecup can not be used with  
eyepiece correction lenses.  
•
•
Magnifying Eyepiece DK-21M: The DK-21M magnifies the view through the  
viewfinder by approximately 1.17 × (50 mm f/1.4 lens at infinity; –1.0 m–1) for  
greater precision when framing.  
Magnifier DG-2: The DG-2 magnifies the scene displayed in the center of the  
viewfinder for greater precision during focusing. Eyepiece adapter required  
(available separately).  
Viewfinder  
eyepiece  
accessories  
•
•
Eyepiece Adapter DK-22: The DK-22 is used when attaching the DG-2 magnifier.  
Right-Angle Viewing Attachment DR-6: The DR-6 attaches at a right angle to the  
viewfinder eyepiece, allowing the image in the viewfinder to be viewed at right  
angles to the lens (for example, from directly above when the camera is  
horizontal).  
•
•
Capture NX 2: A complete photo editing package offering such features as white  
balance adjustment and color control points.  
Camera Control Pro 2: Control the camera remotely from a computer to record  
movies and photographs and save photographs directly to the computer hard  
disk.  
Software  
Body cap  
Note: Use the latest versions of Nikon software. Most Nikon software offers an auto  
update feature when the computer is connected to the Internet. See the websites  
listed on page xvii for the latest information on supported operating systems.  
BF-1B and BF-1A Body Caps: The body cap keeps the mirror, viewfinder screen, and low-  
pass filter free of dust when a lens is not in place.  
ML-L3 wireless remote control: Use as a remote shutter release for self-portraits or to  
prevent blur caused by camera shake. The ML-L3 uses a 3 V CR2025 battery.  
Remote  
controls  
Pressing the battery-chamber latch to the right (q), insert a fingernail into the gap  
and open the battery chamber (w). Ensure that the battery is inserted in the  
correct orientation (r).  
The D7000 is equipped with an accessory terminal for  
MC-DC2 remote cords (073) and GP-1 GPS units (0162), which  
connect with the 4mark on the connector aligned with  
the 2next to the accessory terminal (close the camera  
connector cover when the terminal is not in use).  
Accessory  
terminal  
accessories  
n
281  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Attaching a Power Connector and AC Adapter  
Turn the camera off before attaching an optional power connector and AC adapter.  
1 Ready the camera.  
Open the battery-chamber (q) and power  
connector (w) covers.  
2 Insert the EP-5B power connector.  
Be sure to insert the connector in the orientation  
shown, using the connector to keep the orange  
battery latch pressed to one side. The latch locks  
the connector in place when the connector is  
fully inserted.  
3 Close the battery-chamber cover.  
Position the power connector cable so that it  
passes through the power connector slot and  
close the battery-chamber cover.  
4 Connect the AC adapter.  
Connect the AC adapter power cable to the AC socket on AC adapter (e) and  
the EP-5B power cable to the DC socket (r). A V icon is displayed in the  
monitor when the camera is powered by the AC adapter and power connector.  
n
282  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Caring for the Camera  
Storage  
When the camera will not be used for an extended period, replace the monitor cover,  
remove the battery, and store the battery in a cool, dry area with the terminal cover  
in place. To prevent mold or mildew, store the camera in a dry, well-ventilated area.  
Do not store your camera with naphtha or camphor moth balls or in locations that:  
• are poorly ventilated or subject to humidities of over 60%  
• are next to equipment that produces strong electromagnetic fields, such as  
televisions or radios  
• are exposed to temperatures above 50 °C (122 °F) or below –10 °C (14 °F)  
Cleaning  
Use a blower to remove dust and lint, then wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth. After  
Camera  
body  
using the camera at the beach or seaside, wipe off sand or salt with a cloth lightly  
dampened in distilled water and dry thoroughly. Important: Dust or other foreign  
matter inside the camera may cause damage not covered under warranty.  
These glass elements are easily damaged. Remove dust and lint with a blower. If  
using an aerosol blower, keep the can vertical to prevent the discharge of liquid. To  
remove fingerprints and other stains, apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft  
cloth and clean with care.  
Lens,  
mirror, and  
viewfinder  
Remove dust and lint with a blower. When removing fingerprints and other stains,  
wipe the surface lightly with a soft cloth or chamois leather. Do not apply pressure,  
as this could result in damage or malfunction.  
Monitor  
Do not use alcohol, thinner, or other volatile chemicals.  
D Servicing the Camera and Accessories  
The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing. Nikon recommends that the  
camera be inspected by the original retailer or Nikon-authorized service representative once  
every one to two years, and that it be serviced once every three to five years (note that fees  
apply to these services). Frequent inspection and servicing are particularly recommended if  
the camera is used professionally. Any accessories regularly used with the camera, such as  
lenses or optional Speedlights, should be included when the camera is inspected or  
serviced.  
n
283  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Low-Pass Filter  
The image sensor that acts as the camera’s picture element is fitted with a low-pass  
filter to prevent moiré. If you suspect that dirt or dust on the filter is appearing in  
photographs, you can clean the filter using the Clean image sensor option in the  
setup menu. The filter can be cleaned at any time using the Clean now option, or  
cleaning can be performed automatically when the camera is turned on or off.  
❚❚“Clean Now”  
1 Place the camera base down.  
Image sensor cleaning is most effective  
when the camera is placed base down as  
shown at right.  
2 Display the Clean image sensor menu.  
G button  
Press the G button to display the menus.  
Highlight Clean image sensor in the setup  
menu and press 2.  
3 Select Clean now.  
Highlight Clean now and press J.  
The message shown at right will be  
displayed while cleaning is in progress.  
The message shown at right will be  
displayed when cleaning is in complete.  
n
284  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚“Clean at Startup/Shutdown”  
Choose from the following options:  
Option  
Description  
The image sensor is automatically cleaned each time the camera is turned  
on.  
The image sensor is automatically cleaned during shutdown each time  
the camera is turned off.  
5
6
Clean at startup  
Clean at  
shutdown  
Clean at startup  
& shutdown  
Cleaning off  
7
8
The image sensor is cleaned automatically at startup and at shutdown.  
Automatic image sensor cleaning off.  
1 Select Clean at startup/shutdown.  
Display the Clean image sensor menu as  
described in Step 2 on the previous page.  
Highlight Clean at startup/shutdown and  
press 2.  
2 Select an option.  
Highlight an option and press J.  
D Image Sensor Cleaning  
Using camera controls interrupts image sensor cleaning. Image sensor cleaning may not be  
performed at startup if the flash is charging.  
Cleaning is performed by vibrating the low-pass filter. If dust can not be fully removed using  
the options in the Clean image sensor menu, clean the image sensor manually (0286) or  
consult a Nikon-authorized service representative.  
If image sensor cleaning is performed several times in succession, image sensor cleaning  
may be temporarily disabled to protect the camera’s internal circuitry. Cleaning can be  
performed again after a short wait.  
n
285  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚“Manual Cleaning”  
If foreign matter can not be removed from the low-pass filter using the Clean image  
sensor option in the setup menu (0284), the filter can be cleaned manually as  
described below. Note, however, that the filter is extremely delicate and easily  
damaged. Nikon recommends that the filter be cleaned only by Nikon-authorized  
service personnel.  
1 Charge the battery or connect an AC adapter.  
A reliable power source is required when inspecting or cleaning the low-pass  
filter. Turn the camera off and insert a fully-charged EN-EL15 battery or connect  
an optional EP-5B power connector and EH-5a AC adapter.  
2 Remove the lens.  
Turn the camera off and remove the lens.  
3 Select Lock mirror up for cleaning.  
G button  
Turn the camera on and press the G  
button to display the menus. Highlight Lock  
mirror up for cleaning in the setup menu  
and press 2(note that this option is not  
available at battery levels of J or below).  
4 Press J.  
The message shown at right will be  
displayed in the monitor and a row of dashes  
will appear in the control panel and  
viewfinder. To restore normal operation  
without inspecting the low-pass filter, turn  
the camera off.  
n
286  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 Raise the mirror.  
Press the shutter-release button all the way  
down. The mirror will be raised and the  
shutter curtain will open, revealing the low-  
pass filter.  
6 Examine the low-pass filter.  
Holding the camera so that light falls on the low-pass filter,  
examine the filter for dust or lint. If no foreign objects are  
present, proceed to Step 8.  
7 Clean the filter.  
Remove any dust and lint from the filter with a blower. Do  
not use a blower-brush, as the bristles could damage the  
filter. Dirt that can not be removed with a blower can only  
be removed by Nikon-authorized service personnel.  
Under no circumstances should you touch or wipe the  
filter.  
8 Turn the camera off.  
The mirror will return to the down position and the shutter curtain will close.  
Replace the lens or body cap.  
n
287  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A Use a Reliable Power Source  
The shutter curtain is delicate and easily damaged. If the camera powers off while the mirror  
is raised, the curtain will close automatically. To prevent damage to the curtain, observe the  
following precautions:  
• Do not turn the camera off or remove or disconnect the power source while the mirror is  
raised.  
• If the battery runs low while the mirror is raised, a beep will sound and the self-timer lamp  
will blink to warn that the shutter curtain will close and the mirror will be lowered after  
about two minutes. End cleaning or inspection immediately.  
D Foreign Matter on the Low-Pass Filter  
Nikon takes every possible precaution to prevent foreign matter from coming into contact  
with the low-pass filter during production and shipping. The D7000, however, is designed to  
be used with interchangeable lenses, and foreign matter may enter the camera when lenses  
are removed or exchanged. Once inside the camera, this foreign matter may adhere to the  
low-pass filter, where it may appear in photographs taken under certain conditions. To  
protect the camera when no lens is in place, be sure to replace the body cap provided with  
the camera, being careful to first remove all dust and other foreign matter that may be  
adhering to the body cap. Avoid exchanging lenses in dusty environments.  
Should foreign matter find its way onto the low-pass filter, clean the filter as described  
above, or have the filter cleaned by authorized Nikon service personnel. Photographs  
affected by the presence of foreign matter on the filter can be retouched using Capture NX 2  
(available separately; 0281) or the clean image options available in some third-party  
imaging applications.  
n
288  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Caring for the Camera and Battery:  
Cautions  
Do not drop: The product may malfunction if subjected to strong shocks or vibration.  
Keep dry: This product is not waterproof, and may malfunction if immersed in water or exposed  
to high levels of humidity. Rusting of the internal mechanism can cause irreparable damage.  
Avoid sudden changes in temperature: Sudden changes in temperature, such as those that occur  
when entering or leaving a heated building on a cold day, can cause condensation inside the  
device. To prevent condensation, place the device in a carrying case or plastic bag before  
exposing it to sudden changes in temperature.  
Keep away from strong magnetic fields: Do not use or store this device in the vicinity of equipment  
that generates strong electromagnetic radiation or magnetic fields. Strong static charges or  
the magnetic fields produced by equipment such as radio transmitters could interfere with the  
monitor, damage data stored on the memory card, or affect the product’s internal circuitry.  
Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun: Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun or other strong light  
source for an extended period. Intense light may cause the image sensor to deteriorate or  
produce a white blur effect in photographs.  
Turn the product off before removing or disconnecting the power source: Do not unplug the product or  
remove the battery while the product is on or while images are being recorded or deleted.  
Forcibly cutting power in these circumstances could result in loss of data or in damage to  
product memory or internal circuitry. To prevent an accidental interruption of power, avoid  
carrying the product from one location to another while the AC adapter is connected.  
Cleaning: Keep the lens contacts clean. When cleaning the camera body, use a blower to gently  
remove dust and lint, then wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth. After using the camera at the  
beach or seaside, wipe off any sand or salt using a cloth lightly dampened in pure water and  
then dry the camera thoroughly. In rare instances, static electricity may cause LCDs to light up  
or go dark. This does not indicate a malfunction, and the display will soon return to normal.  
The lens and mirror are easily damaged. Dust and lint should be gently removed with a blower.  
When using an aerosol blower, keep the can vertical to prevent discharge of liquid. To remove  
fingerprints and other stains from the lens, apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft cloth  
and wipe the lens carefully.  
See “The Low-Pass Filter” (0284, 286) for information on cleaning the low-pass filter.  
Do not touch the shutter curtain: The shutter curtain is extremely thin and easily damaged. Under  
no circumstances should you exert pressure on the curtain, poke it with cleaning tools, or  
subject it to powerful air currents from a blower. These actions could scratch, deform, or tear  
the curtain.  
n
289  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Storage: To prevent mold or mildew, store the camera in a dry, well-ventilated area. If you are  
using an AC adapter, unplug the adapter to prevent fire. If the product will not be used for an  
extended period, remove the battery to prevent leakage and store the camera in a plastic bag  
containing a desiccant. Do not, however, store the camera case in a plastic bag, as this may  
cause the material to deteriorate. Note that desiccant gradually loses its capacity to absorb  
moisture and should be replaced at regular intervals.  
To prevent mold or mildew, take the camera out of storage at least once a month. Turn the  
camera on and release the shutter a few times before putting it away.  
Store the battery in a cool, dry place. Replace the terminal cover before putting the battery  
away.  
Notes on the monitor: The monitor may contain a few pixels that are always lit or that do not light.  
This is common to all TFT LCD monitors and does not indicate a malfunction. Images recorded  
with the product are unaffected.  
Images in the monitor may be difficult to see in a bright light.  
Do not apply pressure to the monitor, as this could cause damage or malfunction. Dust or lint  
on the monitor can be removed with a blower. Stains can be removed by wiping lightly with a  
soft cloth or chamois leather. Should the monitor break, care should be taken to avoid injury  
from broken glass and to prevent liquid crystal from the monitor touching the skin or entering  
the eyes and mouth.  
Replace the monitor cover when transporting the camera or leaving it unattended.  
Batteries: Batteries may leak or explode if improperly handled. Observe the following  
precautions when handling batteries:  
• Use only batteries approved for use in this equipment.  
• Do not expose the battery to flame or excessive heat.  
• Keep the battery terminals clean.  
• Turn the product off before replacing the battery.  
• Remove the battery from the camera or charger when not in use and replace the terminal  
cover. These devices draw minute amounts of charge even when off and could draw the  
battery down to the point that it will no longer function. If the battery will not be used for  
some time, insert it in the camera and run it flat before removing it and storing it in a location  
with an ambient temperature of 15 to 25 °C (59 to 77 °F; avoid hot or extremely cold  
locations). Repeat this process at least once every six months.  
• The internal temperature of the battery may rise while the battery is in use. Attempting to  
charge the battery while the internal temperature is elevated will impair battery  
performance, and the battery may not charge or charge only partially. Wait for the battery  
to cool before charging.  
• Continuing to charge the battery after it is fully charged can impair battery performance.  
• A marked drop in the time a fully charged battery retains its charge when used at room  
temperature indicates that it requires replacement. Purchase a new EN-EL15 battery.  
n
290  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Charge the battery before use. When taking photographs on important occasions, ready a  
spare EN-EL15 battery and keep it fully charged. Depending on your location, it may be  
difficult to purchase replacement batteries on short notice. Note that on cold days, the  
capacity of batteries tends to decrease. Be sure the battery is fully charged before taking  
photographs outside in cold weather. Keep a spare battery in a warm place and exchange  
the two as necessary. Once warmed, a cold battery may recover some of its charge.  
• Used batteries are a valuable resource; recycle in accord with local regulations.  
n
291  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Available Settings  
The following table lists the settings that can be adjusted in each mode.  
k, p, l, m,  
n, o, r, t,  
x, y, 1, 2,  
i
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
✔
✔
j
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
✔
✔
P
S, A, M s, 0 u, v  
w
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
✔
✔
z
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
✔
✔
3
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
Storage folder  
File naming  
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
✔
✔
Role played by card in Slot 2  
Image quality 2  
Image size 2  
JPEG compression  
NEF (RAW) recording  
White balance 2  
Set Picture Control  
Auto distortion control  
Color space  
Active D-Lighting  
Long exp. NR  
High ISO NR  
ISO sensitivity settings 2  
Multiple exposure 2  
Movie settings  
Interval timer shooting  
Remote control mode  
AF mode (viewfinder)  
AF-area mode (viewfinder)  
AF mode (Live view/movie)  
AF-area mode (Live view/movie)  
AE-L/AF-L button hold  
Flexible program  
Metering  
Exposure compensation  
Bracketing  
Flash mode  
Flash compensation  
FV lock  
3
3
2
2
3
3
3
3
—
—
✔
—
—
—
—
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
4
4
4
✔
—
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
—
✔
n
292  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
k, p, l, m,  
n, o, r, t,  
x, y, 1, 2,  
i
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
j
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
P
S, A, M s, 0 u, v  
w
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
z
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
3
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
a1: AF-C priority selection  
a2: AF-S priority selection  
a3: Focus tracking with lock-on  
a4: AF point illumination  
a5: Focus point wrap-around  
a6: Number of focus points  
a7: Built-in AF-assist illuminator  
a8: Live view/movie AF 2  
b1: ISO sensitivity step value  
b2: EV steps for exposure cntrl.  
b3: Easy exposure compensation  
b4: Center-weighted area  
b5: Fine tune optimal exposure  
c1: Shutter-release button AE-L  
c2: Auto meter-off delay  
c3: Self-timer  
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
c4: Monitor off delay  
c5: Remote on duration  
d1: Beep  
d2: Viewfinder grid display  
d3: ISO display and adjustment  
d4: Viewfinder warning display  
d5: Screen tips  
d6: CL mode shooting speed  
d7: Max. continuous release  
d8: File number sequence  
d9: Information display  
d10: LCD illumination  
d11: Exposure delay mode  
d12: Flash warning  
d13: MB-D11 battery type  
d14: Battery order  
n
293  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
k, p, l, m,  
n, o, r, t,  
x, y, 1, 2,  
i
✔
—
—
—
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
j
✔
—
—
—
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
P
S, A, M s, 0 u, v  
w
✔
—
—
—
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
z
✔
—
—
—
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
3
✔
—
—
—
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
e1: Flash sync speed  
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
e2: Flash shutter speed  
e3: Flash cntrl for built-in flash  
e4: Modeling flash  
e5: Auto bracketing set  
e6: Bracketing order  
f1: D switch  
f2: OK button (shooting mode)  
f3: Assign Fn button  
f4: Assign preview button  
f5: Assign AE-L/AF-L button  
f6: Customize command dials  
f7: Release button to use dial  
f8: Slot empty release lock  
f9: Reverse indicators  
f10: Assign MB-D11 4 button  
1 Reset with Reset shooting menu (0202).  
2 Reset with two-button reset (0151).  
3 Fixed at Auto.  
4 Reset when mode dial is rotated to new setting.  
5 Reset with Reset custom settings (0207).  
n
294  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Defaults  
The default settings for the options in the camera menus are listed below. For  
information on two-button resets, see page 151.  
❚❚Playback Menu Defaults  
Option  
Default  
D7000  
Off  
0
Option  
Default  
Off  
0
Playback folder  
Image review  
After delete  
195 Rotate tall  
200 Slide show  
200  
Show next  
200 Frame interval  
2 s  
201  
❚❚Shooting Menu Defaults 1  
Option  
Default  
DSC  
Overflow  
JPEG normal 85  
Large  
0
Option  
Default  
Normal  
0
File naming  
204 High ISO NR  
89 ISO sensitivity settings  
205  
Role played by card in Slot 2  
Image quality  
ISO sensitivity  
P, S, A, M  
Other modes  
Auto ISO sensitivity control  
Multiple exposure  
Movie settings  
Image size  
88  
87  
100  
Auto  
Off  
101  
JPEG compression  
NEF (RAW) recording  
Size priority  
103  
152  
Lossless  
compressed  
14-bit  
Reset 2  
Type  
87  
NEF (RAW) bit depth  
White balance  
1920×1080;  
24 fps; high  
quality  
Auto sensitivity  
(A)  
Auto > Normal 117 Movie quality  
Fine tuning  
Off  
5000 K  
Standard  
Off  
sRGB  
Off  
119  
122  
131  
205  
141  
139  
205  
60  
Choose color temp.  
Set Picture Control  
Auto distortion control  
Color space  
Active D-Lighting  
Long exp. NR  
Microphone  
Destination  
Slot 1  
Off  
Reset 3  
Manual movie settings  
Interval timer shooting  
Remote control mode  
155  
Delayed remote 80  
Off  
1 Default settings restored with Reset shooting menu (0202).  
2 Reset shooting menu can not be selected while shooting is in progress.  
3 Shooting ends when reset is performed.  
n
295  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚Custom Settings Menu Defaults *  
Option  
Default  
Release  
Focus  
3 (Normal)  
Auto  
No wrap  
39 points  
On  
0
208  
208  
209  
209  
209  
210  
210  
Option  
Default  
0
a1 AF-C priority selection  
a2 AF-S priority selection  
a3 Focus tracking with lock-on  
a4 AF point illumination  
a5 Focus point wrap-around  
a6 Number of focus points  
a7 Built-in AF-assist illuminator  
a8 Live view/movie AF  
Autofocus mode  
d1 Beep  
Volume  
Pitch  
d2 Viewfinder grid display  
d3 ISO display and adjustment Show frame count 216  
d4 Viewfinder warning display  
d5 Screen tips  
d6 CL mode shooting speed  
d7 Max. continuous release  
d8 File number sequence  
d9 Information display  
Off  
High  
Off  
215  
216  
On  
On  
3 fps  
100  
On  
Auto  
Off  
Off  
216  
216  
217  
217  
218  
219  
219  
219  
219  
Single-servo AF 211  
Wide-area AF  
AF-area mode  
m, o, w, 1, 2, 3  
n, 0  
Normal-area AF 211 d10 LCD illumination  
Other shooting modes  
b1 ISO sensitivity step value  
b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl.  
b3 Easy exposure compensation  
b4 Center-weighted area  
b5 Fine tune optimal exposure  
Matrix metering  
Face-priority AF  
1/3 step  
1/3 step  
Off  
d11 Exposure delay mode  
211 d12 Flash warning  
211 d13 MB-D11 battery type  
On  
LR6 (AA alkaline) 220  
Use MB-D11  
batteries first  
1/250 s  
1/60 s  
212  
d14 Battery order  
213  
221  
ø 8 mm  
e1 Flash sync speed  
e2 Flash shutter speed  
e3 Flash cntrl for built-in flash/  
Optional flash  
222  
223  
0
0
0
Center-weighted metering  
Spot metering  
213  
TTL  
223  
e4 Modeling flash  
e5 Auto bracketing set  
On  
AE & flash  
MTR > under >  
over  
LCD backlight (D) 229  
Select center focus  
228  
229  
c1 Shutter-release button AE-L  
c2 Auto meter-off delay  
c3 Self-timer  
Self-timer delay  
Number of shots  
Interval between shots  
c4 Monitor off delay  
Playback  
Off  
6 s  
213  
214  
e6 Bracketing order  
f1 D switch  
229  
10 s  
0
0.5 s  
214  
f2 OK button (shooting mode)  
229  
point  
FV lock  
Preview  
f3 Assign Fn button  
f4 Assign preview button  
f5 Assign AE-L/AF-L button  
f6 Customize command dials  
Reverse rotation  
230  
232  
232  
10 s  
20 s  
10 s  
4 s  
10 min  
1 min  
Menus  
Information display  
Image review  
Live view  
AE/AF lock  
215  
215  
No  
Off  
Change main/sub  
Aperture setting  
Menus and playback  
c5 Remote on duration  
233  
234  
Sub-command dial  
Off  
No  
f7 Release button to use dial  
f8 Slot empty release lock  
f9 Reverse indicators  
f10 Assign MB-D11 4 button  
Enable release 234  
234  
AE/AF lock  
235  
* Default settings restored with Reset custom settings (0207).  
n
296  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚Setup Menu Defaults  
Option  
Save user settings  
U1  
Default  
0
Option  
Time zone and date  
Daylight saving time  
Auto image rotation  
Default  
0
Off  
On  
237  
239  
Shooting mode  
defaults to P  
75  
U2  
LCD brightness  
Clean image sensor  
0
237 GPS  
Auto meter-off  
Enable  
Yes  
Enable  
162  
247  
Clean at startup &  
shutdown  
Use GPS to set camera clock  
Eye-Fi upload  
Clean at startup/shutdown  
284  
HDMI  
Output resolution  
Device control  
Auto  
On  
194  
n
297  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Exposure Program (Mode P)  
The exposure program for mode P is shown in the following graph:  
ISO 100; lens with maximum aperture of f/1.4 and minimum  
aperture of f/16 (e.g., AF-S NIKKOR 50mm f/1.4G)  
f/1  
f/1.4  
f/2  
f/2.8  
f/4  
f/5.6  
f/8  
f/11  
f/16  
f/22  
f/32  
30" 15" 8" 4" 2" 1"  
2
4
8
15 30 60 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000  
Shutter speed (seconds)  
The maximum and minimum values for EV vary with ISO sensitivity; the above graph  
assumes an ISO sensitivity of ISO 100 equivalent. When matrix metering is used,  
values over 161/3 EV are reduced to 161/3 EV.  
n
298  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
If the camera fails to function as expected, check the list of common problems below  
before consulting your retailer or Nikon representative.  
Display  
Viewfinder is out of focus: Adjust viewfinder focus or use optional eyepiece correction lenses  
(034, 281).  
Viewfinder is dark: Insert a fully-charged battery (021, 35).  
Displays turn off without warning: Choose longer delays for Custom Setting c2 (Auto meter-off  
delay) or c4 (Monitor off delay) (0214, 215).  
Camera does not respond to controls: See “A Note on Electronically-Controlled Cameras,” below.  
Control panel and viewfinder displays are unresponsive and dim: The response times and brightness of  
these displays vary with temperature.  
Fine lines are visible around active focus point or display turns red when focus point is highlighted: These  
phenomena are normal for this type of viewfinder and do not indicate a malfunction.  
A A Note on Electronically-Controlled Cameras  
In extremely rare instances, unusual characters may appear in the control panel and the  
camera may stop functioning. In most cases, this phenomenon is caused by a strong  
external static charge. Turn the camera off, remove and replace the battery, taking care to  
avoid burns, and turn the camera on again, or, if you are using an AC adapter (available  
separately), disconnect and reconnect the adapter and turn the camera on again. If the  
problem persists, contact your retailer or Nikon-authorized service representative.  
n
299  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Shooting (All Modes)  
Camera takes time to turn on: Delete files or folders.  
Shutter-release disabled:  
• Memory card is locked, full, or not inserted (029, 32).  
• Built-in flash is charging (039).  
• Camera is not in focus (038).  
• CPU lens with aperture ring attached but aperture not locked at highest f-number. If B is  
displayed in control panel, select Aperture ring for Custom Setting f6 (Customize  
command dials) > Aperture setting to use lens aperture ring to adjust aperture (0233).  
• Non-CPU lens is attached but camera is not in mode A or M (0270).  
No photo taken when remote control shutter-release button is pressed:  
• Replace battery in remote control (0281).  
• Choose remote control release mode (080).  
• Flash is charging (082).  
• Time selected for Custom Setting c5 (Remote on duration, 0215) has elapsed: press  
camera shutter-release button halfway.  
• Bright light is interfering with remote.  
Photos are out of focus:  
• Rotate focus-mode selector to AF (091).  
• Camera unable to focus using autofocus: use manual focus or focus lock (097, 99).  
Focus does not lock when shutter-release button is pressed halfway: Use AE-L/AF-L button to lock focus  
when AF-C is selected for focus mode or when photographing moving subjects in AF-A mode.  
Can not select focus point:  
• Unlock focus selector lock (096).  
• H (auto-area AF) or ! (face-priority AF) selected for AF-area mode: choose another mode.  
• Camera is in playback mode (0163) or menus are in use (0195).  
• Press shutter-release button halfway to turn monitor off or activate exposure meters (039).  
Subject-tracking AF not available: Select a non-monochrome Picture Control (0131).  
Can not select AF-area mode: Manual focus selected (055, 99).  
Only one shot taken each time shutter-release button is pressed in continuous release mode: Lower built-in  
flash (0143).  
Image size can not be changed: Image quality set to NEF (RAW) (085).  
Camera is slow to record photos: Turn long exposure noise reduction off (0205).  
Noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) appear in photos:  
• Choose lower ISO sensitivity or use high ISO noise reduction (0101, 205).  
• Shutter speed is slower than 8 s: use long exposure noise reduction (0205).  
n
300  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AF-assist illuminator does not light:  
• AF-assist lamp does not light if AF-C is selected for autofocus mode (091) or if continuous-  
servo autofocus is selected when the camera is in AF-A mode. Choose AF-S. If an option other  
than H (auto-area AF) is selected for AF-area mode, select center focus point (094, 96).  
• The camera is currently in live view or a movie is being recorded.  
•
Off selected for Custom Setting a7 (Built-in AF-assist illuminator) (0210).  
• Illuminator has turned off automatically. Illuminator may become hot with continued use;  
wait for lamp to cool down.  
Beep does not sound:  
•
Off is selected for Custom Setting d1 (Beep; 0215) > Volume.  
• Camera is in quiet shutter-release mode (077) or movie is being recorded (057).  
• Focus-mode selector is set to M (099) or AF-C is selected for autofocus mode (091).  
•
Release is selected for Custom Setting a2 (AF-S priority selection; 0208).  
Smudges appear in photographs: Clean front and rear lens elements. If problem persists, perform  
image sensor cleaning (0284).  
Sound is not recorded with movies: Microphone off is selected for Movie settings > Microphone.  
The brightness of the image in the monitor differs from the exposure of photographs taken in live view:  
• Center-weighted or spot metering is selected (0105).  
• The camera is in mode M.  
• The subject is too bright or too dark.  
• Active D-Lighting is in effect (0139).  
• The photograph is a long time-exposure (073).  
• The flash is used (0143).  
Flicker or banding appears during live view or movie recording: Choose an option for Flicker reduction  
that matches the frequency of the local AC power supply (0237).  
Bright bands appear during live view or movie recording: A flash or other light source with brief duration  
was used during live view or movie recording.  
Menu item can not be selected: Some options are not available in all modes.  
n
301  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Shooting (P, S, A, M)  
Shutter-release disabled:  
• Non-CPU lens is attached: rotate camera mode dial to A or M (0270).  
• Mode dial rotated to S after shutter speed of A selected in mode M: choose new shutter  
speed (069).  
Camera is slow to respond to shutter-release button: Select Off for Custom Setting d11 (Exposure  
delay mode; 0219).  
Full range of shutter speeds not available:  
• Flash in use. Flash sync speed can be selected using Custom Setting e1 (Flash sync speed);  
when using optional SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, or SB-R200 flash unit, choose 1/320 s  
(Auto FP) or 1/250 s (Auto FP) for full range of shutter speeds (0222).  
• When On is selected for Movie options > Manual movie settings in the shooting menu,  
shutter speed can be set to values between 1/8000 s and 1/30 s (060).  
Colors are unnatural:  
• Adjust white balance to match light source (0117).  
• Adjust Set Picture Control settings (0131).  
Can not measure white balance: Subject is too dark or too bright (0125).  
Image can not be selected as source for preset white balance: Image was not created with D7000  
(0126).  
White balance bracketing unavailable:  
• NEF (RAW) or NEF+JPEG image quality option selected for image quality (085).  
• Multiple exposure mode is in effect (0154).  
Effects of Picture Control differ from image to image: A (auto) is selected for sharpening, contrast, or  
saturation. For consistent results over a series of photos, choose another setting (0134).  
Metering can not be changed: Autoexposure lock is in effect (0106).  
Exposure compensation can not be used: Choose mode P, S, or A (068, 69, 70).  
Noise (reddish areas or other artifacts) appears in long time-exposures: Enable long exposure noise  
reduction (0205).  
n
302  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
Flashing areas, shooting data, or graphs appear on images: Press 1or 3to choose photo information  
displayed, or change settings for Display mode (0165, 197).  
NEF (RAW) image is not played back: Photo was taken at image quality of NEF + JPEG (085).  
Can not view pictures recorded with other cameras: Pictures recorded with other makes of camera may  
not be displayed correctly.  
Message is displayed stating that no images are available for playback: Select All for Playback folder  
(0195).  
“Tall” (portrait) orientation photos are displayed in “wide” (landscape) orientation:  
• Select On for Rotate tall (0200).  
• Photo was taken with Off selected for Auto image rotation (0239).  
• Camera was pointed up or down when photo was taken (0239).  
• Photo is displayed in image review (0200).  
Can not delete picture:  
• Picture is protected: remove protection (0174).  
• Memory card is locked (033).  
Can not retouch picture: Photo can not be further edited with this camera (0249).  
Can not change print order:  
• Memory card is full: delete pictures (036, 175).  
• Memory card is locked (033).  
Can not select photo for printing: Photo is in NEF (RAW) format. Create JPEG copy using NEF (RAW)  
processing or transfer to computer and print using ViewNX 2 (supplied) or Capture NX 2  
(available separately).  
Picture is not displayed on TV:  
• Choose correct video mode (0237) or output resolution (0194).  
• A/V (0191) or HDMI (0193) cable is not correctly connected.  
Camera does not respond to remote control for HDMI-CEC television:  
• Select On for HDMI > Device control in the setup menu (0194).  
• Adjust HDMI-CEC settings for the television as described in documentation provided with  
the device.  
Can not transfer photos to computer: OS not compatible with camera or transfer software. Use card  
reader to copy photos to computer (0179).  
NEF (RAW) photos not displayed in Capture NX 2: Update to latest version (0281).  
n
303  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Image Dust Off option in Capture NX 2 does not have desired effect: Image sensor cleaning changes the  
position of dust on the low-pass filter. Dust off reference data recorded before image sensor  
cleaning is performed can not be used with photographs taken after image sensor cleaning is  
performed. Dust off reference data recorded after image sensor cleaning is performed can not  
be used with photographs taken before image sensor cleaning is performed (0240).  
Computer displays NEF (RAW) images differently from camera: Third-party software does not display  
effects of Picture Controls or Active D-Lighting. Use ViewNX 2 (supplied) or optional Nikon  
software such as Capture NX 2 (available separately).  
Miscellaneous  
Date of recording is not correct: Set camera clock (027, 237).  
Menu item can not be selected: Some options are not available at certain combinations of settings or  
when no memory card is inserted. Note that Battery info option is not available when camera is  
powered by an optional EP-5B power connector and EH-5a AC adapter (0242)  
.
n
304  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error Messages  
This section lists the indicators and error messages that appear in the viewfinder,  
control panel, and monitor.  
Indicator  
Control  
panel  
View-  
finder  
Problem  
Solution  
0
B
Lens aperture ring is not set to Set ring to minimum aperture  
26  
(blinks)  
minimum aperture.  
Low battery.  
(largest f-number).  
Ready a fully-charged spare  
battery.  
H
d
21  
• Battery exhausted.  
• Battery can not be used.  
• Recharge or replace battery.  
• Contact Nikon-authorized  
service representative.  
• Replace the battery, or  
recharge the battery if the  
rechargeable Li-ion battery  
• An extremely exhausted  
rechargeable Li-ion battery  
or a third-party battery is  
H
d
xvii, 21,  
24  
(blinks) (blinks)  
inserted either in the camera is exhausted.  
or in the optional MB-D11  
battery pack.  
B
—
Camera clock is not set.  
Set camera clock.  
27, 237  
159  
(blinks)  
No lens attached, or non-CPU  
lens attached without  
specifying maximum aperture. displayed if maximum aperture  
Aperture shown in stops from is specified.  
maximum aperture.  
Aperture value will be  
F
D
Camera unable to focus using Change composition or focus  
—
93, 99  
(blinks) autofocus.  
manually.  
• No lens attached.  
• Attach non-IX Nikkor lens.  
If a CPU lens is attached,  
remove and reattach the  
lens.  
25, 269  
i
(blinks)  
• Non-CPU lens attached.  
• Select mode A or M.  
• Use a lower ISO sensitivity  
• In shooting mode:  
270  
101  
Subject too bright; photo will  
be overexposed.  
P
S
A
Use optional ND filter  
Increase shutter speed  
Choose a smaller aperture  
(larger f-number)  
280  
69  
70  
q
n
305  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Indicator  
Control  
panel  
View-  
finder  
Problem  
Solution  
0
• Use a higher ISO sensitivity  
• In shooting mode:  
101  
Subject too dark; photo will be  
underexposed.  
P
S
A
Use flash  
143  
69  
70  
r
Lower shutter speed  
Choose a larger aperture  
(smaller f-number)  
A
(blinks)  
%
Change shutter speed or select  
mode M.  
Change shutter speed or select  
mode M.  
A selected in mode S.  
69, 71  
69, 71  
% selected in mode S.  
(blinks)  
Optional flash unit that does  
not support i-TTL flash control  
attached and set to TTL.  
c
Change flash mode setting on  
optional flash unit.  
278  
(blinks)  
(blinks)  
—
If indicator blinks for 3s after Check photo in monitor; if  
flash fires, photo may be  
underexposed.  
c
underexposed, adjust settings  
and try again.  
163  
(blinks)  
Memory insufficient to record • Reduce quality or size.  
85, 88  
175  
29  
n
j
further photos at current  
• Delete photographs.  
(blinks) (blinks) settings, or camera has run out  
of file or folder numbers.  
• Insert new memory card.  
Release shutter. If error persists  
or appears frequently, consult  
Nikon-authorized service  
representative.  
O
Camera malfunction.  
(blinks)  
—
n
306  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Indicator  
Control  
panel  
Monitor  
Problem  
Solution  
0
Camera cannot detect Turn camera off and confirm  
No memory card.  
S
29  
memory card.  
• Error accessing  
memory card.  
that card is correctly inserted.  
• Use Nikon-approved card.  
• Check that contacts are  
clean. If card is damaged,  
contact retailer or Nikon  
representative.  
319  
—
This memory card  
cannot be used.  
Card may be  
W,  
O
damaged.  
(blinks)  
Insert another card.  
• Unable to create new • Delete files or insert new  
29, 175  
247  
folder.  
memory card.  
• Check that Eye-Fi card  
firmware is up to date.  
W,  
O
Camera can not control  
Eye-Fi card.  
• Copy files on Eye-Fi card to 29, 32,  
g
a computer or other device  
and format card, or insert  
new card.  
179  
(blinks)  
Memory card is  
locked. Slide lock to  
“write” position.  
W,  
X
Memory card is locked  
(write protected).  
(blinks)  
W,  
O
Slide card write-protect  
switch to “write” position.  
33  
Not available if  
Eye-Fi card is locked.  
Eye-Fi card is locked  
(write protected).  
(blinks)  
This card is not  
formatted.  
Memory card has not  
been formatted for use in  
camera.  
[C]  
(blinks)  
Format memory card or insert  
new memory card.  
29, 32  
Format the card.  
Failed to update  
flash unit firmware.  
Flash cannot be  
used.  
Contact a Nikon-  
authorized service  
representative.  
Firmware for flash unit  
mounted on camera was  
not updated correctly.  
Contact a Nikon-authorized  
service representative.  
—
—
n
307  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Indicator  
Control  
panel  
Monitor  
Problem  
Solution  
0
Select folder containing  
images from Playback folder  
menu or insert different  
memory card.  
No images on memory  
card or in folder(s)  
selected for playback.  
Folder contains no  
images.  
—
29, 195  
No images can be played  
back until another folder has  
been selected or Hide image  
used to allow at least one  
image to be displayed.  
All images are  
hidden.  
All photos in current  
folder are hidden.  
—
196  
File has been created or  
modified using a  
computer or different  
make of camera, or file is  
corrupt.  
Cannot display this  
file.  
File can not be played back  
on camera.  
—
—
Images created with other  
devices can not be  
retouched.  
• Movies created with other  
devices can not be edited.  
• Movies must be at least  
two seconds long.  
Cannot select this  
file.  
Selected image can not  
be retouched.  
—
—
249  
—
65  
This movie cannot be  
edited.  
The selected movie can  
not be edited.  
Check printer. To resume,  
select Continue (if available).  
Paper in printer is not of Insert paper of correct size  
Check printer.  
Check paper.  
Paper jam.  
—
—
—
—
—
—
Printer error.  
182 *  
182 *  
182 *  
182 *  
182 *  
182 *  
selected size.  
Paper is jammed in  
printer.  
and select Continue.  
Clear jam and select  
Continue.  
Insert paper of selected size  
and select Continue.  
Check ink. To resume, select  
Continue.  
Out of paper.  
Check ink supply.  
Out of ink.  
Printer is out of paper.  
Ink error.  
Replace ink and select  
Continue.  
Printer is out of ink.  
* See printer manual for more information.  
n
308  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
❚❚Nikon D7000 Digital Camera  
Type  
Type  
Lens mount  
Single-lens reflex digital camera  
Nikon F mount (with AF coupling and AF contacts)  
Effective angle of view Approx. 1.5 × lens focal length (Nikon DX format)  
Effective pixels  
Effective pixels  
16.2 million  
Image sensor  
Image sensor  
Total pixels  
23.6 × 15.6 mm CMOS sensor  
16.9 million  
Dust-reduction System Image sensor cleaning, Image Dust Off reference data (optional  
Capture NX 2 software required)  
Storage  
Image size (pixels)  
• 4,928 × 3,264 (L)  
• 3,696 × 2,448 (M)  
• 2,464 × 1,632 (S)  
File format  
•
•
NEF (RAW): 12 or 14 bit, lossless compressed or compressed  
JPEG: JPEG-Baseline compliant with fine (approx. 1 : 4), normal (approx.  
1 : 8), or basic (approx. 1 : 16) compression (Size priority); Optimal  
quality compression available  
•
NEF (RAW)+JPEG: Single photograph recorded in both NEF (RAW) and  
JPEG formats  
Picture Control System Standard, Neutral, Vivid, Monochrome, Portrait, Landscape; selected  
Picture Control can be modified; storage for custom Picture Controls  
Media  
Double slot  
SD (Secure Digital), SDHC, and SDXC memory cards  
Slot 2 can be used for overflow or backup storage or for separate storage  
of copies created using NEF+JPEG; pictures can be copied between  
cards.  
File system  
DCF (Design Rule for Camera File System) 2.0, DPOF (Digital Print Order  
Format), Exif 2.3 (Exchangeable Image File Format for Digital Still  
Cameras), PictBridge  
Viewfinder  
Viewfinder  
Eye-level pentaprism single-lens reflex viewfinder  
Approx. 100% horizontal and 100% vertical  
Frame coverage  
Magnification  
Eyepoint  
Diopter adjustment  
Focusing screen  
Approx. 0.94 × (50 mm f/1.4 lens at infinity, –1.0 m–1  
)
19.5 mm (–1.0 m–1  
–3–+1 m–1  
)
Type B BriteView Clear Matte Mark II screen with AF area brackets  
(framing grid can be displayed)  
Reflex mirror  
Quick return  
Depth-of-field preview Pressing depth-of-field preview button stops lens aperture down to  
value selected by user (A and M modes) or by camera (other modes)  
Lens aperture  
Instant return, electronically controlled  
n
309  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lens  
Compatible lenses  
•
•
DX AF NIKKOR: All functions supported  
Type G or D AF NIKKOR: All functions supported (PC Micro-NIKKOR does  
not support some functions). IX NIKKOR lenses not supported.  
Other AF NIKKOR: All functions supported except 3D color matrix  
metering II. Lenses for F3AF not supported.  
•
•
•
AI-P NIKKOR: All functions supported except 3D color matrix metering II  
Non-CPU: Can be used in modes A and M; color matrix metering and  
aperture value display supported if user provides lens data (AI lenses  
only)  
Electronic rangefinder can be used if maximum aperture is f/5.6 or faster.  
Shutter  
Type  
Speed  
Electronically-controlled vertical-travel focal-plane shutter  
1/8000 – 30 s in steps of 1/3 or 1/2 EV, bulb, time (requires optional ML-L3  
remote control), X250  
X=1/250 s; synchronizes with shutter at 1/320 s or slower (flash range drops  
at speeds between 1/250 and 1/320 s)  
Flash sync speed  
Release  
Release mode  
S (single frame), CL (continuous low speed), CH (continuous high speed),  
J (quiet shutter-release), E (self-timer), 4 (remote control), MUP (mirror  
up)  
Frame advance rate  
(CIPA guidelines)  
Self-timer  
1–5 fps (CL) or 6 fps (CH)  
2 s, 5 s, 10 s, 20 s; 1–9 exposures at intervals of 0.5, 1, 2, or 3 s  
Remote release modes Delayed remote, quick-response remote, remote mirror-up  
Exposure  
Metering  
TTL exposure metering using 2,016-pixel RGB sensor  
Metering method  
•
Matrix: 3D color matrix metering II (type G and D lenses); color matrix  
metering II (other CPU lenses); color matrix metering available with  
non-CPU lenses if user provides lens data  
•
Center-weighted: Weight of 75% given to 8 mm circle in center of frame.  
Diameter of circle can be changed to 6, 10, or 13 mm, or weighting can  
be based on average of entire frame (fixed at 8 mm when non-CPU  
lens is used)  
•
Spot: Meters 3.5 mm circle (about 2.5% of frame) centered on selected  
focus point (on center focus point when non-CPU lens is used)  
Matrix or center-weighted metering: 0–20 EV  
Range (ISO 100, f/1.4  
lens, 20 °C/68 °F)  
Exposure meter  
coupling  
•
•
Spot metering: 2–20 EV  
Combined CPU and AI  
n
310  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Exposure  
Mode  
Auto (i auto; j auto (flash off)); scene (k portrait; l landscape; p child; m sports;  
n close up; o night portrait; r night landscape; s party/indoor; t beach/snow; u sunset;  
vdusk/dawn; w pet portrait; xcandlelight; y blossom; z autumn colors; 0 food;  
1 silhouette; 2 high key; 3 low key); programmed auto with flexible program  
(P); shutter-priority auto (S); aperture-priority auto (A); manual (M); U1 (user  
settings 1); U2 (user settings 2)  
Exposure compensation –5 – +5 EV in increments of 1/3 or 1/2 EV  
Exposure bracketing 2–3 frames in steps of 1/3, 1/2, 2/3, 1, or 2 EV  
Flash bracketing  
White balance  
bracketing  
2–3 frames in steps of 1/3, 1/2, 2/3, 1, or 2 EV  
2–3 frames in steps of 1, 2, or 3  
ADL bracketing  
2 frames using selected value for one frame or 3 frames using preset  
values for all frames  
Exposure lock  
Luminosity locked at detected value with AE-L/AF-L button  
ISO 100 – 6400 in steps of 1/3 or 1/2 EV. Can also be set to approx. 0.3, 0.5,  
0.7, 1, or 2 EV (ISO 25600 equivalent) above ISO 6400; auto ISO sensitivity  
control available  
ISO sensitivity  
(Recommended  
Exposure Index)  
Active D-Lighting  
Auto, Extra high, High, Normal, Low, Off  
Focus  
Autofocus  
Nikon Multi-CAM 4800DX autofocus sensor module with TTL phase  
detection, fine-tuning, 39 focus points (including 9 cross-type sensors),  
and AF-assist illuminator (range approx. 0.5–3 m/1 ft. 8 in.–9 ft. 10 in.)  
–1 – +19 EV (ISO 100, 20 °C/68 °F)  
Detection range  
Lens servo  
•
Autofocus (AF): Single-servo AF (AF-S); continuous-servo AF (AF-C); auto  
AF-S/AF-C selection (AF-A); predictive focus tracking activated  
automatically according to subject status  
•
Manual focus (M): Electronic rangefinder can be used  
Focus point  
AF-area mode  
Can be selected from 39 or 11 focus points  
Single-point AF; 9-, 21-, or 39-point dynamic-area AF, 3D-tracking,  
auto-area AF  
Focus lock  
Focus can be locked by pressing shutter-release button halfway (single-  
servo AF) or by pressing AE-L/AF-L button  
n
311  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Flash  
Built-in flash  
i, k, p, n, o, s, w: Auto flash with auto pop-up  
P, S, A, M, 0: Manual pop-up with button release  
Guide Number  
Flash control  
Approx. 12/39, 12/39 with manual flash (m/ft, ISO 100, 20 °C/68 °F)  
•
TTL: i-TTL balanced fill-flash and standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR  
using 2,016-pixel RGB sensor are available with built-in flash and  
SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, or SB-400 (i-TTL balanced fill-flash is  
available when matrix or center-weighted metering is selected)  
Auto aperture: Available with SB-900/SB-800 and CPU lens  
Non-TTL auto: Supported flash units include SB-900, SB-800, SB-28,  
SB-27, and SB-22S  
•
•
•
Distance-priority manual: Available with SB-900, SB-800, SB-700  
Flash mode  
• i, k, p, n, s, w: Auto, auto with red-eye reduction, off; fill-flash and  
red-eye reduction available with optional flash units  
• o: Auto slow sync, auto slow sync with red-eye reduction, off; slow  
sync and slow sync with red-eye reduction available with optional  
flash units  
• l, m, r, t, u, v, x, y, z, 1, 2, 3: Fill-flash and red-eye reduction  
available with optional flash units  
• 0: Fill-flash  
•
P, A: Fill-flash, rear-curtain with slow sync, slow sync, slow sync with  
red-eye reduction, red-eye reduction  
•
S, M: Fill-flash, rear-curtain sync, red-eye reduction  
Flash compensation  
–3 – +1 EV in increments of 1/3 or 1/2 EV  
Flash-ready indicator Lights when built-in flash or optional flash unit such as SB-900, SB-800,  
SB-700, SB-600, SB-400, SB-80DX, SB-28DX, or SB-50DX is fully charged;  
blinks for 3 s after flash is fired at full output  
Accessory shoe  
ISO 518 hot-shoe with sync and data contacts and safety lock  
Nikon Creative Lighting Advanced Wireless Lighting supported with built-in flash, SB-900,  
System (CLS)  
SB-800, SB-700, or SU-800 as commander and SB-900, SB-800, SB-700,  
SB-600, or SB-R200 as remotes; Auto FP high-speed sync and modeling  
illumination supported with all CLS-compatible flash units except  
SB-400; Flash Color Information Communication and FV lock supported  
with all CLS-compatible flash units  
Sync terminal  
AS-15 sync terminal adapter (available separately)  
White balance  
White balance  
Auto (2 types), incandescent, fluorescent (7 types), direct sunlight, flash,  
cloudy, shade, preset manual (up to 5 values can be stored), choose color  
temperature (2500 K–10000 K), all with fine tuning  
n
312  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Live view  
Lens servo  
•
•
Autofocus (AF): Single-servo AF (AF-S); full-time servo AF (AF-F)  
Manual focus (M)  
AF-area mode  
Autofocus  
Face-priority AF, wide-area AF, normal-area AF, subject-tracking AF  
Contrast-detect AF anywhere in frame (camera selects focus point  
automatically when face-priority AF or subject-tracking AF is selected)  
Movie  
Metering  
TTL exposure metering using main image sensor  
Matrix  
• 1,920 × 1,080 (24p); 24 (23.976) fps • 1,280 × 720 (30p); 30 (29.97) fps  
Metering method  
Frame size  
(pixels) and  
frame rate  
NTSC  
PAL  
• 1,280 × 720 (24p); 24 (23.976) fps  
• 1,920 × 1,080 (24p); 24 (23.976) fps • 1,280 × 720 (25p); 25 fps  
• 1,280 × 720 (24p); 24 (23.976) fps • 640 × 424 (25p); 25 fps  
• 640 × 424 (30p); 30 (29.97) fps  
Choice of normal and high quality available.  
Approx. 20 minutes  
MOV  
Maximum length  
File format  
Video compression  
H.264/MPEG-4 Advanced Video Coding  
Audio recording format Linear PCM  
Audio recording device Built-in monaural or external stereo microphone; sensitivity adjustable  
Monitor  
Monitor  
7.5-cm/3-in., 921k-dot (VGA), low-temperature polysilicon TFT LCD with  
170 ° viewing angle, 100% frame coverage, and brightness adjustment  
Playback  
Playback  
Full-frame and thumbnail (4, 9, or 72 images or calendar) playback with  
playback zoom, movie playback, slide show, highlights, histogram  
display, auto image rotation, and image comment (up to 36 characters)  
Interface  
USB  
Hi-Speed USB  
Video output  
NTSC, PAL; images can be displayed on external device while camera  
monitor is on  
HDMI output  
Type C mini-pin HDMI connector; camera monitor turns off when HDMI  
cable is connected  
Accessory terminal  
Remote cord: MC-DC2 (available separately)  
GPS unit: GP-1 (available separately)  
Stereo mini-pin jack (3.5mm diameter)  
Audio input  
Supported languages  
Supported languages Arabic, Chinese (Simplified and Traditional), Czech, Danish, Dutch,  
English, Finnish, French, German, Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Korean,  
Norwegian, Polish, Portuguese, Russian, Spanish, Swedish, Thai, Turkish  
n
313  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Power source  
Battery  
One rechargeable Li-ion EN-EL15 battery  
Battery pack  
Optional MB-D11 multi-power battery pack with one rechargeable  
Nikon EN-EL15 Li-ion battery or six AA alkaline, NiMH, or lithium  
batteries  
AC adapter  
EH-5a AC adapter; requires EP-5B power connector (available separately)  
Tripod socket  
Tripod socket  
1/4 in. (ISO 1222)  
Dimensions/weight  
Dimensions (W × H × D) Approx. 132 × 105 × 77 mm (5.2 × 4.1 × 3 in.)  
Weight  
Approx. 690 g (1 lb. 8.3 oz.; camera body only); approx. 780 g (1 lb.  
11.5 oz.) with battery and memory card but without body cap  
Operating environment  
Temperature  
0–40 °C (+32–104 °F)  
Humidity  
Less than 85% (no condensation)  
• Unless otherwise stated, all figures are for a camera with a fully-charged battery operating at an ambient  
temperature of 20 °C (68 °F).  
• Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the hardware and software described in this  
manual at any time and without prior notice. Nikon will not be held liable for damages that may result  
from any mistakes that this manual may contain.  
n
314  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MH-25 battery charger  
Rated input  
(in North America)  
Rated input  
(in other regions)  
Rated output  
AC 120 V, 60 Hz, 0.2 A  
AC 100–240 V, 50/60 Hz, 0.23–0.12 A  
DC 8.4 V/1.2 A  
Supported batteries  
Charging time  
Nikon rechargeable Li-ion battery EN-EL15  
Approx. 2 hours 35 minutes at an ambient temperature of 25 °C (77 °F)  
when no charge remains  
Operating temperature 0–40 °C (+32–104 °F)  
Dimensions (W × H × D) Approx. 82.5 × 28 × 65 mm (3.2 × 1.1 × 2.6 in.), excluding projections  
Length of power cable Approx. 1.8 m (6 ft.)  
Weight  
Approx. 110 g (3.9 oz.), excluding power cable and AC wall adapter  
EN-EL15 rechargeable Li-ion battery  
Type  
Rated capacity  
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery  
7.0 V/1900 mAh  
Dimensions (W × H × D) Approx. 40 × 56 × 20.5 mm (1.6 × 2.2 × 0.8 in.)  
Weight Approx. 88 g (3.1 oz.), excluding terminal cover  
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR lens  
Type  
Type G AF-S DX NIKKOR zoom lens with built-in CPU and F mount for use  
exclusively with Nikon DX-format digital SLR cameras  
Focal length  
18–105mm  
Maximum aperture  
Lens construction  
Angle of view  
f/3.5–5.6  
15 elements in 11 groups (including 1 aspherical element and 1 ED glass element)  
76 °–15 ° 20 ´  
Focal length scale  
Graduated in millimeters (18, 24, 35, 50, 70, 105)  
Distance information Output to camera  
Zoom  
Manual zoom using independent zoom ring  
Focusing  
Nikon Internal Focusing (IF) system with autofocus controlled by Silent  
Wave Motor; manual focus supported when A-M switch is set to A or M.  
Focus can be adjusted by rotating lens focus ring while focus is locked in  
single-servo autofocus. Do not use focus ring while camera is focusing.  
Lens-shift method using voice coil motors (VCMs)  
Vibration reduction  
Minimum focus distance 0.45 m (1.5 ft.) from focal plane mark (0100) at all zoom positions  
Diaphragm blades  
Diaphragm  
7 (rounded diaphragm opening)  
Fully automatic  
Aperture range  
Metering  
•
18 mm focal length: f/3.5–22  
•
105 mm focal length: f/5.6–38  
Full aperture  
Filter-attachment size 67 mm (P=0.75 mm)  
Dimensions  
Approx. 76 mm diameter × 89 mm/3.0 × 3.5 in. (distance from camera lens-mount  
flange)  
Weight  
Approx. 420 g (14.8 oz.)  
Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the hardware and software described in this  
manual at any time and without prior notice. Nikon will not be held liable for damages that may result from  
any mistakes that this manual may contain.  
n
315  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚The AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105 mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR  
The AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR is for use exclusively with Nikon DX  
format digital cameras. Superior optical performance and image rendering are  
ensured by the use of aspherical lens elements and elements made using extra-low  
dispersion (ED) glass to correct chromatic aberration. A rounded aperture produces  
soft, esthetically-pleasing blurring of point light sources in out-of-focus areas of the  
image (bokeh). If the camera is equipped with an AF-ON button, vibration reduction  
will not be activated when the AF-ON button is pressed.  
A Using the Built-in Flash  
When using the built-in flash, be sure the subject is at a range of at least 0.6 m (2 ft.) and  
remove lens hoods to prevent vignetting (shadows created where the end of the lens  
obscures the built-in flash).  
Camera  
Zoom position  
18 mm  
24 mm  
Minimum distance without vignetting  
2.5 m/ 8 ft. 2in.  
D5000, D3100, D3000  
1.0 m/ 3 ft. 3in.  
D700, D7000, D300 series,  
D200, D100, D80  
All  
No vignetting at any focus distance  
18 mm  
24 mm  
18 mm  
24 mm  
18 mm  
24 mm  
35 mm  
1.5 m/ 4 ft. 11in.  
No vignetting at any focus distance  
1.0 m/ 3 ft. 3in.  
No vignetting at any focus distance  
2.5 m/ 8 ft. 2in.  
D90, D70 series  
D50  
D60, D40 series  
1.0 m/ 3 ft. 3in.  
No vignetting at any focus distance  
Because the built-in flash units for the D100 and D70 can only cover the angle of view of a  
lens with a focal of 20 mm or more; vignetting will occur at a focal length of 18 mm.  
D Lens Care  
• Keep the CPU contacts clean.  
• Use a blower to remove dust and lint from the lens surfaces. To remove smudges and  
fingerprints, apply a small amount of ethanol or lens cleaner to a soft, clean cotton cloth  
or lens-cleaning tissue and clean from the center outwards using a circular motion, taking  
care not to leave smears or touch the glass with your fingers.  
• Never use organic solvents such as paint thinner or benzene to clean the lens.  
• The lens hood or NC filters can be used to protect the front lens element.  
• Attach the front and rear caps before placing the lens in its flexible pouch.  
• When a lens hood is attached, do not pick up or hold the lens or camera using only the  
hood.  
• If the lens will not be used for an extended period, store it in a cool, dry location to prevent  
mold and rust. Do not store in direct sunlight or with naphtha or camphor moth balls.  
• Keep the lens dry. Rusting of the internal mechanism can cause irreparable damage.  
• Leaving the lens in extremely hot locations could damage or warp parts made from  
reinforced plastic.  
n
316  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A Supplied Accessories  
• 67 mm Snap-on Front Lens Cap LC-67  
• Rear Lens Cap  
• Flexible Lens Pouch CL-1018  
• Bayonet Hood HB-32 (attaches as shown at  
right)  
A Optional Accessories  
• 67 mm screw-on filters  
• Rear Lens Cap LF-1 or Rear Lens Cap LF-4  
A A Note on Wide-Angle Lenses  
Autofocus may not provide the desired results with wide– and super-wide–angle lenses in  
the following situations:  
1 The subject does not fill the focus point.  
If the subject does not fill the focus point, the camera  
may focus on the background and the subject may be  
out of focus.  
Example: A far-off portrait subject at  
some distance from the  
background  
2 The subject contains many fine details.  
The camera may have difficulty focusing on subjects  
that contain many fine details or that are lacking in  
contrast.  
Example: A field of flowers  
In these cases, use manual focus, or use focus lock to focus on another subject at  
the same distance and then recompose the photograph. For more information, see  
“Getting Good Results with Autofocus” (093).  
n
317  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚Supported Standards  
•
DCF Version 2.0: The Design Rule for Camera File Systems (DCF) is a standard widely  
used in the digital camera industry to ensure compatibility among different makes  
of camera.  
•
•
DPOF: Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) is an industry-wide standard that allows  
pictures to be printed from print orders stored on the memory card.  
Exif version 2.3: The D7000 supports Exif (Exchangeable Image File Format for Digital  
Still Cameras) version 2.3, a standard in which information stored with  
photographs is used for optimal color reproduction when the images are output  
on Exif-compliant printers.  
•
•
PictBridge: A standard developed through cooperation with the digital camera and  
printer industries, allowing photographs to be output directly to a printer without  
first transferring them to a computer.  
HDMI: High-Definition Multimedia Interface is a standard for multimedia interfaces  
used in consumer electronics and AV devices capable of transmitting audiovisual  
data and control signals to HDMI-compliant devices via a single cable connection.  
Trademark Information  
Macintosh, Mac OS, and QuickTime are registered trademarks of Apple Inc. in the United States  
and/or other countries. Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Vista are either registered  
trademarks, or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other  
countries. PictBridge is a trademark. The SD, SDHC, and SDXC logos are trademarks of the  
SD-3C, LLC. HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or  
registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. All other trade names mentioned in this manual  
or the other documentation provided with your Nikon product are trademarks or registered  
trademarks of their respective holders.  
n
318  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Approved Memory Cards  
The following SD memory cards have been tested and approved for use in the D7000.  
Cards with class 6 or faster write speeds are recommended for movie recording.  
Recording may end unexpectedly when cards with slower write speeds are used.  
SD memory cards  
SDHC memory cards 2  
4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB  
4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB  
SDXC memory cards 3  
SanDisk  
Toshiba  
64 GB  
Panasonic  
Lexar Media  
Platinum II  
Professional  
4 GB, 6 GB, 8 GB, 12 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB 48 GB, 64 GB  
4 GB, 8 GB  
1 GB, 2 GB 1  
4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB  
4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB  
—
1 Check that any card readers or other devices with which the card will be used support 2 GB cards.  
2 Check that any card readers or other devices with which the card will be used are  
SDHC-compliant. The camera supports UHS-I.  
3 Check that any card readers or other devices with which the card will be used are  
SDXC-compliant. The camera supports UHS-I.  
Other cards have not been tested. For more details on the above cards, please  
contact the manufacturer.  
n
319  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Memory Card Capacity  
The following table shows the approximate number of pictures that can be stored on  
a 8 GB SanDisk Extreme SDHC card at different image quality and size settings.  
File size 1  
No. of images 1  
Buffer capacity 2  
Image quality  
NEF (RAW), Lossless  
compressed, 12-bit  
Image size  
—
15.5 MB  
291  
11  
NEF (RAW), Lossless  
compressed, 14-bit  
—
19.4 MB  
223  
10  
NEF (RAW), Compressed, 12-bit  
NEF (RAW), Compressed, 14-bit  
—
—
L
M
S
L
M
S
13.6 MB  
16.7 MB  
7.8 MB  
4.4 MB  
2.0 MB  
3.9 MB  
2.2 MB  
1.0 MB  
2.0 MB  
1.1 MB  
0.5 MB  
398  
330  
813  
15  
12  
31  
JPEG fine 3  
JPEG normal 3  
JPEG basic 3  
1400  
3100  
1600  
2800  
6000  
3100  
5500  
11000  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
L
M
S
1 All figures are approximate. File size varies with scene recorded.  
2 Maximum number of exposures that can be stored in memory buffer at ISO 100. Drops if Optimal  
quality is selected for JPEG compression or long exposure noise reduction is on.  
3 Figures assume JPEG compression is set to Size priority. Selecting Optimal quality increases the file  
size of JPEG images; number of images and buffer capacity drop accordingly.  
A d7—Max. Continuous Release (0217)  
The maximum number of photographs that can be taken in a single burst can be set to any  
amount between 1 and 100.  
n
320  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Battery Life  
The number of shots that can be taken with fully-charged batteries varies with the  
condition of the battery, temperature, and how the camera is used. In the case of AA  
batteries, capacity also varies with make and storage conditions; some batteries can  
not be used. Sample figures for the camera and optional MB-D11 multi-power  
battery pack are given below.  
•
CIPA standard 1  
One EN-EL15 battery (camera): Approximately 1050 shots  
One EN-EL15 battery (MB-D11): Approximately 1050 shots  
Six AA batteries (MB-D11): Approximately 650 shots  
Two EN-EL15 batteries (one in camera and one in MB-D11): Approximately 2100 shots  
•
Nikon standard 2  
One EN-EL15 battery (camera): Approximately 4500 shots  
One EN-EL15 battery (MB-D11): Approximately 4500 shots  
Six AA batteries (MB-D11): Approximately 1700 shots  
Two EN-EL15 batteries (one in camera and one in MB-D11): Approximately 9000 shots  
1 Measured at 23 °C/73.4 °F ( 2 °C/3.6 °F) with an AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G  
ED VR lens under the following test conditions: lens cycled from infinity to minimum  
range and one photograph taken at default settings once every 30 s; flash fired once  
every other shot. Live view not used.  
2 Measured at 20 °C/68 °F with an AF-S NIKKOR 70–200mm f/2.8G ED VR II lens under the  
following test conditions: image quality set to JPEG basic, image size set to M (medium),  
shutter speed 1/250 s, shutter-release button pressed halfway for three seconds and focus  
cycled from infinity to minimum range three times; six shots are then taken in succession  
and monitor turned on for five seconds and then turned off; cycle repeated once  
exposure meters have turned off.  
The following can reduce battery life:  
• Using the monitor  
• Keeping the shutter-release button pressed halfway  
• Repeated autofocus operations  
• Taking NEF (RAW) photographs  
• Slow shutter speeds  
• Using the optional WT-4 wireless transmitter  
• Using a GP-1 GPS unit  
• Using VR (vibration reduction) mode with VR lenses  
To ensure that you get the most from rechargeable Nikon EN-EL15 batteries:  
• Keep the battery contacts clean. Soiled contacts can reduce battery performance.  
• Use batteries immediately after charging. Batteries will lose their charge if left  
unused.  
n
321  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
t (Memory buffer).................. 38, 79  
N (Flash-ready indicator) ............. 39  
D Switch..........................................229  
Auto distortion control ..............205  
Auto flash........................................145  
Auto FP high-speed sync. 222, 223  
Auto image rotation....................239  
Auto ISO sensitivity control......103  
Auto meter-off .......................39, 214  
Auto meter-off delay...................214  
Auto-area AF.................................... 95  
Autofocus............................50, 91–98  
Autofocus mode (Live view/movie  
AF).............................................50, 211  
Auto-servo AF.................................. 91  
Available settings.........................292  
Symbols  
S (Single frame) ...........................7, 77  
CL (Continuous low speed) .....7,77,  
78, 217  
CH (Continuous high speed)...7,77,  
78  
Numerics  
12-bit .................................................. 87  
14-bit .................................................. 87  
2,016-pixel RGB sensor...............310  
3D-tracking ............................... 94, 95  
J (Quiet shutter-release).........7, 77  
E (Self-timer)........................7, 77, 80  
4 (Remote control)............7, 77, 80  
MUP (Mirror up)......................7, 77, 83  
i (Auto mode)......................... 35, 36  
j (Auto (flash off) mode) .... 35, 36  
h (Scene)................................... 40  
k (Portrait) ....................................... 41  
l (Landscape)................................. 41  
p (Child)............................................ 41  
m (Sports).......................................... 41  
n (Close up) ..................................... 42  
o (Night Portrait)........................... 42  
r (Night Landscape) .................... 42  
s (Party/Indoor)............................. 42  
t (Beach/Snow) ............................. 43  
u (Sunset)......................................... 43  
v (Dusk/Dawn)............................... 43  
w (Pet Portrait)................................ 43  
x (Candlelight)................................. 44  
y (Blossom)...................................... 44  
z (Autumn Colors) ........................ 44  
0 (Food)............................................. 44  
1 (Silhouette).................................. 45  
2 (High Key) .................................... 45  
3 (Low Key)...................................... 45  
P (Programmed auto).................... 68  
S (Shutter-priority auto) ............... 69  
A (Aperture-priority auto)............ 70  
M (Manual) ........................................ 71  
U1/U2.................................................... 75  
! (Face-priority AF) ...................... 50  
$ (Wide-area AF) ........................... 50  
% (Normal-area AF)....................... 50  
& (Subject-tracking AF) ............ 50  
a (Matrix).......................................105  
Z (Center-weighted) ....... 105, 213  
b (Spot)..........................................105  
E (Exposure compensation)....107  
U (Flexible program) ..................... 68  
a (Live view)............................ 49, 57  
R (Info) button........................ 10, 12  
m (White balance) .......................117  
L (Preset manual) .......... 117, 123  
D (bracketing) ................. 109, 164  
d (Help)............................................. 18  
I (Focus indicator)........38, 97, 100  
A
AC adapter............................ 280, 282  
Accessories .....................................280  
Accessory terminal ......................281  
Active D-Lighting............... 114, 139  
Add items (My Menu) .................265  
ADL bracketing ................... 114, 229  
Adobe RGB .....................................141  
AE & flash (Auto bracketing set) ....  
109, 229  
B
Backlight..........................................219  
Backup (Role played by card in  
Slot 2)................................................ 89  
Battery............... 21, 24, 35, 242, 315  
Battery info.....................................242  
Battery order..................................221  
Battery pack ..... 220, 221, 235, 242,  
280  
AE lock..............................................106  
AE only (Auto bracketing set).109,  
229  
Beep........................................ 215, 216  
Black-and-white (Monochrome)....  
253  
AE-L ...................................................106  
AE-L/AF-L button............. 97, 106, 232  
AF...........................................50, 91–98  
AF area brackets .........................9, 34  
AF fine tune....................................246  
AF point illumination..................209  
AF-A..................................................... 91  
AF-area mode........................... 50, 94  
AF-area mode (Live view/movie  
AF)...................................................... 50  
AF-assist................................. 273, 279  
AF-C............................................91, 208  
AF-C priority selection................208  
AF-F..................................................... 50  
AF-S.....................................50, 91, 208  
AF-S priority selection................208  
After delete.....................................200  
A-M switch........................................ 25  
Amber..................................... 119, 255  
Aperture .............................. 67, 70, 71  
Aperture-priority auto.................. 70  
Aspect ratio....................................252  
Assign AE-L/AF-L button ...........232  
Assign Fn button ..........................230  
Assign MB-D11 4 button..........235  
Assign preview button...............232  
Attaching the lens.......................... 25  
Audio video (A/V) cable.............191  
Auto (White balance)..................117  
Auto bracketing.................. 109, 229  
Auto bracketing set.....................229  
Blue ......................................... 119, 255  
Blue intensifier (Filter effects) ..254  
Body cap.............................. 4, 25, 281  
Border (PictBridge) ............ 184, 187  
Bracketing............................. 109, 229  
Bracketing order...........................229  
Built-in AF-assist illuminator ....210  
Bulb.............................................. 71, 73  
Burst...............................153, 217, 230  
C
Calendar playback .......................172  
Camera Control Pro 2..................281  
Capture NX 2........................ 240, 281  
CEC ....................................................194  
Center-weighted area.................213  
Charging a battery......................... 21  
Choose color temp. (White  
balance) ............................... 117, 122  
Choose end point .......................... 63  
Choose start point ......................... 63  
CL mode shooting speed..........217  
Clean image sensor.....................284  
Clock ..........................................27, 237  
Clock battery.................................... 28  
Cloudy (White balance) .............117  
CLS.....................................................276  
Color balance.................................255  
322  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Color outline..................................262  
Color sketch ...................................262  
Color space.....................................141  
Color temperature.... 117, 118, 122  
Commander mode......................225  
Compatible lens ...........................269  
Compressed (Type) ........................87  
Computer........................................179  
Connector for external  
microphone.......................................3  
Continuous high speed ....7, 77, 78  
Continuous low speed .....7, 77, 78,  
217  
Continuous release mode 7, 77, 78  
Continuous-servo AF...........91, 208  
Control panel......................................8  
Copy image(s) ...............................197  
Copyright...............................169, 243  
Copyright information ...............243  
CPU lens ...................................26, 269  
Creative Lighting System ..........276  
Cross screen (Filter effects).......254  
Custom Settings...........................206  
Customize command dials.......233  
Cyanotype (Monochrome) .......253  
Focus-mode switch ................ 25, 99  
Format.......................................32, 236  
Format memory card...........32, 236  
Frame interval (Slide show)......201  
Front-curtain sync........................145  
Full-frame playback.....................163  
FV lock..............................................149  
E
Easy exposure compensation..212  
Edit movie...................................64, 66  
Ethernet..................................181, 280  
EV steps for exposure cntrl.......211  
Exif version 2.3 .....................142, 318  
Exposure..........................67, 106, 107  
Exposure bracketing..........109, 229  
Exposure compensation............107  
Exposure delay mode.................219  
Exposure indicator......................... 72  
Exposure lock ................................106  
Exposure meters....................39, 214  
Exposure program.......................298  
External microphone..............57, 60  
Eye-Fi upload.................................247  
G
GP-1..........................................162, 281  
GPS...........................................162, 169  
GPS data..........................................169  
Green.......................................119, 255  
Green intensifier (Filter effects)......  
254  
H
H.264.................................................313  
HDMI........................................193, 318  
HDMI mini-pin connector.... 3, 193  
HDMI-CEC .......................................194  
Help..................................................... 18  
Hi (Sensitivity) ...............................102  
Hide image.....................................196  
High definition.....................193, 318  
High ISO NR....................................205  
Highlights ..............................166, 197  
Histogram.................... 166, 167, 197  
F
File naming.....................................204  
File number sequence................218  
Filter effects...........................134, 254  
Fine tune optimal exposure.....213  
Fine-tuning white balance .......119  
Firmware version..........................247  
Fisheye.............................................261  
Flash..... 39, 143, 144, 148, 149, 275  
Flash (White balance).................117  
Flash bracketing ..................109, 228  
Flash cntrl for built-in flash.......223  
Flash compensation....................148  
Flash mode.....................................144  
Flash only (Auto bracketing set)....  
109, 229  
Flash range.....................................147  
Flash ready indicator ..39, 149, 279  
Flash shutter speed............145, 223  
Flash sync speed ....... 222, 223, 310  
Flash warning................................219  
Flexible program............................ 68  
Flicker reduction ............53, 59, 237  
Fluorescent (White balance)....117  
Fn button...................... 149, 161, 230  
f-number........................................... 70  
Focal length ..........................160, 274  
Focal length scale .......................... 25  
Focal plane mark..........................100  
Focus indicator................38, 97, 100  
Focus lock ......................................... 97  
Focus mode...................................... 50  
Focus point38, 50, 94, 96, 100, 209,  
210  
D
Date and time.........................27, 237  
Date format.............................27, 237  
Daylight saving time............27, 237  
DCF version 2.0....................142, 318  
Default settings 151, 202, 207, 295  
Delayed remote (Remote control  
mode)................................................80  
Delete........................................47, 175  
Delete all images..........................176  
Delete current image...........47, 175  
Delete selected images .............176  
Depth-of-field ..................................72  
Depth-of-field preview button .72,  
228, 232  
Destination (Movie settings).......60  
Device control (HDMI)................194  
Digital Print Order Format .......182,  
185, 189, 318  
Diopter adjustment control .......34,  
281  
I
Image comment...........................238  
Image Dust Off ref photo..........240  
Image overlay................................256  
Image quality................................... 85  
Image review........................163, 200  
Image size......................................... 88  
Incandescent (White balance) 117  
Index print......................................188  
In-focus indicator...........38, 97, 100  
Information .............................10, 165  
Information display..............10, 219  
Interval timer shooting..............155  
ISO display and adjustment.....216  
ISO sensitivity.......................101, 103  
ISO sensitivity settings......102, 103  
ISO sensitivity step value...........211  
i-TTL .........................................146, 225  
Direct sunlight (White balance).....  
117  
J
Display mode.................................197  
Distortion control ........................261  
D-Lighting ......................................251  
DPOF.....................182, 185, 189, 318  
Dynamic-area AF......................94, 95  
JPEG .................................................... 85  
JPEG basic......................................... 85  
JPEG compression ......................... 87  
JPEG fine............................................ 85  
JPEG normal..................................... 85  
Focus point wrap-around .........209  
Focus tracking........................93, 209  
Focus tracking with lock-on.....209  
Focusing screen............................309  
323  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Monochrome.................................253  
Monochrome (Set Picture Control)  
131  
Mounting mark............................... 25  
Movie quality (Movie settings).. 60  
Movie settings................................. 60  
Movie-record button .................... 58  
Movies................................................ 57  
Multiple exposure........................152  
My Menu .........................................265  
Print (DPOF)....................................185  
Print select......................................185  
Print set (DPOF).............................189  
Printing ............................................182  
Programmed auto.......................... 68  
Protecting photographs............174  
L
LAN....................................................280  
Landscape (Set Picture Control) ....  
131  
Language .................................27, 238  
Large (Image size).......................... 88  
LCD....................................................237  
LCD brightness..............................237  
LCD illumination...........................219  
Lens..................25, 26, 159, 246, 269  
Lens cap............................................. 25  
Lens distance information ........146  
Lens focus ring.................. 25, 55, 99  
Lens mount ........................ 4, 25, 100  
Lens VR switch.......................... 25, 26  
Live view..................................... 49, 57  
Live view switch....................... 49, 57  
Live view/movie AF ..............50, 211  
Local area network ......................280  
Lock mirror up for cleaning......286  
Long exp. NR..................................205  
Lossless compressed (Type)....... 87  
Q
Quick retouch................................260  
Quick-response remote (Remote  
control mode)................................ 80  
N
R
NEF ......................................85, 87, 204  
NEF (RAW).........................85, 87, 258  
NEF (RAW) bit depth ..................... 87  
NEF (RAW) processing................258  
NEF (RAW) recording .................... 87  
Neutral (Set Picture Control)....131  
Nikon Transfer 2.................. 179, 180  
Non-CPU lens ...................... 159, 270  
Non-CPU lens data.......................159  
Number of focus points.............210  
Number of shots...........................321  
Rank items (My Menu)................267  
RAW Slot 1 - JPEG Slot 2 (Role  
played by card in Slot 2)............. 89  
Rear lens cap.................................... 25  
Rear-curtain sync .........................145  
Recent settings .............................268  
Red intensifier (Filter effects) ...254  
Red-eye correction ......................251  
Red-eye reduction .......................145  
Release button to use dial ........234  
Release mode ..............................7, 77  
Release mode dial......................7, 77  
Release mode dial lock release ...7,  
77  
M
O
Magenta ................................ 119, 255  
Main command dial ...................... 13  
Manage Picture Control.............136  
Manual ........................................ 71, 99  
Manual (Flash cntrl for built-in  
flash)................................................224  
Manual focus ............................ 55, 99  
Manual movie settings (Movie  
OK button (shooting mode).....229  
Optimal quality (JPEG  
compression) ................................. 87  
Optional flash...................... 224, 275  
Output resolution (HDMI).........194  
Overflow (Role played by card in  
Slot 2)................................................ 89  
Overview data...............................170  
Remote Control.......... 7, 77, 80, 281  
Remote control mode .................. 80  
Remote cord ....................73, 83, 281  
Remote mirror-up (Remote  
control mode)................................ 80  
Remove items (My Menu) .........266  
Repeating flash ............ 76, 151, 224  
Reset ..............................151, 202, 207  
Reset custom settings ................207  
Reset shooting menu .................202  
Reset user settings......................... 76  
Resize................................................259  
Restoring default settings........151,  
202, 207, 295  
Retouch menu...............................248  
Reverse indicators........................234  
RGB....................................................141  
Role played by card in Slot 2...... 89  
Rotate tall........................................200  
settings)........................................... 60  
Max. continuous release............217  
Maximum aperture .....................100  
MB-D11......220, 221, 235, 242, 280  
MB-D11 battery type ..................220  
Medium (Image size) .................... 88  
Memory buffer......................... 38, 79  
Memory card 29, 32, 236, 319, 320  
Memory card capacity................320  
Metering..........................................105  
Microphone...........................4, 57, 60  
Microphone (Movie settings) .... 60  
Miniature effect ............................263  
Minimum aperture ................. 26, 67  
Mired ................................................121  
Mirror..................................80, 83, 286  
Mirror up ................................7, 77, 83  
Mode dial .............................................6  
Modeling flash ..............................228  
Monitor.................... 46, 49, 163, 237  
Monitor cover.................................. 17  
Monitor off delay..........................215  
Monitor pre-flash ............... 146, 149  
P
Page size (PictBridge) ....... 184, 187  
Perspective control......................263  
Photo info ............................. 165, 197  
PictBridge.............................. 182, 318  
Picture Controls .................. 131, 133  
Playback ...................................46, 163  
Playback folder..............................195  
Playback information........ 165, 197  
Playback menu..............................195  
Playback slot and folder.............164  
Playback zoom..............................173  
Portrait (Set Picture Control)....131  
Power connector................ 280, 282  
Power switch.......................................2  
Predictive focus tracking............. 93  
Preset manual (White balance)......  
117, 123  
S
Save selected frame ............... 63, 66  
Save/load settings .......................244  
Saving camera settings..............244  
Scene mode ..................................... 40  
Screen tips ......................................216  
SD memory card.....29, 32, 89, 319,  
320  
Press the shutter-release button  
all the way down ................... 38, 39  
Press the shutter-release button  
halfway...................................... 38, 39  
Select date...................177, 185, 196  
324  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Self-timer ......................7, 77, 80, 214  
Sensitivity ..............................101, 103  
Sepia (Monochrome)..................253  
Set Picture Control.......................131  
Setup menu ...................................236  
Shade (White balance)...............117  
Shooting data................................168  
Shooting menu.............................202  
Shutter-priority auto......................69  
Shutter-release button...38, 39, 97,  
106, 213  
Viewfinder ................. 9, 34, 281, 309  
Viewfinder eyepiece ..................... 81  
Viewfinder eyepiece cap ............. 81  
Viewfinder focus....................34, 281  
Viewfinder grid display..............216  
Viewfinder warning display .....216  
ViewNX 2................................142, 179  
Virtual horizon ..............................245  
Vivid (Set Picture Control).........131  
W
Shutter-release button AE-L ....213  
Side-by-side comparison ..........264  
Single frame.................................7, 77  
Single-point AF.........................94, 95  
Single-servo AF......................91, 208  
Size.......................................................88  
Size priority (JPEG compression)...  
87  
Skylight (Filter effects)................254  
Slide show ......................................201  
Slot ......................................30, 89, 164  
Slot empty release lock..............234  
Slow sync ........................................145  
Small (Image size)...........................88  
Soft (Filter effects)........................254  
Speaker............................................ 4, 5  
Speedlight ......................................275  
sRGB..................................................141  
Standard (Set Picture Control) 131  
Standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR  
146  
Warm filter (Filter effects)..........254  
WB ............................................112, 117  
WB bracketing (Auto bracketing  
set)................................ 112, 114, 229  
White balance ......................112, 117  
White balance bracketing.........112  
Wireless...................................181, 280  
Wireless network.................181, 280  
Wireless transmitter ...........181, 280  
WT-4.........................................181, 280  
Start printing (PictBridge)185, 187  
Storage folder................................203  
Straighten.......................................261  
Sub-command dial.........................13  
T
Television ...............................191, 237  
Thumbnail playback ...................171  
Time ..................................................237  
Time stamp (PictBridge)...184, 187  
Time zone ................................27, 237  
Time zone and date..............27, 237  
Timer..........................................80, 155  
Toning .....................................134, 135  
Trim ...................................................252  
U
USB...........................................180, 182  
USB cable ...............................180, 182  
UTC....................................27, 162, 169  
V
Vibration Reduction.......................26  
Video mode....................................237  
a
325  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
326  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

MTD Lawn Mower MODELS 650 652 User Manual
Multiquip Portable Generator DCA 100SSJU User Manual
Nady Systems Microphone UHF 10 User Manual
NEC Computer Drive N8103 89 User Manual
NeumannBerlin Microphone BS 18 User Manual
NeumannBerlin Microphone RSM 190i User Manual
Nikon Network Card WU 1a User Manual
O2 Innovations Respiratory Product CTA 08 User Manual
Onkyo DVD Player DR S501 User Manual
Oreck Air Cleaner ProShield Air Purifier User Manual